Home

TeSys T LTM R Profibus Motor Management Controller User's Manual

1. Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Parameter name Settings Addr 1 8 Current Th Overload Fault Thermal Overload Fault Enable FLC1 OC1 Motor Full Load Current Ratio FLC2 OC2 Motor High Speed Full Load Current Ratio Reset Level Thermal Overload Fault Reset Threshold Warn Thermal Overload Warning Enable Warn Level Thermal Overload Warning Threshold Curr Ph Imbal Loss CURR PH IMBALANCE Fault Current Phase Imbalance Fault Enable Fault Level Current Phase Imbalance Fault Threshold FitTimeStart Current Phase Imbalance Fault Timeout Starting FitTimeRun Current Phase Imbalance Fault Timeout Running Warn Current Phase Imbalance Warning Enable Warn Level Current Phase Imbalance Warning Threshold CURR PH LOSS Fault Current Phase Loss Fault Enable Fault Time Current Phase Loss Timeout Warn Current Phase Loss Warning Enable Current Curr Ph Reversal Fault Current Phase Reversal Fault Enable continued Long Start Fault Long Start Fault Enable Fault Level Long Start Fault Threshold Fault Time Long Start Fault Timeout Jam Fault Jam Fault Enable Fault Level Jam Fault Threshold Fault Time Jam Fault Timeout Warn Jam Warning Enable Warn Level Jam Warning Threshold 420 1639502 12 2006 Use Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Parameter name Settings Addr 1 8 Current Over Under
2. HHH H H H H H H H HM IH H H H oeoo Eip GAFN Q 299999999 4 H Multiply the current by the number of times that the motor wires pass through the CT windows to determine the amount of current passing through the internal current sensors E Fi You may add multiple passes for one of the following reasons e To increase the current sensed by the internal current sensors to a level that the controller can properly detect e To provide a more accurate reading by the internal current sensors 294 1639502 12 2006 Installation We recommend that you select a controller with an FLC value range that includes the motor FLC However if the motor FLC is less than the FLC range of the controller multiple passes can increase the current level sensed by the internal current sensors to one that the controller can detect For example if you use a controller with an FLC range of 5 to 100 A and the motor FLC is 3 A the controller cannot properly sense the current In this case if you pass the power wiring through the internal current sensors of the controller 2 times the internal current sensors of the controller sense 6 A 2 passes x 3 A a current level that falls within the FLC ra
3. Er mi ZZZZLLL LLL LLL ELLE in 136 5 35 276 1639502 12 2006 Installation Mounting the LTM R Controller and the Expansion Module Overview This section describes how to mount the LTM R controller and the LTM E expansion module on a DIN rail a solid mounting plate or a pre slotted mounting plate known as a TE plate such as a Telequick plate It also describes the accessories needed for mounting as well as how to remove each component Mounting on DIN You can mountthe controller and the expansion module on a 35 mm 1 38 in DIN rail with Rails a thickness of 1 35 mm 0 05 in and 0 75 mm 0 02 in When mounted the controller mounting feet may not extend beyond the controller dimensions see p 274 To mount the controller Step Action 1 On the back of the controller are two DIN rail clips Fit the top clip onto the DIN rail 2 Push the controller in toward the DIN rail until the bottom clip catches The controller clicks into place 1639502 12 2006 277 Installation Removing from To remove the controller from the DIN rail DIN RAIIS Step Action 1 Using a screwdriver pull down the white locking mechanism to release the controller 2 Lift the controller away from the DIN rail 278 1639502 12 2006 Installation
4. What s in this This section contains the following topics Section Topic Page Line Currents 68 Ground Current 70 Average Current 73 Current Phase Imbalance 75 Thermal Capacity Level 76 Motor Temperature Sensor 78 Frequency 78 Line to Line Voltages 79 Line Voltage Imbalance 80 Average Voltage 81 Active Power 82 Reactive Power 83 Power Factor 84 Active Power Consumption 86 Reactive Power Consumption 86 1639502 12 2006 67 Metering and Monitoring Functions Line Currents Description Line Currents Line Current Characteristics Line Current Ratio Line Current Ratio Formulas The LTM R controller measures line currents and provides the value of each phase in amperes and as a percentage of FLC The line currents function returns the rms value in amperes of the phase currents from the 3 CT inputs e L1 phase 1 current e L2 phase 2 current e L3 phase 3 current The LTM R controller performs true rms calculations for line currents up to the 7th harmonic Single phase current is measured from L1 and L3 The line currents function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Unit A Accuracy e 1 for 8 A and 27 A units e 2 for 100 A units Resolution 0 01A Refresh interval 100 ms The L1 L2 and L3 Current Ratio parameter provides the phase current as a percentage of FLC The line current val
5. e n gt l11 lavg x 100 lavg gt Is2 _W e gt Current phase rm amp T1 0 imbalance fault motor starting 12 wm 12 lavg x 100 lavg gt Is2 e AND Current phase I3 13 lavg x 100 lavg gt Is2 amp T2 o imbalance fault Run state p 4 motor running OR AND a Almax Ln current highest imbalance 11 Phase 1 current 12 Phase 2 current I3 Phase 3 current Is1 Warning threshold Is2 Fault threshold Ln Line number or numbers with greatest deviation from lavg lavg 3 phase current average T1 Fault timeout starting T2 Fault timeout running 1639502 12 2006 143 Motor Protection Functions Parameter The current phase imbalance function has the following parameters Settings Parameters Setting range Factory setting Fault enable Enable Disable Enable Fault timeout starting 0 2 20 s in 0 1 s increments 0 7 s Fault timeout running 0 2 20 s in 0 1 s increments 5s Fault threshold 10 70 of the calculated 10 imbalance in 1 increments Warning enable Enable Disable Disable Warning threshold 10 70 of the calculated 10 imbalance in 1 increments Function The current phase imbalance function has the following characteristics haracteristi PRE Characteristics Characteristics Value Hysteresis 95 of fault or warning threshold Trip time accuracy
6. LTM R The Controller Expansion Module and Network sub menus contain the following Controller read only parameters Rie Naan Level 3 Level 4 Parameter name reference Sub menus Controller Comm Ref Controller Commercial Reference Firmware Controller Firmware Version CurrentRange LTM R controller amperage Control Volt LTM R controller voltage Digital I O The number of logic inputs and logic outputs Exp Module Comm Ref Expansion Commercial Reference Firmware Expansion Firmware Version Control Volt LTM R controller voltage Digital I O The number of logic inputs Ready The operational status of the expansion module Network Protocol Network Port Commercial Reference Firmware Network Port Firmware Version 382 1639502 12 2006 Use Monitoring Using the Scrolling HMI Display 1 to 1 Overview Use the LCD display in presentation mode to present a scrolling list of parameters and their dynamically changing values To use this feature e add parameters to the scrolling list in the HMI Display sub menu e monitor the scrolling list using the LCD display HMI Display Use the HMI Display sub menu to add items to the scrolling display of dynamically changing parameter values Use Display All to add all items in a group The HMI Display sub menu contains the following selections Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Parameter name reference HMI Display Contrast Fault Enable HMI D
7. Jam warning Step Description LCD Displays 1 LCD display is scrolling the configurable C parameter list Note that the Ohm LTM R controller is in local control mode 6230 Run Temp Sensor NTC Occurrence of a Jam warning Jam warning warning code 6 is L displayed The warning screen persists until 6 the underlying Jam condition is cleared WARN Ready Jam Rev In this case the measured current value fal Is below the Jam Warning Threshold setting The LCD display resumes scrolling the configurable parameter list L 111 Run Thermal Cap 1639502 12 2006 393 Use Fault Example The following is an example of the sequence of screens displayed in response to a Jam fault Step Description LCD Displays 1 LCD display is scrolling the R configurable parameter list Note that Ohm the LTM R controller is in remote 6230 control mode Run Temp Sensor NTC 2 Occurrence of a Jam fault Jam fault fault code 6 is displayed R The fault screen persists until the 6 underlying Jam condition is cleared and FAULT fault reset Ready Jam Rev 4 In this case the measured current value falls below the Jam Fault Threshold setting Reset command is executed The LCD display resumes scrolling the R configurable parameter list in Ready state b 111 Rdy Thermal
8. Logic inputs 2 wire maintained assignment 3 wire impulse assignment 1 1 Forward run Start motor forward 1 2 Reverse run Start motor reverse 1 3 Free Free 1 4 Free Stop motor 1 5 Reset Reset 1 6 Local 0 or network 1 Local 0 or network 1 Reverser operating mode provides the following logic outputs Logic outputs Assignment 0 1 13 and 14 KM1 contactor control Forward 0 2 23 and 24 KM2 contactor control Reverse 0 3 33 and 34 Warning signal 0 4 95 96 97 and 98 Fault signal Reverser operating mode uses the following HMI keys HMI keys 2 wire maintained assignment 3 wire impulse assignment Aux 1 Forward run Start motor forward Aux 2 Reverse run Start motor reverse Stop Stop while pressed Stop 240 1639502 12 2006 Motor Control Functions Timing The following diagram is an example of the timing sequence for the Reverser Sequence operating mode that shows the inputs and outputs for a 3 wire impulse configuration when the control direct transition bit is On 1 1 Start forward 1 2 Start reverse 1 4 Stop 0 1 KM1 forward 4 O 2 KM2 reverse os iei y y l Motor On bit i Y
9. Nf ef ed et ed ed Ed ASISISISISISISIS Note The controller measures current at 47 63 Hz fundamental frequency Therefore if the controller is used with a variable speed drive the controller must be installed between the drive and the line The CTs cannot be used between the drive outputs and the motor since the drive can output fundamental frequencies outside the 47 63 Hz range For a description of external CT characteristics see p 15 1639502 12 2006 297 Installation Wiring Ground Fault Current Transformers Ground Fault The LTM R controller has 2 terminals that can be connected to an external ground Current fault current transformer GFCT Z1 and Z2 Transformer The following diagram shows typical wiring using a GFCT Wiring 30 A N L1 L2 L3 O ae gt 7 1d FS Fd FS HHH Hw Ww HH CPCOCOCOCCOCCEC 2999 aS OQO WOCOCTCCECSO 4 Note You must wire the ground fault current transformer before wiring the power supply 298 1639502 12 2006 Installation
10. Undercurrent Fault enable Enable Disable Disable Fault timeout 1 200 s in 1 s increments 10s Fault threshold 30 100 of FLC 50 of FLC in 1 increments Warning enable Enable Disable Disable Warning threshold 30 100 of FLC in 1 increments 50 of FLC Overcurrent Fault enable Enable Disable Disable Fault timeout 1 250 s in 1 s increments 10s Fault threshold 20 800 of FLC in 1 increments 80 of FLC Warning enable Enable Disable Disable Warning threshold 20 800 of FLC in 1 increments 80 of FLC Ground current Ground Current Mode Internal Internal e External Fault enable Enable Disable Enable Warning enable Enable Disable Enable Internal ground current Fault timeout 0 5 25 s in 0 1 s increments 1s Fault threshold 20 500 of FLCmin in 1 increments 30 of FLCmin Warning threshold 20 500 of FLCmin in 1 increments 30 of FLCmin External ground current Fault timeout 0 1 25 s in 0 01 s increments 0 5s Fault threshold 0 01 20 A in 0 01 A increments 1A Warning threshold 0 01 20 A in 0 01 A increments 1A _ Thermal Overload Inverse Thermal Fault Reset Timeout is set by the Auto Reset Group 1 Timeout parameter 2 OC1 and OC2 are set via the Motor Full Load Current and the Motor High Speed Full Load Current parameters respectively OC1 and OC2 settings can be set directly in Amperes in the Settings menu of an HMI or in the Settings branch of
11. 110 1639502 12 2006 Metering and Monitoring Functions 3 6 Thermal Overload Statistics Time to Trip Description Characteristics When a thermal overload condition exists the LTM R controller reports the time to trip before the fault occurs in the Time To Trip parameter When the LTM R controller is not in a thermal overload condition to avoid the appearance of being in a fault state the LTM R controller reports the time to trip as 9999 If the motor has an auxiliary fan and the Motor Aux Fan Cooled parameter has been set the time to reset is decreased by a factor of 4 The time to trip function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Unit s Accuracy 10 Resolution 1s Refresh interval 100 ms 1639502 12 2006 111 Metering and Monitoring Functions 3 7 System Operating Status Overview Introduction The LTM R controller monitors the motor operating state and the minimum time required to wait for a e reset of a thermal fault e auto reset delay timeout e load shed reconnect delay or e rapid cycle timer timeout If more than one timer is active the parameter displays the maximum timer which is the minimum wait for the fault response or the control function to reset Access The Motor states can be accessed via e aPCwith PowerSuite software ea Magelis XBTN410 HMI e aPLC via the remote communicat
12. 0 0 00 eee eee 444 Metering and Monitoring 0 cece tees 445 Fault Management 0 0 000 cc eee 448 Control Commands 0 tetas 450 Using the LTM R Controller Connected to a Profibus DP Communication Network 451 Introduction to the Profibus DP Communication Network 451 Profibus DP Protocol Principle and Main Features 452 General Information on Implementation via Profibus DP 453 Modules as Presented in the GS File 0 0 0 eee eee 455 Profibus DP Configuration via the SyCon Configuration Tool 456 Functions of Profibus DP Profiles 0 0 00 c eee eee 459 Diagnostic Telegram for Profibus DP 0 cee eee eee ee 464 PKW Encapsulated Acyclic Accesses in DP VO 0 000 ee eee 467 Acyclic Data Read Write via Profibus DP V1 0 000000 e eee 472 User Map User Defined Indirect Registers 0 0 0 0 cece eee 476 Modbus Register Map Organization of Communication Variables 477 Profibus DP V1 Addresses 0 0 0 cece teens 478 Data FOrmats i rira ye eth e tie sect hee aye did be agave denne SAT ie Gest are epee 479 Data Types r cece be bea Mina been ented bab A ee bad Lai he be elon 5 480 Identification Variables 0 0 ete 487 Statistics Variables sceinm oes eek eet se a et ee ES 488 Monitoring Variables 0 0 0 ett ee 498 Configuration Variables
13. OVERLOAD and the LTM R controller address Motor Starter 1 both flash when displayed Starters status Use the P button to scroll down Starters status and reveal more of this page Remote reset gt Note click on a flashing Fy to Faut navigate to that page Resetto defaults Fault message pages The opening fault message page Note the fault name THERMAL 1 2 THERMAL OVERLOAD Motor Starter 1 Click the button to display additional fault message pages 2 2 INTERNAL COMM LOSS Motor Starter 2 Click the Y button to scroll down and reveal more of the Internal Comm Loss fault message Motor Starter 2 Communication loss between Control Unit and Comm Module 402 1639502 12 2006 Use Command Lines 1 to many Overview line is identified by a Use the HMI keypad and keys to execute text line commands A command e atthe right end of the text line or e lt atthe left end of the text line A command can be executed only when its text line has focus A text line has focus when the lt or at either end of the text line plus any additional command character is blinking Command Lines The 1 to many menu structure presents 4 different kinds of command lines depending upon the command character if any next to the command line arrow as follows Command line chara
14. Warning code Description 0 No warning 3 Ground current 4 Thermal overload 5 Long start 6 Jam 7 Current phase imbalance 8 Undercurrent 10 Test 11 HMI port error 12 HMI port communication loss 13 Network port internal error 18 Diagnostic 19 Wiring 20 Overcurrent 21 Current phase loss 22 Current phase reversal 23 Motor temp sensor 24 Voltage phase imbalance 25 Voltage phase loss 26 Voltage phase reversal 27 Undervoltage 28 Overvoltage 29 Underpower 30 Overpower 31 Under power factor 32 Over power factor 486 1639502 12 2006 Use Identification Variables Identification Identification variables are described below Variables Register Variable type Read only variables Note p 478 0 34 Not significant 35 40 Word 6 Expansion commercial reference 1 See DT_CommercialReference p 481 41 45 Word 5 Expansion serial number 1 46 Ulnt Expansion ID code 1 47 Ulnt Expansion firmware version 1 See DT_Firmware Version p 485 48 Ulnt Expansion compatibility code 1 49 60 Not significant 61 Ulnt Network port ID code 62 Ulnt Network port firmware version See DT_Firmware Version p 485 63 Ulnt Network port compatibility code 64 69 Word 6 Controller commercial reference See DT_CommercialReference p 481 70 74 Word 5 Controller serial number 75 Word Controller ID code 76 Ul
15. Characteristics Value Trip time within 0 2 s Trip time accuracy 0 1 s 1639502 12 2006 183 Motor Protection Functions Undervoltage Description Functional Characteristics The undervoltage function signals e a warning when voltage in a phase falls below a set threshold e a fault when voltage in a phase falls and remains below a separately set threshold for a set period of time This function has a single fault time delay Both the fault and warning thresholds are defined as a percentage of the Motor Nominal Voltage Vnom parameter setting The undervoltage function is available only in ready state and run state when the LTM R controller is connected to an expansion module Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled The function applies to both single phase and 3 phase motors The undervoltage function includes the following features e 2 thresholds e Warning Threshold e Fault Threshold e 1 fault time delay e Fault Timeout e 2 function outputs e Undervoltage Warning e Undervoltage Fault e 1 counting statistic e Undervoltage Faults Count 184 1639502 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Block Diagram Undervoltage warning and fault vi V2 gt V3 Parameter Settings Ready state p Run state amp Undervoltage warn
16. Statistics Extension Register Variable type Read only variables Note p 478 300 301 UDInt Average current n 0 302 303 UDint L1 current n 0 304 305 UDint L2 current n 0 306 307 UDint L3 current n 0 308 309 UDint Ground current n 0 N 1 Fault The n 1 fault main statistics are listed at addresses 180 209 Statistics Extension Register Variable type Read only variables Note p 478 330 331 UDint Average current n 1 332 333 UDint L1 current n 1 334 335 UDint L2 current n 1 336 337 UDint L3 current n 1 338 339 UDint Ground current n 1 N 2 Fault The n 2 fault main statistics are listed at addresses 210 239 Statistics Extension Register Variable type Read only variables Note p 478 360 361 UDint Average current n 2 362 363 UDint L1 current n 2 364 365 UDint L2 current n 2 366 367 UDint L3 current n 2 368 369 UDint Ground current n 2 496 1639502 12 2006 Use N 3 Fault The n 3 fault main statistics are listed at addresses 240 269 Statistics Extension Register Variable type Read only variables Note p 478 390 391 UDInt Average current n 3 392 393 UDint L1 current n 3 394 395 UDint L2 current n 3 396 397 UDint L3 current n 3 398 399 UDint Ground current n 3 N 4 Fault The n 4 fault main statistics are listed at addresses 270 299 Statistics Extension Register Variable type Read only variables Note p 478 420 421 UDInt Average current n 4 422 423 UDInt L1
17. 553 NEMA Format Wiring Diagrams 000 eee eee 555 NEMA Wiring Diagrams 00000 e ee tees 555 Overload Mode Wiring Diagrams 00000 00 cee 557 Independent Mode Wiring Diagrams 00 000 e eee eee 561 Reverser Mode Wiring Diagrams 00 e ee ee 563 Two Step Wye Delta Mode Wiring Diagrams 00022 e eee 565 Two Step Primary Resistor Mode Wiring Diagrams 567 Two Step Autotransformer Mode Wiring Diagrams 569 Two Speed Mode Wiring Diagrams Single Winding Consequent Pole 571 Two Speed Mode Wiring Diagrams Separate Winding 573 eee ee ee Oe ee ee eee ee 575 eee eee ee ee ee ee er ee ee ee ee ee ee 581 10 Safety Information P Important Information NOTICE Read these instructions carefully and look at the equipment to become familiar with the device before trying to install operate or maintain it The following special messages may appear throughout this documentation or on the equipment to warn of potential hazards or to call attention to information that clarifies or simplifies a procedure The addition of this symbol to a Danger or Warning safety label indicates A that an electrical hazard exists which will result in personal injury if the instructions are not followed This is the safety alert symbol It is used to alert you to potential personal injury hazards Ob
18. 1639502 12 2006 179 Motor Protection Functions Voltage Phase Loss Description The voltage phase loss function is based on the Voltage Phase Imbalance function and signals e a warning when the voltage in any phase differs by more than a 40 from the average voltage in all 3 phases e afault when the voltage in any phase differs by more than 40 from the average voltage in all 3 phases for a set period of time This function has a single adjustable fault time delay Note Use this function to detect and guard against large voltage phase imbalances in excess of 40 of the average voltage in all 3 phases For smaller voltage imbalances use the voltage phase imbalance motor protection function This function is available in ready state when the LTM R controller is connected to an expansion module The curent phase loss function is available during start state and run state The function identifies the phase experiencing a voltage loss If the maximum deviation from the 3 phase voltage average is the same for two phases the function identifies both phases Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled The function applies only to 3 phase motors Functional The voltage phase loss function includes the following features Characteristics A fixed fault and warning threshold equal to 80 of the 3 phase average voltage A single adjustable fault time delay e Voltage P
19. Motor Protection Functions Motor Temperature Sensor NTC Analog Description The NTC Analog motor temperature sensing function is enabled when the Motor Temp Sensor Type parameter is set to NTC Analog and the LTM R controller is connected to an analog NTC thermistor embedded in the motor The LTM R controller monitors the state of the temperature sensing element and signals e amotor temperature sensor warning when the measured resistance falls below a configurable warning threshold e amotor temperature sensor fault when the measured resistance falls below a separately set fault threshold The fault or warning condition continues until the measured resistance exceeds 105 of the fault or warning threshold There is no time delay to the motor temperature sensor fault or warning Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled The function is available for all operating states It applies to both single phase and 3 phase motors Functional The NTC Analog motor temperature sensor function includes the following features Characteristics e 2 configurable thresholds e Warning Threshold e Fault Threshold e 2 function outputs e Motor Temp Sensor Warning e Motor Temp Sensor Fault e 1 counting statistic e Motor Temp Sensor Faults Count 170 1639502 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Block Diagram Parameter Settings Function Characteristics Motor temperature sensor warni
20. 0 1 s or 5 Example Fault timeout starting a Is2 The following diagram describes the detection of a current phase imbalance occurring during run state Fault timeout running a Start state gt q Run state p Al Percentage difference between current in any phase and the 3 phase current average Is2 Fault threshold 144 1639502 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Current Phase Loss Description The current phase loss function signals e a warning when the current in any phase differs by more than a 80 from the average current in all 3 phases e a fault when the current in any phase differs by more than 80 from the average current in all 3 phases for a set period of time Note Use this function to detect and guard against large current phase imbalances in excess of 80 of the average current in all 3 phases For smaller current imbalances use the current phase imbalance motor protection function This function has a single adjustable fault time delay which is applied when the motor is in start state or run state The function identifies the phase experiencing a current loss If the maximum deviation from the 3 current average is the same for two phases the function identifies both phases Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled The function applies only to 3 phase motors Functional The c
21. 546 1639502 12 2006 IEC Format Wiring Diagrams Two Step Primary Resistor Mode Wiring Diagrams Application The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse local control wiring diagram Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Local Control 3a Start Stop E a a a aa a oe 1639502 12 2006 547 IEC Format Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Local Control Application Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Local Control with Network Control Selectable Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Local Control with Network Control Selectable The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained local control wiring diagram Start Stop The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse local control with network control selectable wiring diagram L Local control O Off N Network control LON The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained local control with network control selectable wiring diagram L Local control O Off N Network control 548 1639502 12 2006 IEC Format Wiring Diagrams Two Step Autotransformer Mode Wiring Diagrams Application The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse local control wiring diagram Diagram with 3
22. 9 STARTERS STATUS ZJ 1 ON 5 ON SN 42 0FF 6 0FF 43 0FF 7 0FF p gt Motor Starter 5 Avg Current 90 FLC L1 Current 85 FLC Statistics gt Self Test gt Product ID Home 1639502 12 2006 405 Use Editing Values 1 to many Overview Use the HMI keypad O A and T buttons to edit setting values There are three kinds of editable settings e Boolean e numeric e value list Only settings that are displayed in the LCD can be edited To display a setting navigate to the page that contains the setting With the correct page opened you may need to scroll down to display the setting See p 406 for information about navigating the 1 to many menu structure Boolean Settings A Boolean value setting includes a 0 or a 1 next to the at the right end of the text line The following example shows you how to select then edit a Boolean value Settings Addr Transfer Mode Motor Local Control Motor Local Control HMI Transfer Mode Motor gt Local Control Term Strip N The Settings page opens with focus at the top line Click the DOWN button to scroll down to the Local Control setting HMI The Boolean value 0 and command line arrow blink indicating focus navigate edit save 3 Click the RIGHT arrow to toggle the Local Control setting to Term Strip and the Boolean value to 1 Note An edited
23. Motor Protection Functions Example The following diagram describes the occurrence of a voltage phase loss fault of a motor in run state A V A A0 2 of oes Wes A ae teh as Vee ees oe eth Fault timeout Fault timeout AV Percentage difference between voltage in any phase and the 3 phase average voltage 182 1639502 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Voltage Phase Reversal Description Functional Characteristics Parameter Settings Function Characteristics The voltage phase reversal function signals a fault when it detects that the voltage phases of a 3 phase motor are out of sequence usually indicating a wiring error Use the Motor Phases Sequence parameter to configure the direction ABC or ACB in which the motor will turn This function This function can be enabled or disabled is active when the LTM R controller is connected to an expansion module is available when the motor is in ready state start state and run state applies only to 3 phase motors has no warning and no timer The voltage phase reversal function adds one counting statistic Wiring Faults Count The voltage phase reversal function has the following configurable parameters Parameters Setting range Factory setting Fault enable Enable Disable Enable Motor phases sequence e A B C A B C e A C B The voltage phase reversal function has the following characteristics
24. Imax gt Is2 T 0 O t fault amp H vercurrent fau Run state AND l1 Phase 1 current I2 Phase 2 current I3 Phase 3 current Is1 Warning threshold Is2 Fault threshold T Fault timeout Parameter The overcurrent function has the following parameters Settings Parameters Setting range Factory setting Fault enable Enable Disable Disable Fault timeout 1 250 s in 1 s increments 10s Fault threshold 20 800 of FLC in 80 of FLC 1 increments Warning enable Enable Disable Disable Warning threshold 20 800 of FLC in 1 80 of FLC increments Function The overcurrent function has the following characteristics Characteristics Characteristics Value Hysteresis 95 of Fault threshold or Warning threshold Trip time accuracy 0 1 s or 5 156 1639502 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Example The following diagram describes the occurrence of an overcurrent fault l A Is2 Start state Run state Fault condition gt q gt lt a gt Over current fault timeout Is2 Overcurrent fault threshold 1639502 12 2006 157 Motor Protection Functions Ground Current Overview Parameter Settings The LTM R controller can be configured to detect ground current e internally by summing the 3 phase current signals from the secondary of the internal current transformers e externally by measuring the current delivered
25. 418 1639502 12 2006 Use Motor Control and Transfer Settings Fault Reset Settings Use the settings page to navigate to and edit the following motor local control and transfer mode settings Level 4 Level 5 Parameter name Settings Addr 1 8 Motor Nom Power kW Motor Nominal Power expressed in kW Nom Power Hp Motor Nominal Power expressed in HP TEMP SENSOR Fault Motor Temp Sensor Fault Enable Fault Level Motor Temp Sensor Fault Threshold Warn Motor Temp Sensor Warning Enable Warn Level Motor Temp Sensor Warning Threshold Local Control Control Local Channel Setting Transfer Mode Bumpless Transfer Mode Use the settings page to navigate to and edit the following fault reset settings Level 4 Level 5 Parameter name Settings Addr 1 8 Reset Manual Fault Reset Mode Remote Automatic AUTO GROUP 1 Number Resets Auto Reset Attempts Group 1 Setting Reset Time Auto Reset Group 1 Timeout AUTO GROUP 2 Number Resets Auto Reset Attempts Group 2 Setting Reset Time Auto Reset Group 2 Timeout AUTO GROUP 3 Number Resets Auto Reset Attempts Group 3 Setting Reset Time Auto Reset Group 3 Timeout 1639502 12 2006 419 Use Current Settings From the settings page you can navigate to and edit the following current settings
26. GFCTs are specified with a transformation ratio The ratio of the GFCT is the ratio of the ground fault current sensed to the current which it outputs Set the parameters Ground CT Primary the first number of the GFCT ratio and Ground CT Secondary the second number of the GFCT ratio to enable the controller to correctly measure the actual ground fault current flowing in the circuit For more information see p 317 For a description of GFCT characteristics see p 15 1639502 12 2006 299 Installation Wiring Temperature Sensors Temperature Sensors The LTM R controller has 2 terminals dedicated to temperature sensing protection T1 and T2 These terminals return the temperature value measured by resistance temperature detectors RTDs One of the following types of motor temperature sensor can be used e PTC Binary e PTC Analog e NTC Analog This function applies to both single phase and 3 phase motors The following table shows the maximum wire lengths for temperature sensor elements mm AWG 0 5 20 0 75 18 1 5 16 2 5 14 m ft 220 656 300 985 400 1312 600 1970 Use twisted pair wiring to connect the Controller to the temperature sensor For the Controller to accurately measure the resistance of the temperature sensing element you must measure the resistance of the twisted pair and add it to the desired resistance for protection This compensates for t
27. Monitoring Parameters f5 All Parameters E Editable Parameters Readonly Parameters Logic Functions Edit Services Link PowerSuite EA Connected QuickWatch Window Settings eS gE Select a Parameters sub branch to display information about all editable or read only parameters The Device Value column indicates the most recently reported value of the monitored parameter Tools View Help a ene Editable parameters Address Find Index Address Register Name Unit Local Value Default Device Value Min Value Max Value Status 49 Identification Unit 75 0 65535 50 Network Port Commercial Reference1 Unit 75 65535 Unit 75 65535 Unit 75 65535 Unit 75 65535 Unit 75 65535 Unit 65535 Unit 65535 Unit 65535 Unit 65535 Unit 65535 Unit 65535 Unit 255 Unit 65535 Unit 0 65535 Protection Module Identification Unit 75 Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit 51 Network Port Commercial Reference2 52 Network Port Commercial Reference3 53 Network Port Commercial Reference4 54 Network Port Commercial Reference5 55 Network Port Commercial Reference6 56 Network Port SerialNumber 57 Network Port SerialNumber2 58 Network Port SerialNumber3 59 Network Port SerialNumber4 60 Network Port SerialNumber5 61 Network Port IDCode 62 Network Port Firmware Version 63 Network Port CompatibilityCode 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535
28. Network Port only settings for the network port and restores their values to the factory defaults Statistics all statistics and resets their values to 0 Th Cap Level the following parameters Thermal Capacity Level e Rapid Cycle Lockout Timeout e Thermal Overload Fault Reset See the warning below 1 Execution of the Clear All Command returns the SysConfig menu settings to their factory default settings and requires a re configuration of the Sys Config menu A WARNING LOSS OF MOTOR PROTECTION Clearing the thermal capacity level inhibits thermal protection and can cause equipment overheating and fire Continued operation with inhibited thermal protection should be limited to applications where immediate restart is vital Failure to follow this instruction can result in death serious injury or equipment damage 1639502 12 2006 389 Use HMI Password Use HMI password protection to prevent unauthorized configuration of LTM R controller parameters from the HMI The password must be an integer from 0000 to 9999 A password value of 0000 disables password protection Password protection is disabled by default The process of entering a password is similar to editing a numerical setting Editing any value requires familiarity with the Magelis XBTN410 menu structure and general navigation principles For information on menu navigation see p 367 For inform
29. bit 9 Voltage phase reversal fault enable bit 10 Undervoltage fault enable bit 11 Overvoltage fault enable bit 12 Underpower fault enable bit 13 Overpower fault enable bit 14 Under power factor fault enable bit 15 Over power factor fault enable o 3 oa 634 Word Warning enable register 2 bit O Reserved bit 1 Diagnostic warning enable bit 2 Reserved bit 3 Overcurrent warning enable bit 4 Current phase loss warning enable bit 5 Reserved bit 6 Motor temperature sensor warning enable bit 7 Voltage phase imbalance warning enable bit 8 Voltage phase loss warning enable bit 9 Reserved bit 10 Undervoltage warning enable bit 11 Overvoltage warning enable bit 12 Underpower warning enable bit 13 Overpower warning enable bit 14 Under power factor warning enable bit 15 Over power factor warning enable o o4 3a oa 510 1639502 12 2006 Use Register Variable type Read Write variables Note p 478 635 6 Reserved 637 UInt Auto reset attempts group 1 setting 638 UInt Auto reset group 1 timeout 639 UInt Auto reset attempts group 2 setting 640 UInt Auto reset group 2 timeout 641 UInt Auto reset attempts group 3 setting 642 UInt Auto reset group 3 timeout 643 UInt Motor step 1 t
30. 176 1639502 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Functional Characteristics The voltage phase imbalance function includes the following features e 2 thresholds e Warning Threshold e Fault Threshold e 2 fault time delays e Fault Timeout Starting e Fault Timeout Running e 2 function outputs e Voltage Phase Imbalance Warning e Voltage Phase Imbalance Fault e 1 counting statistic e Voltage Phase Imbalance Faults Count e 3 indicators identifying the phase with the highest voltage imbalance e L1 L2 Highest Imbalance e L2 L3 Highest Imbalance e L3 L1 Highest Imbalance 1639502 12 2006 177 Motor Protection Functions Block Diagram Voltage phase imbalance warning Start state 21 Via v1 Vavg x 100 Vavg gt Vs1 Run state p V2 v2 Vavg x 100 Vavg gt Vs1 V3 v3 Vavg x 100 Vavg gt Vs1 Voltage phase imbalance fault VS OR w 21 _________ OR V1 Vavg x 100 Vavg gt Vs2 AND Voltage phase imbalance warning L p A max gt Ln voltage imbalance V2 v2 Vavg x 100 Vavg gt Vs2 T1 0 Voltage phase lL imbalance fault motor starting V3 v3 Vavg x 100 Vavg gt Vs2 re amp oR Run state J AND V1 L1 L2 voltage V2 L2 L3 voltage V3 L3 L1 voltage Ln Line
31. 6 PKW OUT 0 INI OD a A OAIN gt lo 7 PKW OUT 1 o 8 PKW OUT 2 10 PKW IN O 9 PKW OUT 3 11 PKW IN 1 10 PKW OUT 4 12 PKW IN 2 11 PKW OUT 5 13 PKW IN 3 12 PKW OUT 6 14 PKW IN 4 13 PKW OUT 7 15 PKW IN 5 16 PKW IN 6 17 PKW IN 7 With the PKW data you can read or write any register The 8 bytes are interpreted as a request telegram or a response telegram encapsulated in IN data and OUT data 468 1639502 12 2006 Use PKW OUT Data OUT Data request Profibus DP Master gt LTM R controller Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Byte 7 Object address Function code Function code toggle bit function Data to write bit 7 bit 6 0 LSB MSB 0 1 R_MB_16 register register 0 1 R MB 32 l A E z address address SEET 0 1 W_MB_16 b7 b0 b15 b8 0 1 W_MB_32 b7 b0 b15 b8 b23 b16 b31 b24 Any changes in this object will trigger the handling of the request except if Function code b6 b0 0x00 Note The highest bit of function code bit 7 is a toggle bit It must change for each consecutive request This mechanism allows the request initiator to detect that a response is ready by polling bit 7 of function code When this bit in the OUT data becomes equal to the request s emitted toggle bit in the IN data when s
32. The LTM R controller performs diagnostic tests that detect and monitor the proper functionality of control commands There are four control command diagnostic functions Start Command Check Run Check Back Stop Command Check Stop Check Back All four diagnostic functions are enabled as a group For each function a fault and warning can be enabled The configurable parameter settings are Parameters Setting range Factory settings Diagnostic Fault Enable Yes No No Diagnostic Warning Enable Yes No No The Start Command Check begins after a Run command and causes the LTM R controller to monitor the main circuit to ensure that current is flowing The Start Command Check e reports a Start Command fault or warning if current is not detected after a delay of 1 second or e ends if the motor is in Run state and the LTM R controller detects current gt 10 of FLCmin The Run Check Back begins when the Start Command Check ends The Run Check Back causes the LTM R controller to continuously monitor the main circuit to ensure current is flowing The Run Check Back e reports a Run Check Back fault or warning if average phase current is not detected for longer than 0 5 seconds without a Stop command or e ends when a Stop command executes 98 1639502 12 2006 Metering and Monitoring Functions Stop Command Check Stop Check Back Timing Sequence The Stop Command Check begins after a
33. 0 2 cette 505 Command Variables 2 3 4 s2 chin rb ebb ie bb Pa PA ae 515 User Map Variables canem eet pe ee eed Ee ee ee ee pele 516 Custom Logic Variables 0 0 00 cece ee eee 517 Identification and Maintenance Functions IMF 518 Maintenance iio are nate wade cake alee Kae 521 Detecting Problems s ceti acerra oen ae Ohi wi ae bly eo wees BEE eee 522 Troubleshooting e sr deg ee eee ee See Ree ek ele Rha A AE Eo eel 523 Preventive Maintenance 0 0 eect eee 526 Replacing an LTM R Controller and LTM E Expansion Module 529 Communication Warnings and Faults 0 00 e eee eee 530 Appendices Appendix A Appendix B Glossary Index Wiring Diagrams cs t c0 pe be See es fae a Bs cet OS aN as 533 IEC Format Wiring Diagrams 000 cece eens 535 IEC Wiring Diagrams eere smeiti otek woe eae es eee eee eee Rees 535 Overload Mode Wiring Diagrams 000 e eee eee 537 Independent Mode Wiring Diagrams 00 000 e eee eee 541 Reverser Mode Wiring Diagrams 000 000 cece eee eee 543 Two Step Wye Delta Mode Wiring Diagrams 00 545 Two Step Primary Resistor Mode Wiring Diagrams 547 Two Step Autotransformer Mode Wiring Diagrams 549 Two Speed Dahlander Mode Wiring Diagrams 000 000s 551 Two Speed Pole Changing Mode Wiring Diagrams
34. 1639502 12 2006 273 Installation LTM R Controller and Expansion Module Dimensions Overview This section presents the dimensions of the LTM R controller and the LTM E expansion module as well as the dimensions of the clearance zone around the controller and the expansion module Dimensions are given in both millimeters and inches and apply to all LTM R and LTM E units LTM R Controller Dimensions Note The height of the controller may increase when using alternate wiring terminals 274 1639502 12 2006 Installation Expansion Module o 2 a f o Qa 275 1639502 12 2006 Installation Clearance Zone The maximum rated ambient temperature of the controller depends on the clearance Dimensions zone dimensions They are shown in the table below fo COCOON ONOCOSI 1 7 C7 1 8 C8 1 9 C9 1 10 C10 fat a2 i1 c 12 13 c 14 15 C 16 4 E 5 8 Alarm i Power i SSSISSS9s 1 N VELER ELLELE RNL LEL LLL LLLLLL ELL LLL LL LLL ELLE LLL LLL LL LLL LLL LL LL 1 lt 9 mm 0 35 in 45 C 113 F 9 40 mm 0 35 1 57 in 45 55 C 113 131 F gt 40 mm 1 57 in 60 C 140 F g PRLR RARER KERL EEEREN LEIRER RELIER EERE EER REEL ERER LLL LL LLL LLL LL 1 00000000
35. Refresh Rates Use the Monitoring page of the Preferences dialog to set the rates the LTM R controller uses to update monitored parameter values Step Action 1 In the Settings menu select Preferences The Preferences dialog opens 2 In the Preferences dialog select the Monitoring tab In the Monitoring page Set the Readings Refresh Rate in seconds for parameter values displayed in the Monitoring branch Set the Parameters Refresh Rate in seconds for parameter values displayed in the Parameters branch 4 Click OK to save your settings 1639502 12 2006 445 Use Monitoring Select a Monitoring sub branch to display a series of graphical gauges shown Branch below or fault and warning LEDs that provide an easy to read status update of the monitored parameters PowerSuite Default lt File Edit Services Link Settings Tools View Help DA ELEMET errak B TesysT Current Readings a Device Information Settings f Statistics f Monitoring Voltage Current B Power r2 Motor Temperature f5 10 Port Status gt Active Faults f Parameters Logic Functions IGF Current phase imbalance PowerSuite Connected See p 440 for information about navigating the user interface 446 1639502 12 2006 Use Parameters Branch PowerSuite Default File 2 a Gls gt Tesys T Device Information I Settings Statistics
36. e identification 1 out of the 8 possible modules Check the configuration with the PLC 4 The PLC performs a Set Parameter of the configuration The BF LED switches off Note If the LED is blinking it means that the address is invalid and should be changed 1639502 12 2006 333 Commissioning Checking Steps For further details about the configuration see p 456 Check whether your system can communicate properly The Profibus DP communication checking sequence is Step 1 Check the communication LEDs on the eP l LTM R front face Step 2 Check the cabling and correct it if necessary Check the address via PowerSuite or the HMI Step 3 Check the physical combination with the Profibus DP network configuration tool Correct it if necessary 334 1639502 12 2006 Commissioning Verifying System Wiring Overview After all required and optional parameters have been configured be sure to check your system s wiring which can include e motor power wiring e LTM R controller wiring e external current transformer wiring e diagnostic wiring e O wiring Motor Power To verify the motor power wiring check the following Wiring Look at Action The motor nameplate Confirm that the motor generates current and voltage within the ranges of the LTM R controller The power wiring diagram Visually confirm that the actual power wiring matches the int
37. line A 5 characters maximum line B1 3 characters maximum plus up to 2 icons indicating the control source line B2 3 characters maximum line C 15 characters maximum contains 2 pieces of information 1 left justified 1 right justified In presentation mode there are 2 HMI displays e HMI display e fault and warning display All presentation mode displays are read only 356 1639502 12 2006 Use Control Source Icons When the HMI is in presentation mode it displays the current control source in 1 or 2 icons located in the upper right corner of the LCD as follows When the control souce is LCD displays the icon s local L remote network R See p 386 and p 393 for examples of the LCD displaying control source icons 1639502 12 2006 357 Use Scrolling Variable List The LCD uses the presentation mode LCD to display a scrolling list of dynamically changing parameter values when there is no active fault or warning and the LTM R controller state is e Not Ready state e Ready state e Start state e Run state For a description of LTM R controller states see p 214 The scrolling variable list can contain the following information Line Displays Values Description A Motor state OFF The motor is Off Wait The motor is Off and awaits completion of one or more of the following e Load shed e Rapid
38. 0 Threshold Cross In this start cycle scenario the start cycle fails e Current never rises above the fault threshold e f Long Start protection is enabled the LTM R controller signals a fault when the Long Start Fault Timeout is reached e If Long Start protection is disabled the LTM R controller does not signal a fault and the run cycle begins after the Long Start Fault Timeout has expired e Other motor protection functions begin their respective duration times after the Long Start Fault Timeout e TheLTMR controller reports both the start cycle time and the maximum current detected during start cycle as 0000 indicating current never reached the fault threshold Start cycle with 0 threshold crosses l A Is weit eet ts pha T tnt Pai Sy tan eth he E safest gh Ee od oy 1 sf a Start ti 10 FLC PANG b i Long start fault timeout 1 p 1 p t gt 4 gt q4 Ready state Start state Fault condition Is Long start fault threshold 1639502 12 2006 221 Motor Control Functions 5 2 Operating Modes At a Glance Summary The LTM R controller can be configured to 1 of 10 predefined operating modes Selecting custom operating mode allows you to select one of the 10 predefined operating modes and tailor it to your specific application or to create an entirely new control program The selection of a predefined operating mode determines the behavior of all LTM R controlle
39. 25 s in 0 1 s increments 3s Fault threshold 101 115 of Motor nominal voltage 110 in 1 increments Warning enable Enable Disable Disable Warning threshold 101 115 of Motor nominal voltage 110 in 1 increments The overvoltage function has the following characteristics Characteristics Value Hysteresis 95 of Fault threshold or Warning threshold Trip time accuracy 0 1 s or 5 188 1639502 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Example The following diagram describes the occurrence of an overvoltage fault Fault timeout T Vs2 Overvoltage fault threshold 1639502 12 2006 189 Motor Protection Functions Voltage Load Shedding Description The LTM R controller provides voltage load shedding which you can use to deactivate non critical loads if voltage level is substantially reduced For example use voltage load shedding when power is transferred from a main utility supply to a backup generator system where the backup generator system can supply power only to a limited number of critical loads With the voltage load shedding function enabled the LTM R controller monitors the average phase voltage and e reports a load shedding condition and stops the motor when voltage falls below a configurable load shedding threshold and stays below the threshold for the duration of a configurable load shedding timer e clears
40. 800 of FLC in 1 200 of FLC increments Warning enable Enable Disable Disable Warning threshold 100 800 of FLC in 1 200 of FLC increments Function The jam function has the following characteristics Characteristics Example Characteristics Value Hysteresis 95 of Fault threshold or Warning threshold Trip time accuracy 0 1 s or 5 The following diagram describes the occurrence of a jam fault Start state Run state Fault condition p gt q A Jam fault timeout Is2 Jam fault threshold 152 1639502 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Undercurrent Description Functional Characteristics Block Diagram The undercurrent function signals e a warning when the 3 phase Average Current falls below a set threshold after the motor has reached run state e a fault when the 3 phase Average Current falls and remains below a separately set threshold for a set period of time after the motor has reached run state The undercurrent function is triggered when the motor current falls below the desired level for the driven load for example if a drive belt or shaft has broken allowing the motor to run free rather than under load This function has a single fault time delay Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled The function applies to both single phase and 3 phase motors The
41. C 1 8 F Refresh interval 100 ms Parameters The Controller Internal Temperature function includes one editable parameter Parameter Setting range Factory setting Controller internal temperature warning enable e Enable Enable e Disable The Controller Internal Temperature function includes the following fixed warning and fault thresholds Condition Fixed Threshold Value Sets this parameter Internal temperature warning 80 C 176 F Controller Internal Temperature Warning Internal temperature minor fault 85 C 185 F Controller Internal Fault Internal temperature major fault 100 C 212 F A warning condition ceases when LTM R controller internal temperature falls below 80 C 96 1639502 12 2006 Metering and Monitoring Functions Block Diagram Controller Internal Temperature warning and fault w T gt 80 C t Controller internal temperature warning T e e T gt 85 C m Controller internal temperature minor fault L T gt 100 C m Controller internal temperature major fault T Temperature T gt 80 C 176 F Fixed warning threshold T gt 85 C 185 F Fixed minor fault threshold T gt 100 C 212 F Fixed major fault threshold 1639502 12 2006 97 Metering and Monitoring Functions Control Command Diagnostic Errors Description Parameter Settings Start Command Check Run Check Back
42. Inputs In LTM R controller or expansion module input state is displayed in Line C left Temp sensor type NTC NTC binary PTA PTC analog PTC PTC binary C left LTM R controller state Ready Non fault condition Rdy Warning condition RunStart Start state Run Run state Wait Load shed with active Run command Run1 Step 1 2 step operating mode Run2 Step 2 2 step operating mode Fwd Forward reverser operating mode Rev Reverse reverser operating mode Stop Stop command issued motor still running above On current level Slow Low speed 2 speed operating mode Fast High speed 2 speed operating mode Inputs state 1 2 3 4 5 6 The number of each active logic input 7 8 9 10 or x on the LTM R controller 1 6 or the expansion module 7 10 An x indicates an inactive intput 1639502 12 2006 359 Use Line Displays Values Description C right blank Applies to scrolling parameter list Transition event Load Shed Load shed event occurring RapidCycle Rapid cycle event occurring Bump Bump transion occurring Bumpless Bumpless transition occurring Fault and When the LTM R controller detects a fault or warning condition the LCD uses the Warning Display presentation mode LCD to immediately display a message describing e the most recently occurring fault or e the most recently occurring warning if no fault is active To close the fault or warning message display cli
43. The active power function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Unit kW Accuracy 5 Resolution 0 1 kW Refresh interval 100 ms 82 1639502 12 2006 Metering and Monitoring Functions Reactive Power Description The reactive power function measures the reactive power based on the average rms phase voltage of L1 L2 L3 average rms phase current of L1 L2 L3 power factor number of phases Formulas The reactive power measurement is derived from the following formulas Calculated measurement Formula Q Reactive Power for three phase motor Q V3 x lavg x Vavg x sin Q Reactive Power for single phase motor Q lavg x Vavg x sin Characteristics The reactive power function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Unit kvar Accuracy 5 Resolution 0 1 kvar Refresh interval 100 ms 1639502 12 2006 83 Metering and Monitoring Functions Power Factor Description The power factor function displays the phase displacement between the phase currents and phase voltages Formula The Power Factor parameter also called cosine phi or cos represents the absolute value of the ratio of Active Power to Apparent Power The LTM R controller independently calculates the power factor as follows Step LTM R controller action 1 Measures the time difference between the x axis zero cr
44. bit 6 Not significant bit 7 Motor running bits 8 13 Motor average current ratio bit 14 Control via HMI bit 15 Motor starting in progress Word n Data encoded on contiguous registers Examples Addresses 64 to 69 Word 6 Controller Commercial Reference see DT_CommercialReference Addresses 655 to 658 Word 4 Date and Time setting see DT_DateTime 1639502 12 2006 479 Use Data Types Overview Data types are specific variable formats which are used to complement the description of internal formats for instance in case of a structure or of an enumeration The generic format of data types is DT_xxx List of Data Here is the list of the most commonly used DT_xxx formats Types DT_xxx names DT_CommercialReference DT_DateTime DT_ExtOperatingMode DT_FaultCode DT_FirmwareVersion DT_Language5 DT_WarningCode Note The DT_xxx formats are described below 480 1639502 12 2006 Use DT_Commercial Reference DT_CommercialReference format is Word 6 and indicates a Commercial Reference Register MSB LSB Register N character 1 character 2 Register N 1 character 3 character 4 Register N 2 character 5 character 6 Register N 3 character 7 character 8 Register N 4 character 9 character 10 Register N 5 character 11 character 12 Example
45. 1639502 12 2006 Motor Control Functions Fault Management Introduction Overview When the LTM R controller detects a fault condition and activates the appropriate response the fault becomes latched Once a fault becomes latched it remains latched even if the underlying fault condition is eliminated until cleared by a reset command The setting of the Fault Reset Mode parameter determines how the LTM R controller manages faults The fault reset mode selections listed below are described in the topics that follow e Manual the default setting e Automatic e Remote The fault reset mode cannot be changed while a fault remains active All faults must be reset before the fault reset mode can be changed Fault Reset A Reset command can be issued using any of the following means Methods cycling power reset button on the LTM R controller reset button on the HMI keypad reset command from the HMI engineering tool logic input 1 5 a network command automatic reset A WARNING RISK OF UNINTENDED OPERATION When the LTM R controller is operating in 2 wire control with an active Run command a Reset command will immediately restart the motor Failure to follow this instruction can result in death serious injury or equipment damage 1639502 12 2006 255 Motor Control Functions Fault Specific Reset Behaviors Fault Characteristics The LTM R controller s response to faults d
46. 1639502 12 2006 243 Motor Control Functions Two Step The following wiring diagram represents a simplified example of the LTM R controller Primary Resistor in a two step local control 3 wire impulse primary resistance application Application Diagram 3a Start Stop For additional examples of two step primary resistor IEC diagrams see p 547 For examples of two step primary resistor NEMA diagrams see p 567 244 1639502 12 2006 Motor Control Functions Two Step The following wiring diagram represents a simplified example of the LTM R controller Autotransformer in a two step local control 3 wire impulse autotransformer application Application Diagram 3a Stop E oo dii aan Data Aaaa Daaa Daaa aaa Aaaa km1 KM3 fen 4 KM2 KM1 KM3 1 The N C interlock contacts KM1 and KM3 are not mandatory because the LTM R controller electronically interlocks O 1 and O 2 For additional examples of two step autotransformer IEC diagrams see p 549 For examples of two step autotransformer NEMA diagrams see p 569 1639502 12 2006 245 Motor Control Functions I O assignment Two step operating mode provides the following logic inputs Logic inputs 2 wire maintained assignment 3 wire impulse assignment 1 1 Control motor Start motor 1 2 Free Free
47. 3 s Warning enable Enable Disable Enable The current phase loss function has the following characteristics Characteristics Value Hysteresis 75 of the 3 phase average current Trip time accuracy 0 1 s or 5 146 1639502 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Example The following diagram describes the occurrence of a current phase loss fault of a motor in run state Fault timeout Fault timeout A 1 Y 80 gt p Start state Run state A l Percentage difference between current in any phase and the 3 phase current average 1639502 12 2006 147 Motor Protection Functions Current Phase Reversal Description Functional Characteristics Parameter Settings Function Characteristics The current phase reversal function signals a fault when it detects that the current phases of a 3 phase motor are out of sequence with the Motor Phases Sequence parameter ABC or ACB Note When the LTM R controller is connected to an expansion module phase reversal protection is based on voltage phase sequence before the motor starts and on current phase sequence after the motor starts This function e is active when the motor is in start state or run state e applies only to 3 phase motors e has no warning and no timer This function can be enabled or disabled The current phase reversal function adds to one coun
48. 478 180 Ulnt Fault code n 1 181 Ulnt Motor full load current ratio n 1 FLC max 182 Ulnt Thermal capacity level n 1 trip level 183 Ulnt Average current ratio n 1 FLC 184 Ulnt L1 current ratio n 1 FLC 185 Ulnt L2 current ratio n 1 FLC 186 Ulnt L3 current ratio n 1 FLC 187 Ulnt Ground current ratio n 1 FLC min 188 Ulnt Full load current max n 1 x 0 1 A 189 Ulnt Current phase imbalance n 1 190 Ulnt Frequency n 1 x 0 1 Hz 191 Ulnt Motor temperature sensor n 1 192 195 Word 4 Date and time n 1 See DT_DateTime p 482 196 Ulnt Average voltage n 1 V 1 197 Ulnt L3 L1 voltage n 1 V 1 198 Ulnt L1 L2 voltage n 1 V 1 199 Ulnt L2 L3 voltage n 1 V 1 200 Ulnt Voltage phase imbalance n 1 x 1 1 201 Ulnt Active power n 1 1 202 Ulnt Power factor n 1 x 0 01 1 203 209 Ulnt Not significant 492 1639502 12 2006 Use N 2 Fault The n 2 fault statistics are completed by variables at addresses 360 to 369 Statistics Register Variable type Read only variables Note p 478 210 Ulnt Fault code n 2 211 Ulnt Motor full load current ratio n 2 FLC max 212 Ulnt Thermal capacity level n 2 trip level 213 Ulnt Average current ratio n 2 FLC 214 Ulnt L1 current ratio n 2 FLC 215 Ulnt L2 current ratio n 2 FLC 216 Ulnt L3 current ratio n 2 FLC 217 Ulnt Ground current ratio n 2 FLC min 21
49. CE CTIC K CCC NOM GOST IACS E10 BV LROS DNV GL RINA ABS RMRos ATEX Conformity to Standards IEC EN 60947 4 1 UL 508 CSA C22 2 no 14 IACS E10 European community directives CE marking satisfies the essential requirements of the low voltage LV machinery and electromagnetic compatibility EMC directives Rated insulation According to IEC EN 60947 1 overvoltage category Ill 690 V voltage Ui degree of pollution 3 According to UL508 CSA C22 2 no 14 690 V Rated impulse According to IEC60947 1 8 3 3 4 1 220 V power inputand 4 8 kV withstand voltage paragraph 2 output circuits Vimp 24 V power input and 0 91 kV output circuits communication circuits 0 91 kV PTC and GF circuits 0 91 kV Degree of protection According to 60947 1 protection against direct contact IP20 Protective treatment IEC EN 60068 TH IEC EN 60068 2 30 Cycle humidity 12 cycles IEC EN 60068 2 11 Salt spray 48 hr Ambient air temperature around the device Storage 40 80 C 40 176 F Operation 20 60 C 4 140 F Maximum operating altitude Derating accepted 4500 m 14763 ft without derating 2000 m 6561 ft Fire resistance According to UL 94 V2 According to IEC 695 2 1 Parts supporting live components 960 C 1760 F other components 650 C 1202 F 1 Some certifications are in
50. Characteristics Vavg Average rms Run state amp Underpower warning P lt Ps1 gt AND P lt Ps2 T o k Underpower fault m Run state p AND voltage lavg Average rms current P Power Ps1 Warning threshold Ps2 Fault threshold T Fault timeout The underpower function has the following parameters in 1 increments Parameters Setting range Factory setting Fault enable Enable Disable Disable Fault timeout 1 100 s in 1 s increments 60 s Fault threshold 20 800 of Motor nominal power 20 in 1 increments Warning enable Enable Disable Disable Warning threshold 20 800 of Motor nominal power 30 The underpower function has the following characteristics Characteristics Value Hysteresis 105 of Fault threshold or Warning threshold Accuracy 5 1639502 12 2006 195 Motor Protection Functions Example The following diagram describes the occurrence of an underpower fault P A fault timeout _ _ _ Ps2 Ps2 Underpower fault threshold 196 1639502 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Overpower Description Functional Characteristics The overpower function signals e a warning when the value of active power exceeds a set threshold e a fault when the value of active power exceeds a separately set thre
51. DS_Write 1 0x80 indicating DP V1 2 OxB6 error class error code1 access denied 3 OxXX error code 2 LTM R specific see following table Below is Error Code 2 LTM R Specific Error Code 2 Meaning 01 internal stack request full 03 register not managed or super user access rights needed 06 register defined but not written 07 not all registers found 08 registers not authorized to be written 10 written value outside the register range word value too large too high 11 written value outside the register range word value too small too low 12 written value outside the register range MSB value too large 13 written value outside the register range MSB value too small 14 written value outside the register range LSB value too large 15 written value outside the register range LSB value too small 16 written value not a valid value 20 module rejects sends back an error frame 255 internal error The presentation of an error code and an error class to the user logic depends on the master implementation for example the PLC The mechanism only accesses blocks of parameters starting at a dedicated parameter MB address This means that unused parameters MB addresses are also accessed The data value read from theses parameters is 0x00 but in case of writing it is necessary to write the value 0x00 to these parameters Otherwise the complete write access will be rejected TeSys T For more details about the TeSy
52. E E 1 A Dahlander application requires 2 sets of wires passing through the CT windows The controller can also be placed upstream of the contactors If this is the case and if the Dahlander motor is used in variable torque mode all the wires downstream of the contactors must be the same size 2 The N C interlock contacts KM1 and KM2 are not mandatory because the controller electronically interlocks O 1 and O 2 1639502 12 2006 551 IEC Format Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Local Control Application Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Local Control with Network Control Selectable Application Diagram with 2 Wire The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained local control wiring diagram LS Low Speed O Off HS High Speed LS O HS FA a ONTEER ETERA The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse local control with network control selectable wiring diagram L Local control O Off N Network control LS Low Speed HS High Speed The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained local control with network control selectable wiring diagram L Local control Maintained Ozon N Network control T Local Control LON LS Low Speed a ae naine with Network HS High Speed Control LS HS i Selecta
53. LTM R controller mode prior to network loss network loss Local Terminal Strip Fault and Warning control possibilities Signal nothing Activate a warning Activate a fault Activate a fault and warning Local RJ45 Fault and Warning control possibilities Signal nothing Activate a warning Activate a fault Activate a fault and warning Remote Fault and Warning control possibilities Signal nothing Activate a warning Activate a fault Activate a fault and warning The behavior of the LO1 and LO2 relays depends on the motor controller mode and on the fallback strategy chosen 1639502 12 2006 531 Maintenance HMI Communication Loss The LTM R controller monitors the communication with any approved HMI device Using a fixed network idle time timeout the LTM R controller watchdog function can report a network loss In the event of a communication loss the LTM R controller can be configured to take certain actions These depend on the control mode that the LTM R controller was operating in prior to the communication loss If HMI controller communication is lost while the LTM R controller is in Local RJ45 control mode the LTM R controller enters the fallback state If HMI LTM R controller communication is lost while the LTM R controller is not in Local RJ45 control mode and then the control mode is changed to Local RJ45 control the LTM R controller enters the fallback
54. Mounting ona You can mount the controller and the expansion module on a metal mounting plate Solid Mounting using ST2 9 steel tapping screws 4 for the controller and 2 for the expansion Plate module The thickness of the mounting plate must not exceed 7 mm 0 275 in When mounted the controller mounting feet may extend beyond the controller dimensions see p 274 by 8 mm 0 3 in in both directions To mount the controller and the expansion module on a mounting plate Step Action 1 Locate the 4 mounting holes at each corner of the controller and the 2 mounting holes on the expansion module Position the controller and expansion module on the mounting plate making sure to leave enough space for the clearance zone see p 276 Insert each of the 6 tapping screws Use a screwdriver to tighten each screw and secure the controller and the expansion module in place Torque to 1 Nem 8 8 Ib in 6 x M4 x 20 8 x 32 MountingonaTE You can mount the controller and the expansion module on a TE plate such as Plate Telequick using 6 mounting clips AF1 EA4 When mounted the controller mounting feet may extend beyond the controller dimensions see p 274 by 8 mm 0 3 in in both directions To mount the controller on Telequick Step Action 1 Attach the 6 mounting clips to Telequick as shown in the diagram below The rounded edge should face upwards for the top clips
55. NTC Analog AU G1 AU G1 AU G1 Thermal Definite AU G1 AU G1 AU G1 overload Inverse Thermal AU G1 AU G1 AU G1 RB Test Reset button on the LTM R controller front face or the local HMI PC Power cycle on the LTM R controller 1 5 Set 1 5 logic input on the LTM R controller NC network command AU GX Automatic with conditions configured for the protection function group Where GX G1 G2 or G3 G1 Fault AutoGroup 1 has a configurable number of resets 0 manual 1 2 3 4 5 unlimited and setting delay G2 Fault Auto Group 2 has a configurable number of resets 0 manual 1 2 3 4 5 unlimited and setting delay G3 Fault Auto Group 3 has a configurable number of resets 0 manual 1 2 3 4 5 unlimited and setting delay 264 1639502 12 2006 Motor Control Functions Protection Monitored fault Control mode category Local terminal strip Local HMI Network Current Long Start RB 1 5 AU G2 RB 1 5 AU G2 RB 1 5 NC AU G2 Jam RB 1 5 AU G2 RB 1 5 AU G2 RB 1 5 NC AU G2 Current Phase Imbalance RB 1 5 AU G2 RB 1 5 AU G2 RB 1 5 NC AU G2 Current Phase Loss RB 1 5 RB I 5 RB 1 5 NC Undercurrent RB 1 5 AU G3 RB 1 5 AU G3 RB 1 5 NC AU G3 Overcurrent RB 1 5 AU G3 RB 1 5 AU G3 RB 1 5 NC AU G3 External Ground Current RB 1 5 AU G2 RB 1 5 AU G2 RB 1 5 NC AU G2 Internal Ground Current RB 1 5 AU G2 RB 1 5 AU G2 RB 1 5 N
56. Port e a Magelis XBTN410 e a PC running PowerSuite PLC programming software LTM R Controller This port connects the expansion module to the LTM R controller using an RJ45 connector Port 36 1639502 12 2006 Introduction LEDs Plug in Terminals and Pin Assignments The expansion module LEDs indicate the following behaviors LED name Description Appearance Status Power Power Fault status green power on no faults red power on faults off not powered 1 7 Logic Input I 7 status yellow activated off not activated 1 8 Logic Input I 8 status yellow activated off not activated 1 9 Logic Input I 9 status yellow activated off not activated 1 10 Logic Input 1 10 status yellow activated off not activated The expansion module has the following plug in terminals and pin assignments Terminal block Pin Desctiption Voltage Inputs LV1 phase 1 input voltage LV2 phase 2 input voltage LV3 phase 3 input voltage Logic Inputs and Common Terminals LI7 Logic Input 7 C7 Common for LI7 LI8 Logic Input 8 C8 Common for LI8 LI9 Logic Input 9 c9 Common for LI9 L110 Logic Input 10 C10 Common for L110 1639502 12 2006 37 Introduction Technical Specifications of the LTM R Controller Technical Specifications The LTM R controller meets the following specifications Certification UL CSA
57. Profibus DP is a linear bus designed for transfers of high speed data The PLC communicates with its peripheral devices via a high speed serial link Data exchange is mainly cyclic Always follow the recommendations for wiring and connecting A WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION This equipment must be installed programmed and serviced only by qualified personnel e Follow all up to date instructions standards and regulations e Check the function settings before starting the motor e Do not downgrade or modify these devices Incorrect configuration can result in unpredictable behavior of the devices Failure to follow this instruction can result in death serious injury or equipment damage 310 1639502 12 2006 Installation Direct Connection to the Bus General architecture with an LTM R controller PET Master PLC DP slave Profibus DP Profibus DP TeSys T system DP slave AON Note A terminator is present at each slave module s connection It is embedded into the cable connectors This terminator can only be activated at the beginning and the end of the Profibus DP cable 3 1639502 12 2006 311 Installation Transmission This table describes the transmission features of the Profibus DP bus Features Topology Linear bus with line terminations Transmission Mode Half Duplex Transmission Rate fro
58. The following diagram describes a thermal overload inverse thermal fault 0 A Start state Fault condition gt a gt O s2 4 7 3 Thermal capacity 0s2 Fault threshold 100 of thermal capacity 1639502 12 2006 137 Motor Protection Functions Thermal Overload Definite Time Description When you set the Thermal Overload Mode parameter to Definite Time the LTM R controller signals e awarning when measured maximum phase current exceeds a configurable threshold OC1 or OC2 e a fault when the maximum phase current continuously exceeds the same threshold OC1 or OC2 for a set time delay The thermal overload definite time fault includes a time delay of constant magnitude following a start command before the protection is active and a fault timeout duration as described below At A Fault no operation i eee ee ee A tee R ove eens Is Fault and warning threshold OC1 or OC2 T1 Start command T2 Elapsed time delay There is no time delay for the thermal overload definite time warning Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled When the LTM R controller is connected to a 2 speed motor two thresholds are used 1 for low speed OC1 and 1 for high speed OC2 The definite time protection function is disabled following a start by a delay defined by the Long Start Fault Timeout setting The LTM R controller when configur
59. Xx Xx Voltage Phase Reversal Current Phase Reversal x lt Voltage Phase Loss Phase Configuration Internal Stack Overflow Watchdog ROM Checksum EEROM CPU Internal Temperature XIX X X X X X X X X X XxX X XxX OK Xx XxX X XxX XxX x x Xx X Monitored Not monitored 256 1639502 12 2006 Motor Control Functions Protection category Monitored fault LTM R controller LTM R controller with expansion module Saved on power loss Thermal resistance Motor temp sensor PTC Binary PTC Analog NTC Analog Thermal overload Definite Inverse Thermal Current Long Start Jam Current Phase Imbalance Current Phase Loss Overcurrent Undercurrent Internal Ground Current External Ground Current XIX X X X X X X X X XxX x Xx Voltage Overvoltage Undervoltage Voltage Phase Imbalance Power Underpower Overpower Under Power Factor Over Power Factor Communication loss PLC to LTM R HMI to LTM R XI X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XxX x Xx XIX X X X X X X X X X X X X X x X X X XxX X Xx X Monitored Not monitored 1639502 12 2006 257 Motor Control Functions Manual Reset Introduction Manual Reset Whe
60. e A C B Motor Operating Mode e Overload 2 wire Independent 0 3 wire X e Overload 3 wire e Independent 2 wire e Independent 3 wire e Reverser 2 wire e Reverser 3 wire e Two Step 2 wire e Two Step 3 wire e Two Speed 2 wire e Two Speed 3 wire e Custom Control Direct Transition e Yes No x e No Motor Transition Timeout 000 999 s 10s x Motor Step 1 To 2 Threshold 20 800 FLC in 50 x increments of 1 Motor Step 1 To 2 Timeout 900 999 s 50s E Motor Nominal Power 0 1 999 9 kW in increments 7 5 kW X of 0 1 kW Motor Aux Fan Cooled e Yes No X X e No Motor Temp Sensor Type e None None X e PTC binary e PTC analog e NTC analog 1 Only for 2 Step Operating Mode X The parameter is located in the indicated menu in the Magelis XBTN410 HMI 1 to 1 The parameter is not located in the indicated menu in the Magelis XBTN410 HMI 1 to 1 1639502 12 2006 325 Commissioning Load CT Required parameters include the following load current transformer settings Parameters Parameter Setting Range Factory Default Sys Config Main Load CT Ratio e None No Default X e 10 1 e 15 1 e 30 1 e 50 1 e 100 1 e 200 1 e 400 1 e 800 1 e Other Ratio Load CT Multiple Passes 1 100 1 x Load CT Primary 1 65535 1 x Load CT Secondary 1 500 1 x X The parameter is located in the indicated menu in the Magelis XBT
61. e Over Power Factor Warning e Over Power Factor Fault e 1 counting statistic e Over Power Factor Faults Count 1639502 12 2006 203 Motor Protection Functions Block Diagram Over power factor warning Run state Power Factor PF gt PFs1 Over power factor fault Power Factor PF gt PFs2 Run state gt amp Over power factor warning o AND m Over power amp T 0 factor fault AND PFs1 Over power factor warning threshold PFs2 Over power factor fault threshold T Over power factor fault timeout Parameter The over power factor function has the following parameters Settings Parameters Setting range Factory setting Fault enable Enable Disable Disable Fault timeout 1 25 s in 0 1 s increments 10s Fault threshold 0 1 x Power factor in 0 90 0 01 increments Warning enable Enable Disable Disable Warning threshold 0 1 x Power factor in 0 90 0 01 increments Function The over power factor function has the following characteristics haracteristi age Characteristics Characteristics Value Hysteresis 95 of Fault threshold or Warning threshold Accuracy 2 or 3 for Power Factors gt 0 6 Trip time accuracy 0 1 s or 5 204 1639502 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Example The following diagram describes the occurrence of an over power fac
62. ground fault conditions External current transformers expand the current range for use with motors greater than 100 full load Amperes Telemecanique Primary Secondary Inside diameter Reference number current transformers mm in 100 1 35 1 38 LT6CT1001 Do ih 200 1 35 1 38 LT6CT2001 i 400 1 35 1 38 LT6CT4001 800 1 35 1 38 LT6CT8001 Note The following current transformers are also available Telemecanique LUTC0301 LUTC0501 LUTC1001 LUTC2001 LUTC4001 and LUTC8001 External ground current transformers measure ground fault conditions Merlin Gerin Vigirex Type Maximum Inside diameter Transformation Reference ground current transformers current mm in ratio number TA30 65A 30 1 18 1000 1 50437 PA50 85A 50 1 97 50438 1A80 160 A 80 3 15 50439 MA120 250 A 120 4 72 50440 SA200 400 A 200 7 87 50441 PA300 630 A 300 11 81 50442 1639502 12 2006 21 Introduction Lug lug kit provides bus bars and lug terminals that adapt the pass through wiring windows and provide line and load terminations for the power circuit Square D Lug lug Kit Description Reference number Square D Lug lug Kit MLPL9999 22 1639502 12 2006 Introduction Cables System components require cables to connect to other components and communicate with the network Cable Des
63. internal 256 motor temperature sensor 216 257 operating states 216 power 193 217 257 thermal and current 129 thermal overload 216 257 voltage 175 216 257 warnings 118 wiring 216 256 PTC analog 168 PTC binary 166 1639502 12 2006 591 Index Q QuickWatch window 447 R rapid cycle 173 lockout 500 lockout timeout 122 173 373 389 424 505 reactive power 83 417 503 consumption 86 readings refresh rate 445 replacement expansion module 529 LTM R controller 529 restore factory defaults 444 S scrolling parameter display 1 to 1 383 self test 450 527 services cyclic acyclic 453 DP V1 453 start cycle 218 starts per hour lockout threshold 373 starts count motor LO1 490 motor LO2 490 SyCon configuration tool 456 system fault 113 413 499 on 113 413 499 ready 113 499 tripped 499 warning 113 499 system and device monitoring faults 94 system and device monitoring faults characteristics 64 control command diagnostic errors 98 system operating status 112 characteristics 66 minimum wait time 113 motor state 113 system selection guide 24 system status logic inputs 500 logic outputs 501 register 1 499 register 2 500 T technical specifications expansion module 42 LTM R controller 38 TeSys T Motor Management System 16 thermal capacity level 76 93 131 135 389 417 502 n 0 377 426 491 n 1 378 427 492 n 2 379 493 n
64. lt 9 mm 0 35 inches spacing 20 45 C 4 113 F Maximum operating altitude derating are accepted 4500 m 14763 ft without derating 2000 m 6561 ft 1 Some certifications are in progress The maximum rated ambient temperature of the expansion module depends on the installation spacing with the LTM R controller 3 Without modifying the state of the contacts in the least favorable direction 4 NOTICE This product has been designed for use in environment A Use of this product in environment B may cause unwanted electromagnetic disturbance which may require the implementation of adequate mitigation measures 42 1639502 12 2006 Introduction Fire resistance According to UL 94 V2 According to IEC 695 2 1 Parts supporting live components 960 C 1760 F other components 650 C 1202 F Half sine mechanical shock pulse 11 ms According to CEI 60068 2 272 30 g 3 axis and 6 directions Resistance to According to CEI 60068 2 6 5 gn vibration Immunity to According to EN61000 4 2 Through air 8 kV Level 3 electrostatic discharge Over surface 6 kV Level 3 Immunity to radiated fields According toEN61000 4 3 10V m Level 3 Immunity to fast transient bursts According to EN61000 4 4 All circuits 4 kV Level 4 2 kV on all other circuits Immunity to radioelectric fields According to EN61000
65. motor specifications and characteristic e specifications describing each hardware device to be added to the system 320 1639502 12 2006 Commissioning First Power up Overview First power up describes the first time power is cycled to e anew LTM R controller or e an LTM R controller that has been previously commissioned but whose parameter settings have been restored to the factory defaults either as a result of e execution of the Clear All Command or e a firmware upgrade On first power up the LTM R controller enters a locked non configured state called the initialized state and the Controller System Config Required parameter is turned On The LTM R controller exits this state only after certain parameters called required parameters have been configured Using the Magelis XBTN410 HMI configuring the SysConfig menu parameters clears the Controller System Config Required parameter and brings the LTM R controller out of initialization Using PowerSuite software all parameters both required and optional are configured offline then downloaded to the LTM R controller in a configuration file A successful download clears the Controller System Config Required parameter and brings the LTM R controller out of initialization In either case the LTM R controller is no longer locked and is ready for operations For information on operating states see p 214 In a 1 to 1 configuration the Magelis X
66. of Fault threshold or Warning threshold Accuracy 2 or 3 for Power Factors gt 0 6 Trip time accuracy 0 1 s or 5 1639502 12 2006 201 Motor Protection Functions Example The following diagram describes the occurrence of an under power factor fault PF A PrS2 sh S Se sti E E alec Rents E os elecae en Nine ei a aN tet OTs fault timeout q lt UPFs2 under power factor fault threshold 202 1639502 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Over Power Factor Description Functional Characteristics The over power factor protection function monitors the value of the power factor and signals e a warning when the value of the power factor exceeds a set threshold e afault when the value of the power factor exceeds a separately set threshold and remains above that threshold for a set period of time This function has a single fault time delay The over power factor protection function is available only in run state when the LTM R controller is connected to an expansion module Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled The function applies to both single phase and 3 phase motors The over power factor function includes the following features e 2 thresholds e Over Power Factor Warning Threshold e Over Power Factor Fault Threshold e 1 fault time delay e Over Power Factor Fault Timeout e 2 function outputs
67. the content of the LCD display can change as follows This LCD screen Is displayed Main Menu on power up if no fault exists or e by pressing ENTER HMI display e automatically after the Main Menu has been displayed for 10 seconds with no key pressed or by pressing ESC to close a fault or warning display Fault or warning automatically upon the occurrence of a fault or warning 1639502 12 2006 355 Use Configuration Mode LCD Presentation Mode LCD In configuration mode the LCD displays two 12 character lines as depicted below line 1 line 2 e the top line line 1 displays the parent or higher level menu sub menu or parameter e the bottom line line 2 displays a related child or lower level sub menu parameter or setting See p 361 for information about navigating the menu structure in configuration mode See p 362 for information about editing values In presentation mode the LCD display contains 4 sections as depicted below line A line B1 line B2 line C
68. undervoltage 184 fault enable 123 185 372 422 fault threshold 123 185 372 422 506 fault timeout 123 185 372 422 506 faults count 90 376 warning enable 123 185 372 422 warning threshold 123 185 372 422 506 use 341 programming the Magelis XBTN410 347 user map addresses setting 476 516 user map values 476 516 V voltage average 81 417 503 L1 L2 79 417 503 L2 L3 79 417 503 L3 L1 79 417 503 phase imbalance 417 503 voltage highest imbalance L1 L2 504 L2 L3 504 L3 L1 504 voltage imbalance 80 voltage load shedding 190 configuration 506 voltage motor protection functions parameter setting ranges 123 voltage phase imbalance 80 93 176 fault enable 123 179 372 422 425 fault threshold 123 179 372 422 425 506 fault timeout running 123 179 372 422 425 506 fault timeout starting 123 179 372 422 425 506 faults count 90 375 n 0 377 426 491 n 1 378 427 492 n 2 379 493 n 3 380 494 n 4 381 495 warning enable 123 179 372 422 425 warning threshold 123 179 372 422 425 506 voltage phase loss 180 fault enable 123 181 372 422 425 fault timeout 123 181 372 422 425 506 faults count 90 376 warning enable 123 181 372 422 425 voltage phase reversal 183 fault 101 fault enable 101 123 183 372 422 425 faults count 90 148 183 1639502 12 2006 593 Index W register 2 510 thermal overload 509 under powe
69. z A2 The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse local control with network control selectable wiring diagram H Hand Local Control O Off fe A Automatic Network Control net A ae oto STOP ao ee A2 H O A ikaw EE At pales mo A2 T eae 7 3 T HIGH ted eo oO i OOOO The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained local control with network control selectable wiring diagram H Hand Local Control HIOJA O Off At A Automatic Network Control a2 LOW HIGH H t A i RLA D al oor Oo oO kab Ae ee iss te UE IRS eS 572 1639502 12 2006 NEMA Format Wiring Diagrams Two Speed Mode Wiring Diagrams Separate Winding Application The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse local control wiring diagram Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Local Control 3a L1 L2 L3 LOW LOW LOW 1639502 12 2006 573 NEMA Format Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Local Control Application Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Local Control with Network Control Selectable Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Local control with Network Control Selectable The following application diagram featu
70. 0 1 in 0 01 increments 0 60 Over power factor Fault enable Enable Disable Disable Fault timeout 1 25 s in 0 1 s increments 10 s Fault threshold 0 1 in 0 01 increments 0 90 Warning enable Enable Disable Disable Warning threshold 0 1 in 0 01 increments 0 90 124 1639502 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Motor Protection Characteristics Overview Operation The protection functions of the LTM R controller continuously monitor the values of current parameters When connected to an expansion module the LTM R controller also provides voltage protection and monitors voltage and power parameters The following diagram describes the operation of a typical motor protection function This diagram and the following diagrams are expressed in terms of current However the same principles apply to voltage l 1 gt ls1 Inet p gt Warning Timer I gt is2 Pst T o p Faut Measurement of the monitored parameter Is1 Warning threshold setting Is2 Fault threshold setting T Fault timeout setting Inst Instantaneous warning fault detection 1639502 12 2006 125 Motor Protection Functions Settings Some protection functions include configurable settings including e Fault threshold A limit setting for the monitored parameter that triggers a protection function fault e Warning threshold A limit setting for the monitored parameter that triggers a protection f
71. 0 Date Date And Time n 0 Time Date And Time n 0 FLC Ratio Motor Full Load Current Ratio n 0 FLC Max Motor Full Load Current Max n 0 Avg Current Average Current n 0 L1 Current L1 Current Ratio n 0 L2 Current L2 Current Ratio n 0 L3 Current L3 Current Ratio n 0 GRCurr Ground Current Ratio n 0 Curr Imbalance Current Phase Imbalance n 0 Th Capacity Thermal Capacity Level n 0 Avg Voltage Average Voltage n 0 L1 L2 Voltage L1 L2 Voltage n 0 L2 L3 Voltage L2 L3 Voltage n 0 L3 L1 Voltage L3 L1 Voltage n 0 Volt Imbalance Voltage Phase Imbalance n 0 Frequency Frequency n 0 Active Pwr Active Power n 0 Power Factor Power Factor n 0 Temp Sensor Motor Temp Sensor n 0 426 1639502 12 2006 Use Level 4 Level 5 Parameter name Statistics Addr 1 8 Fault n 1 Date Date And Time n 1 Time Date And Time n 1 FLC Ratio Motor Full Load Current Ratio n 1 FLC Max Motor Full Load Current Max n 1 Avg Current Average Current n 1 L1 Current L1 Current Ratio n 1 L2 Current L2 Current Ratio n 1 L3 Current L3 Current Ratio n 1 GRCurr Ground Current Ratio n 1 Curr Imbalance Current Phase Imbalance n 1 Th Capacity Thermal Capacity Level n 1 Avg Voltage Average Voltage n 1 L1 L2 Voltage L1 L2 Voltage n 1 L2 L3 Voltage L2 L3 Voltage n 1 L3 L1 Voltage L3 L1 Voltage n 1 Volt Im
72. 1 3 Free Free 1 4 Free Stop motor 1 5 Reset Reset 1 6 Local 0 or network 1 Local 0 or network 1 Two step operating mode provides the following logic outputs Logic outputs Assignment 0 1 13 and 14 Step 1 contactor control 0 2 23 and 24 Step 2 contactor control 0 3 33 and 34 Warning signal 0 4 95 96 97 and 98 Fault signal Two step operating mode uses the following HMI keys HMI keys 2 wire maintained assignment 3 wire impulse assignment Aux 1 Control motor Start motor Aux 2 Free Free Stop Stop motor while pressed Stop motor 246 1639502 12 2006 Motor Control Functions Timing The following diagram is an example of the timing sequence for the Two Step Sequence operating mode that shows the inputs and outputs for a 3 wire impulse configuration 1 1 Start 1 4 Stop Current lt Motor i Step 1 to 2 Threshold Motor Step 1 i To 2 Timeout j 0 1 Step 1 O 2 Step 2 gt A y i Motor On bit Motor Lockout otor Lockou Timeout a_ P a pe 4 gt 1 Normal operation 2 Step 1 start 3 Step 2 start 4 Start command ignored Stop command active 5 Current falling below the Motor Step 1 To 2 Threshold ignored preceded by expiration of the Motor Step 1 To 2 Timeout Paramet
73. 1 5 RB 1 5 Communication loss PLC to LTM R RB 1 5 RB I 5 RB 1 5 LTM E to LTM R RB 1 5 RB 1 5 RB 1 5 RB Test Reset button on the LTM R controller front face or a local HMI PC Power cycle on the LTM R controller 1 5 Set 1 5 logic input on the LTM R controller 1 Remote network reset commands are not allowed even when the LTM R controller is configured for network control mode 1639502 12 2006 259 Motor Control Functions Automatic Reset Introduction Setting the Fault Reset Mode parameter to Automatic lets you e configure the LTM R controller to attempt to reset motor protection and communications faults without the intervention of either a human operator or the remote PLC for example e for anon networked LTM R controller installed at a location that is physically remote or locally hard to access e configure fault handling for each protection fault group in a manner that is appropriate to the faults in that group e seta different timeout delay e permit a different number of reset attempts e disable automatic fault resetting The Control Mode parameter selection determines the available reset methods Each protection fault is included in 1 of 3 auto reset fault groups based on the characteristics of that fault as described below Each fault group has two configurable parameters e a timeout the Auto Reset Group number 1 2 or 3 Timeout parameter and e a maximum number of permissibl
74. 100 ms 1639502 12 2006 77 Metering and Monitoring Functions Motor Temperature Sensor Description Characteristics Frequency Description Characteristics The motor temperature sensor function displays the resistance value in ohms measured by resistance temperature sensor Refer to the product documentation for the specific temperature sensor being used One of three types of temperature sensors can be used e PTC Binary e PTC Analog e NTC Analog The motor temperature sensor function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Unit Q Accuracy 2 Resolution 0 19 Refresh interval 500 ms The frequency function displays the value measured based on the line voltage measurements The frequency function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Unit Hz Accuracy 2 Resolution 0 1 Hz Refresh interval 30 ms 78 1639502 12 2006 Metering and Monitoring Functions Line to Line Voltages Description Characteristics The line to line voltages function displays the rms value of the phase to phase voltage V1 to V2 V2 to V3 and V3 to V1 e L1 L2 voltage phase 1 to phase 2 voltage e L2 L3 voltage phase 2 to phase 3 voltage e L3 L1 voltage phase 3 to phase 1 voltage The expansion module performs true rms calculations for line to line voltage up to the 7th harmonic S
75. 208 440 480 575 600 690 220 230 240 6 DC std 24 DC std 36 48 60 72 96 100 110 125 155 220 250 440 575 2 4 DC low consumption 24 DC low consumption 48 72 96 110 220 250 LC1D40 LC1D95 26 AC 24 32 42 48 110 AC 256 277 380 380 115 120 127 208 220 400 400 415 440 480 220 230 230 240 500 575 600 660 50 60 22 DC 24 36 48 60 72 110 125 220 250 440 LC1D115 18 AC 24 32 42 48 110 AC 277 380 400 415 115 120 127 208 220 440 480 500 230 240 22 DC 24 48 60 72 110 125 220 250 440 LC1D150 18 AC 24 32 42 48 110 AC 277 380 400 415 115 120 127 208 220 440 480 500 230 240 5 DC 24 48 60 72 110 125 220 250 440 302 1639502 12 2006 Installation Catalog references and characteristics for TeSys F IEC contactors are listed in the table below Coil voltages are grouped according to whether an interposing relay is required TeSys F catalog Control Circuit VA or W Coil voltages references Frequency maintained max interposing relay not interposing relay required Hz required LC1F115 50 45 AC 24 42 48 110 115 AC 380 400 415 440 500 127 220 230 240 660 1000 60 45 AC 24 42 48 110 115 127 220 230 240 265 277 380 415 460 480 660 1000 5 DC 24 48 110 125 220 230 250 440 460 LC1F150 50 45 AC 24
76. 233 Motor Control Functions Independent Operating Mode Description Functional Characteristics Use Independent operating mode in single direct on line across the line full voltage non reversing motor starting applications This function includes the following features Accessible in 3 control modes Local Terminal Strip Local HMI and Network The LTM R controller does not manage the relationship between logic outputs O 1 and O 2 In local terminal strip control mode logic input 1 1 controls logic output 0 1 and logic input 1 2 controls logic output O 2 In network or local HMI control modes the Motor Run Forward Command parameter controls logic output O 1 and the Logic Output 23 Command parameter controls logic output O 2 Logic input I 3 is not used in the control circuit but can be configured to set a bit in memory Logic outputs O 1 and O 2 deactivate and the motor stops when control voltage becomes too low Logic outputs O 1 and 0 4 deactivate and the motor stops in response to a diagnostic error Note See Control Wiring and Fault Management p 229 for information about the interaction between e the LTM R controller s predefined control logic and e the control wiring an example of which appears in the following diagram 234 1639502 12 2006 Motor Control Functions Independent The following wiring diagram represents a simplified example of the LTM R Appli
77. 3 380 494 n 4 381 495 thermal motor protection functions parameter setting ranges 119 thermal overload 130 configuration 505 definite time 138 fault 135 fault definite timeout 120 140 370 505 fault enable 119 130 370 420 fault reset mode 119 255 366 fault reset threshold 120 135 256 370 420 508 fault reset timeout 256 389 faults count 90 135 139 375 inverse thermal 131 mode 119 130 330 370 505 warning 135 warning enable 119 130 370 420 warning threshold 120 135 140 370 420 508 warnings count 90 135 139 375 thermal overload statistics characteristics 65 time to trip 111 time stamp 528 time to trip 111 417 503 592 1639502 12 2006 Index transmission features 312 U under power factor 200 fault enable 124 201 373 423 fault threshold 124 201 373 423 506 fault timeout 124 201 373 423 506 faults count 90 376 warning enable 124 201 373 423 warning threshold 124 201 373 423 507 undercurrent 153 fault enable 121 154 371 421 fault threshold 121 154 371 421 508 fault timeout 121 154 371 421 508 faults count 90 375 warning enable 121 154 371 421 warning threshold 121 154 371 421 508 underpower 194 fault enable 124 195 373 423 fault threshold 124 195 373 423 506 fault timeout 124 195 373 423 506 faults count 90 376 warning enable 124 195 373 423 warning threshold 124 195 373 423 506
78. 370 420 508 fault timeout starting 120 144 370 420 508 faults count 90 375 n 0 377 426 491 n 1 378 427 492 n 2 379 493 n 3 380 494 n 4 381 495 warning enable 120 144 370 420 warning threshold 120 144 370 420 508 current phase loss 145 fault enable 120 146 371 420 fault timeout 371 faults count 90 375 timeout 120 146 420 505 warning enable 120 146 371 420 current phase reversal 148 fault 101 fault enable 101 120 148 371 420 faults count 90 phase sequence 120 148 current ratio average 73 502 ground 503 L1 68 503 L2 68 503 L3 68 503 custom logic auxiliary 1 LED 517 auxiliary 2 LED 517 external fault 517 FLC selection 517 LO1 517 LO2 517 LO3 517 LO4 517 memory space 517 memory used 517 network control 517 non volatile space 517 phase reverse 517 reset 517 run 517 status register 517 stop 517 stop LED 517 temporary space 517 transition 517 version 517 custom operating mode 253 cyclic acyclic services 453 D date and time 45 93 n 0 377 426 491 n 1 378 427 492 n 2 379 493 n 3 380 494 n 4 381 495 setting 330 368 513 device description 454 diagnostic fault 91 fault enable 46 98 373 faults count 91 376 warning enable 46 98 373 diagnostic faults communication loss 104 controller configuration checksum 103 wiring faults 101 diagnostic telegram 464 1639502 12 2006 583 Index DP
79. 380 494 n 4 381 495 L3 L1 highest imbalance 177 L3 L1 voltage 93 n 0 377 426 491 n 1 378 427 492 n 2 379 493 n 3 380 494 n 4 381 495 languages 46 443 line currents 68 load CT multiple passes 47 330 508 primary 47 330 508 ratio 47 330 366 487 secondary 47 330 508 load shedding 190 500 enable 123 191 373 424 506 restart threshold 123 191 373 424 506 restart timeout 123 191 373 424 506 threshold 123 191 373 424 506 timeout 123 191 373 424 506 1639502 12 2006 587 Index load sheddings count 108 376 490 logic file 253 logic input 211 logic input behavior 226 independent operating mode 236 overload operating mode 233 reverser operating mode 240 two speed operating mode 251 two step operating mode 246 logic inputs characteristics expansion module 44 LTM R controller 40 logic output behavior 227 independent operating mode 236 overload operating mode 233 reverser operating mode 240 two speed operating mode 251 two step operating mode 246 logic outputs characteristics controller 40 long start 149 fault enable 121 150 371 420 fault threshold 121 150 218 371 420 508 fault timeout 120 121 140 150 218 370 371 420 508 faults count 90 375 LTM R controller physical description 31 technical specifications 38 Magelis XBT L1000 programming software file transfer 351 software application files 350 Magelis XBTN41
80. 397 Use What s in this Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Physical Description 1 to many 399 Command Lines 1 to many 403 Navigating the Menu Structure 1 to many 404 Editing Values 1 to many 406 Executing a Value Write Command 1 to many 409 Menu Structure 1 to many 411 Menu Structure Home Page 1 to many 412 Menu Structure All LTM R Controllers and the HMI 1 to many 413 Motor Starter Page 1 to many 416 Settings 1 to many 418 Statistics 1 to many 425 Product ID 1 to many 428 Monitoring 1 to many 429 Fault Management 1 to many 430 Service Commands 1 to many 431 398 1639502 12 2006 Use Physical Description 1 to many 1 to many When a Magelis XBTN410 is used in a 1 to many physical configuration the face Interface of the HMI looks like this O00000 1 LCD display 2 8 button keypad 1639502 12 2006 399 Use 1 to many Keypad The 1 to many configuration requires a customized keypad label Using a blank keypad label add the names of the 6 bottom buttons to the label For instructions on creating and installing a customized keypad label refer to the Telemecanique Magelis Instruction Sheet that ships with the Magelis XBTN410 HMI In a 1 to many configuration the keypad buttons perform the following functions Keys Use this key to enter the menu struc
81. 4 64 10 V rms Level 3 Surge Immunity According to IEC EN 61000 4 5 Common mode Differential mode 100 240 Vac inputs 4 kV 12 Q 2 kV 2 Q 24 V dc inputs 1 kV 12 Q 0 5 kV 2 Q Communication 1 kV 12 Q 1 Some certifications are in progress 2 The maximum rated ambient temperature of the expansion module depends on the installation spacing with the LTM R controller 3 Without modifying the state of the contacts in the least favorable direction 4 NOTICE This product has been designed for use in environment A Use of this product in environment B may cause unwanted electromagnetic disturbance which may require the implementation of adequate mitigation measures 1639502 12 2006 43 Introduction Logic Inputs Characteristics The expansion module logic inputs 7 to 1 10 are externally powered They are isolated from the LTM R controller s six inputs and are not powered by the control voltage of the LTM R controller The expansion module logic inputs have the following characteristics Control voltage 24 Vdc 115 230 Vac Nominal input values Voltage 24 Vdc 100 240 Vac Current 7mA e 3 1 mA at 100Vac e 7 5 mA at 240 Vac Input limit values At state 1 Voltage 15 V maximum 79 V lt V lt 264 V Current 2 mA min to 15 mA max 2 mA min at 110 Vac to 3 mA min at 220 Vac At state 0 Voltage 5 V maximum OV lt V lt 40V Current 15 mA maximum 15 mA
82. 5 The following diagram describes the occurrence of a external ground current fault occurring during run state 10 Start state i Run state 3 E p 1082 tgeen N oean e a easel Fault timeout q gt l0s2 External ground current fault threshold Fault condition 164 1639502 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Motor Temperature Sensor Overview Parameter Settings The LTM R controller has 2 terminals T1 and T2 that can be connected to a motor temperature sensing element to provide protection for motor windings by detecting high temperature conditions that could lead to damage or degradation These protections are activated when the Motor Temp Sensor Type parameter is set to one of the following settings e PTC Binary e PTC Analog e NTC Analog Only one of these motor protection sensing elements can be enabled at a time Note Motor temperature sensor protection is based in ohms PTC Binary protection thresholds are pre set to IEC standards and are non configurable PTC Analog and NTC Analog protection functions may require that you scale the resistance value to the corresponding threshold level in degrees based on the properties of the selected sensing element When a sensor type is changed the LTM R controller s motor temperature sensing configuration settings revert to their default values If a sensor type is replaced with another sensor of the sa
83. 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535 64 Controller Commercial Reference 65 Controller Commercial Reference2 66 Controller Commercial Reference3 67 Controller Commercial Reference4 68 Controller Commercial References 69 Controller Commercial Reference6 70 Controller SerialNumber1 71 Controller SerialNumber2 72 Controller SerialNumber3 73 Controller SerialNumber4 74 Controller SerialNumber5 75 Controller IDCode 76 Controller Firmware Version O COOOOOCOOCOCOOCR lt 44444444 000000 a a a a a Pi n m n m a a a a 5 i a a a a a a a gi 5 Instead of monitoring large groupings of parameters you can elect to monitor only a short list of parameters that you select To do this Step Description In the View menu select QuickWatch Window The QuickWatch Window opens 2 In the QuickWatch Window type in a parameter address and click the Add Watch button The parameter is added to the list Note You can find a parameter address by selecting All Parameters in the Parameters branch then looking for the parameter name and address 3 Repeat step 2 for every parameter you wish to add to the list The QuickWatch Window parameter list is updated with the same frequency as the screens in the Parameters branch 1639502 12 2006 447 Use Fault Management Overview Fault Monitoring Use PowerSuite software to monitor the status of all enabled faul
84. 8 0 20 0 40A FLC FLC FLCmax 0 43 8 0 5 FLC 0 43A Current range max 8 0A Load CT primary 1 Load CT secondary 1 Passes 5 Contactor rating 810 0A Load CT ratio Load CT primary Load CT secondary passes 1 1 5 0 2 Current sensor max Current range max Load CT ratio 8 0 0 2 1 6A FLCmax min Current sensor max Contactor rating min 1 6 810 0 1 6 A FLCmin Current sensor max 20 1 6 20 0 08 A FLC FLC FLCmax 0 43 1 6 27 FLCy 135A Current range max 8 0A Load CT primary 200 Load CT secondary 1 Passes 1 Contactor rating 150 0 A Load CT ratio Load CT primary Load CT secondary passes 200 1 1 200 0 Current sensor max Current range max Load CT ratio 8 0 200 0 1600 0 A FLCmax min Current sensor max Contactor rating min 1600 0 150 0 150 0 A FLCmin Current sensor max 20 1600 0 20 80 0 A FLC FLC FLCmax 135 150 0 90 328 1639502 12 2006 Commissioning Commissioning Using Magelis XBTN410 1 to 1 Sys Config Menu When the LTM R controller first powers up the Magelis XBTN410 HMI in 1 to 1 configuration displays its Sys Config menu The Sys Config menu is displayed when the LTM R controller is in its initialized state and must be configured before the it can be operated Configuration of the Sys Config menu parameters is complete when the End Config setting is set to
85. 81 in LU9R10 1 m 39 37 in 284 1639502 12 2006 Installation Connecting to an HMI Device Overview This section describes how to connect the LTM R controller to an HMI device such as a Magelis XBT or a PC running PowerSuite software The HMI must be connected to the RJ45 port on the LTM R controller or to the HMI interface port RJ45 on the LTM E expansion module You can connect an HMI to a controller in 1 to 1 or 1 to many mode Connecting toa The diagrams below show the Magelis XBTN410 HMI connected to the controller Magelis XBT with and without the expansion module HMI Device in 1 to 1 Mode Magelis XBTN410 HMI device Magelis connecting cable XBTZ938 LTM R controller Expansion module kOoOnND 1639502 12 2006 285 Installation Connecting toa The diagram below shows a 1 to many connection from the Magelis XBTN410 Magelis XBT HMI to up to 8 controllers with or without the expansion module HMI Device in 1 to Many Mode Magelis XBTN410 HMI device Magelis connecting cable XBTZ938 T junction boxes VW3 A8 306 TFes Communication cable VW3 A83 06Re Line terminators VW3 A8 306 R LTM R controller Expansion module NOoOohwhND Note For a full list of connection accessories see p 288 Connecting toa You can also connect the controller and the expansio
86. A Receive transmit data N pin A line B Receive transmit data P pin B line DGND Data ground pin VP Power supply pin 34 1639502 12 2006 Introduction Physical Description of the LTM E Expansion Module Overview The expansion module extends the functionality of the LTM R controller by providing voltage monitoring and additional input terminals e 3 phase voltage inputs e 4 additional discrete logic inputs Note Logic inputs are externally powered according to input voltage ratings Expansion module Expansion module connected to an LTM R controller 1639502 12 2006 35 Introduction Expansion The expansion module front face includes the following features Module Front A Face CESCROREDS LV1 LV2 LV3 De Mi ECE ue UES LTMEV40FM eer eet 10 at 1 7 C7 1 8 C8 1 9 C9 1 10 C10 OQOOO00 000 HMI or PC RJ45 Port Status indicating LEDs ORON Plug in terminal voltage inlputs Plug in terminal logic inputs and common Port with RJ45 connector to LTM R controller HMI Device PC This RJ45 port is used to connect the expansion module to the following devices
87. Be sure that config all external CTs face the same direction errors all load CT wiring passes through windows in the same direction After the check is complete 1 Perform a fault reset 2 Ifthe fault persists cycle power and wait 30 s 3 If the fault still persists replace the LTM R controller Current Voltage phase reversal error Phase configuration error Check e L1 L2 and L3 wiring connection to be sure wires are not crossed e Motor Phases Sequence parameter setting ABC versus ACB After all checks are complete 1 Perform a fault reset 2 If the fault persists cycle power and wait 30 s 3 If the fault persists replace the LTM R controller PTC connection error Check for e short circuit or open circuit in the motor temp sensor wiring wrong type of motor temp sensing device improper configuration of parameters for selected device After all checks are complete 1 Perform a fault reset 2 If the fault persists cycle power and wait 30 s 3 If the fault persists replace the LTM R controller Voltage phase loss error Check for improper wiring such as loose terminations e blown fuse e cut wire single phase motor configured for 3 phase operation failure to wire a single phase motor through both A and C load CT windows e failure of power source for example utility power failure After all checks are complete 1 Perform fault reset 2 If the fault persists
88. CT secondary 1 65535 1 Motor Parameter Settings Motor configurable parameters for the LTM R controller and the expansion module include Parameter Setting Range Factory Default Motor operating mode Overload 2 wire Overload 3 wire Independent 2 wire Independent 3 wire Reverser 2 wire Reverser 3 wire Two Step 2 wire Two Step 3 wire Two Speed 2 wire Two Speed 3 wire Custom Independent 3 wire Control direct transition On Off Off Motor transition timeout 999 9 s 0 1s Motor step 1 to 2 timeout o Sep Se wee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 999 9 s 5s Motor step 1 to 2 threshold 20 800 FLC in 1 increments 150 Motor nominal power 0 1 999 9 kW in increments of 0 1 kW 7 5kW Motor nominal voltage 110 690 V 400 V Motor phases 3 phase motor 1 phase motor 3 phase motor 48 1639502 12 2006 Introduction Parameter Setting Range Factory Default Motor phases sequence A B C A C B A B C Motor auxiliary fan cooled Yes No No Motor temp sensor type None PTC Binary PTC Analog NTC Analog None Network Port The LTM R controller uses the network port to communicate with the Profibus Parameter master network controller This port s configurable parameters include Settings Parameter Setting Range F
89. Load Current and the Motor High Speed Full Load Current parameters respectively OC1 and OC2 settings can be set directly in Amperes in the Settings menu of an HMI or in the Settings branch of PowerSuite software 3 Thermal Overload Definite Time D Time is set by the Long Start Fault Timeout parameter 1639502 12 2006 119 Motor Protection Functions Protection functions Parameters Setting range Factory setting Inverse thermal Motor trip class 5 30 in increments of 5 5 Fault threshold e FLC1 Motor full load current ratio or e FLC2 Motor high speed full load current ratio 5 100 of FLCmax in 1 increments 5 FLCmax Warning threshold 10 100 of thermal capacity in 1 increments 85 of thermal capacity Fault reset timeout 1 0 9999 s in 1 s increments 480s Fault reset threshold 35 95 of thermal capacity 75 of thermal capacity Definite time OC1 or OC22 5 100 of FLCmax 5 FLCmax in 1 increments Delay time D Time 1 200 s in increments of 1 s 10s Overcurrent 1 300 s in increments of 1 s 10s timeout O Time set via the Thermal Overload Fault Definite Timeout parameter Current phase imbalance Fault enable Enable Disable Enable Fault timeout starting 0 2 20 s in 0 1 s increments 0 7 s Fault timeout running 0 2 20 s in 0 1 s increments 5s Fault threshold 10 70 of
90. Long start Jam Current phase imbalance Current phase loss Overcurrent Undercurrent Internal ground current X X X X X X X X X X X X X x XxX x Xx x Xx External ground current X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XxX X XxX XxX X XxX x Xx Xx X the functionality is available with the units indicated the functionality is not available with the units indicated 1639502 12 2006 27 Introduction loss Protection Monitored Fault LTM R LTM R controller with Category controller expansion module Voltage Overvoltage x Undervoltage x Voltage phase imbalance X Power Underpower x Overpower x Under power factor x Over power factor x Communication PLC to LTM R X X xX LTM E to LTM R X the functionality is available with the units indicated the functionality is not available with the units indicated 28 1639502 12 2006 Introduction Protection Functions The following table lists the equipment required to support the protection functions of the motor management system Functions LTM R controller LTM R controller with expansion module Thermal overload Current phase imbalance Current phase loss Current phase reversal Long start Jam locked rotor during run Undercurrent Over
91. M yo Y y Transition timer gt 4 gt 4 4 gt Normal operation with stop command Normal operation without stop command Forward run command ignored transition timer active Forward run command ignored stop command active kOoOnND Parameters Reverser operating mode has the following parameters Parameters Setting range Factory setting Motor transition timeout 0 999 9s 0 1s Control direct transition On Off Off 1639502 12 2006 241 Motor Control Functions Two Step Operating Mode Description Functional Characteristics Use Two Step operating mode in reduced voltage starting motor applications such as e Wye Delta e Open Transition Primary Resistor e Open Transition Autotransformer Note For Wye Delta applications calculate the Motor Full Load Current setting as follows MotorRatedCurrent 3 Motor Full Load Current This function includes the following features Accessible in 3 control modes Local Terminal Strip Local HMI and Network e Two Step operation settings include e AMotor Step 1 To 2 Timeout that starts when current reaches 10 of FLC min e A Motor Step 1 To 2 Threshold setting e A Motor Transition Timeout setting that starts upon the earlier of the following events expiration of the Motor Step 1 To 2 Timeout or current falling below the Motor Step 1 To 2 Threshold e Firmware interlocking prevents simult
92. Motor Temp Sensor Fault e 1 counting statistic e Motor Temp Sensor Faults Count Motor temperature sensor warning qa 0 gt 0s1 gt Motor temperature sensor warning PTC Analog Motor temperature sensor fault o gt 0 gt 0s2 Motor temperature sensor fault PTC Analog Temperature sensing element resistance s1 Motor temperature sensor warning threshold 0s2 Motor temperature sensor fault threshold 168 1639502 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Parameter Settings Function Characteristics Example The PTC analog motor temperature sensor function has the following configurable parameter settings Parameters Setting range Factory setting Fault threshold 20 6500 Q in 0 1 Q increments 200 Q Warning threshold 20 6500 Q in 0 1 Q increments 200 Q The PTC analog motor temperature sensor function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Hysteresis 95 of Warning threshold and Fault threshold Tripping time 0 5 0 6 s Trip time accuracy 0 1 s The following diagram describes a Motor temperature sensor PTC analog fault with automatic reset and an active Run command 0 ry Run state Fault condition Run state resume Os2 SS E ee a gt a gt 1 s2 Fault threshold 0s3 Fault re closing threshold 95 of fault threshold 1639502 12 2006 169
93. Note p 478 461 Word Warning register 1 bits 0 1 Not significant bit 2 Ground current warning bit 3 Thermal overload warning bit 4 Not significant bit 5 Jam warning bit 6 Current phase imbalance warning bit 7 Undercurrent warning bits 8 9 Not significant bit 10 HMI port warning bit 11 Controller internal temperature warning bit 12 Internal port warning bits 13 14 Not significant bit 15 Network port warning 462 Word Warning register 2 bit O Not significant bit 1 Diagnostic warning bit 2 Reserved bit 3 Overcurrent warning bit 4 Current phase loss warning bit 5 Current phase reversal warning bit 6 Motor temperature sensor warning bit 7 Voltage phase imbalance warning bit 8 Voltage phase loss warning bit 9 Voltage phase reversal warning bit 10 Undervoltage warning bit 11 Overvoltage warning bit 12 Underpower warning bit 13 Overpower warning bit 14 Under power factor warning bit 15 Over power factor warning o 3 oa 463 464 Not significant 465 Ulnt Thermal capacity level trip level 466 Ulnt Average current ratio FLC 502 1639502 12 2006 Use Register Variable
94. PB from the Available masters list Press the Add gt gt button and confirm with OK Insert a slave click Insert Slave or select ial 456 1639502 12 2006 Use Step Action In the Insert Slave window select TeSys T from the Available slaves list Press the Add gt gt button and confirm with OK The following view appears Master0 Station address 0 FMS DP Master CIF60 PB Slave1 Station address DP Slave Select Slavel and double click to open the Slave Configuration e Set Station address e g to 35 e Change the default Description e g to MotorStarter 17 e Select the correct module from the list MMC L PKU 4 i MMC L PKW EV40 Note See Modules as Presented in the GS File p 455 Go on with steps 7 to 10 if a Remote R configuration mode has been selected Click the Parameter Data button to open the Parameter Data window Click the Module button to open the corresponding Parameter Data window and set the parameter values 1639502 12 2006 457 Use Save and Export the Network Configuration Step Action 9 Double click one of the available parameters e g the Fallback strategy An additional selection table opens allowing you to change the parameter value E3 Description Index Parameter Data OK Byte Descript
95. a separate file Note If you opened the file containing the factory default configuration settings you cannot make and save changes to this file Instead you must use the Save As command to save your changes under another file name By default the configuration software stores saved files in a folder named Configurations This folder is located on your hard drive in the same place the configuration software was installed To designate a different default file storage folder Step Action 1 In the Settings menu select Preferences The Preferences dialog opens 2 In the Preferences dialog open the Configuration tab 3 In the Configuration tab type in the folder name and path for saving configuration files 4 Click OK to close the Preferences dialog and save your changes 1639502 12 2006 437 Use File Transfer After you have edited a configuration file you can transfer the file to the LTM R PC to Device controller Before the configuration software can make this transfer the following conditions must exist e atleast one setting in the configuration file must be different than the same setting in the LTM R controller i e the software only overwrites settings with different values e current must be less than 10 of FLC i e online current must not be detected Note When you transfer a configuration file from the PC to the LTM R controller the software checks to confir
96. a single fault time delay Both the fault and warning thresholds are defined as a percentage of the Motor Nominal Voltage Vnom parameter setting The overvoltage function is available in ready state and run state when the LTM R controller is connected to an expansion module Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled The function applies to both single phase and 3 phase motors The overvoltage function includes the following features e 2 thresholds e Warning Threshold e Fault Threshold e 1 fault time delay e Fault Timeout e 2 function outputs e Overvoltage Warning e Overvoltage Fault e 1 counting statistic e Overvoltage Faults Count 1639502 12 2006 187 Motor Protection Functions Block Diagram Overvoltage warning and fault Vi r V2 V3 Vmax Parameter Settings Function Characteristics Ready state p _ Run state gt amp OR m Vmax gt VsI P 9 AND Vmax gt Vs2 amp j 0 Ready state gt Run state AND OR V1 L1 L2 voltage V2 L2 L3 voltage V3 L3 L1 voltage Vs1 Warning threshold Vs2 Fault threshold T Fault timeout Overvoltage warning 1 Overvoltage fault The overvoltage function has the following parameters Parameters Setting range Factory setting Fault enable Enable Disable Disable Fault timeout 0 2
97. a thermally sensitive resistor whose resistance increases as its temperature falls and whose resistance decreases as its temperature rises Type of RTD 578 1639502 12 2006 Glossary P PLC programmable logic controller power factor Also called cosine phi or power factor represents the absolute value of the ratio of active power to apparent power in AC power systems as follows Power Factor sietive Power Apparent Power Profibus An open bus system that uses an electrical network based on a shielded 2 wire line or an optical network based on a fiber optic cable PTC positive temperature coefficient Characteristic of a thermistor a thermally sensitive resistor whose resistance increases as its temperature rises and whose resistance decreases as its temperature falls PTC analog Type of RTD PTC binary Type of RTD R reset time Time between a sudden change in the monitored quantity e g current and the switching of the output relay rms root mean square A method of calculating average AC current and average AC voltage Because AC current and AC voltage are bi directional the arithmetic average of AC current or voltage always equals 0 The calculations for rms current and rms voltage are _ Imax Vrms Vmax Irms B B 1639502 12 2006 579 Glossary RTD resistance temperature detector A thermistor thermal resistor sensor used to measure the temperature of the motor Re
98. aPLC via the remote communication link This section contains the following topics Topic Page Motor Starts 108 Motor Starts Per Hour 108 Load Sheddings Counter 108 Last Start Max Current 109 Last Start Time 109 Motor Operating Time 110 Maximum Internal Controller Temperature 110 1639502 12 2006 107 Metering and Monitoring Functions Motor Starts Description The LTM R controller tracks motor starts and records the data as a statistic that can be retrieved for operational analysis The following statistics are tracked e Motor Starts Count e Motor LO1 Starts Count logic output O 1 starts e Motor LO2 Starts Count logic output O 2 starts The Clear Statistics Command resets the Motor Starts Count parameter to 0 Note The Motor LO1 Starts Count and Motor LO2 Starts Count parameters cannot be reset to 0 because these parameters together indicate the usage of the relay outputs usage over time Motor Starts Per Hour Description Characteristics The LTM R controller tracks the number of motor starts during the past hour and records this figure in the Motor Starts Per Hour Count parameter The LTM R controller sums starts in 5 minute intervals with an accuracy of 1 interval 0 5 minutes which means that the parameter will contain the total number of starts within either the previous 60 minutes or the previous 55 minutes This function is use
99. and downwards for the bottom clips 1639502 12 2006 279 Installation Step Action 2 Position the controller and expansion module on the clips so that the holes in the clips and the holes in the controller and expansion module align Insert the screws in the holes and turn them slightly 3 When the controller and expansion module are properly positioned tighten first the bottom screws then the top screws using a screwdriver Torque to 1 Nem 8 8 Ib in mm in 280 1639502 12 2006 Installation Operating You can mount the controller and the expansion module at an angle of up to 90 Position degrees perpendicular to the normal vertical mounting plane 90 13 14_23 4_33 34 n SSSSOG 1639502 12 2006 281 Installation Assembling the LTM R Controller and the Expansion Module At a Glance Once you have mounted the LTM R controller and the expansion module if required you must assemble the different parts of the system This section describes how to connect the controller with the expansion module as well as how to replace the standard terminal strips with alternative terminal strips Replacing the The standard terminal strips of the controller and expansion module can be replaced Terminal Strips with alternative terminal strips if required With alternative terminal strips wires are connected perpe
100. be used to wire the terminals Cable Type No of Conductors Conductor section mm2 AWG Flexible stranded cable Single conductor 0 2 2 5 24 14 Two conductors 0 2 1 5 24 16 Solid cable Single conductor 0 2 2 5 24 14 Two conductors 0 2 1 0 24 18 Flexible stranded cable with Single conductor 0 25 2 5 24 14 insulated cable ends Two conductors 0 5 1 5 20 16 Flexible stranded cable with Single conductor 0 25 2 5 24 14 non insulated cable ends Two conductors 0 2 1 0 24 18 The following table describes connector details Connectors 3 and 6 pins Pitch 5 08 mm 0 2 in Tightening torque 0 5 to 0 6 Nem 5 Ib in Flat screwdriver 3 mm 0 10 in 290 1639502 12 2006 Installation Wiring Diagram The following diagram shows the connections between the power supply and the I Os Example in the terminal block when the controller is in three wire independent mode 30 1639502 12 2006 291 Installation The following diagram shows connections when the controller is in single phase independent mode Iw L N For more application diagrams see p 533 292 1639502 12 2006 Installation Wiring Current Transformers CTs Overview The LTM R controller has 3 CT windows through wh
101. by the secondary of an external ground fault current transformer Use the Ground Current Mode parameter to select either internal or external ground fault protection Only one of these ground current mode settings can be activated at a time This function applies to both single phase and 3 phase motors The ground current protection function has the following configurable parameter settings which apply to both internal and external ground current protection Parameters Setting range Factory setting Ground current mode Internal Internal e External Fault enable Enable Disable Enable Warning enable Enable Disable Enable 158 1639502 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Internal Ground Current Description The internal ground current function is enabled when the Ground Current Mode parameter is set to Internal When Ground Current Mode is set to External the internal ground current function is disabled A DANGER IMPROPER FAULT DETECTION Internal ground current function will not protect people from harm caused by ground current Ground fault thresholds must be set to protect the motor and related equipment Ground fault settings must conform to national and local safety regulations and codes Failure to follow this instruction will result in death or serious injury The internal ground current function sums the current readings from the secondary of the internal curren
102. cycle power and wait 30 s 3 If the fault persists replace the LTM R controller 1639502 12 2006 525 Maintenance Preventive Maintenance Overview The following protective measures should be performed between major system checks to help maintain your system and protect it against irrecoverable hardware or software failure e continuously review operating statistics e save LTM R controller parameter configuration settings to a backup file e maintain the LTM R controller s operating environment e periodically perform a LTM R controller self test e check the LTM R controller internal clock to ensure accuracy Statistics The LTM R controller collects the following types of information e real time voltage current power temperature I O and fault data e acount of the number of faults by fault type that occurred since last power up e atime stamped history of the state of the LTM R controller displaying measures of voltage current power and temperature at the moment that each of the previous 5 faults occurred Use either PowerSuite software ora Magelis XBTN410 HMI to access and review these statistics Analyze this information to determine whether the actual record of operations indicates a problem Configuration In the event of irrecoverable LTM R controller failure you can quickly restore Settings configuration settings if you saved these settings to a file When the LTMR controller is f
103. following table lists the parameters associated with the Two Speed operating mode Parameters Setting range Factory setting Motor transition timeout 0 999 9 s 100 ms high speed to low speed Control direct transition On Off Off Note The low speed to high speed timer is fixed at 100 ms 252 1639502 12 2006 Motor Control Functions Custom Operating Mode Overview Program files Transferring files Custom operating mode can be implemented only by using the custom logic editor in PowerSuite software To select Custom operating mode start in the configuration software s tree control Navigate to the Settings gt Motor gt Motor Operating Mode page and select Custom as the Operating Mode This sets the Motor Custom Operating Mode parameter Every LTM R controller program consists of two files e aconfiguration file that contains parameter configuration settings e a logic file that contains a series of logic commands that manage LTM R controller behavior including e motor start and stop commands e motor transitions between steps speeds and directions e the valid control source and transitions between control sources e fault and warning logic for relay outputs 1 and 2 and the HMI e terminal strip reset functions e PLC and HMI communication loss and fallback e load shed e rapid cycle e starting and stopping LTM R controller diagnostics When a predefined operating mode is selec
104. min at 110 Vac to 3 mA min at 220 Vac At state 0 Voltage 5 V maximum OV lt V lt 40V Current 15 mA maximum 15 mA maximum Response time Change to state 1 15 ms 25 ms Change to state 0 5 ms 25 ms IEC 1131 1 conformity Type 1 Type 1 Type of Input Resistive Capacitive Logic Outputs Characteristics The controller logic outputs O 1 to O 4 are internally powered by the control voltage of the controller Controller logic outputs have the following characteristics Rated insulation voltage 300 V AC rated thermal load 250 Vac 5A DC rated thermal load 30 Vdc 5A AC 15 rating 480 VA 500000 operations le max 2A DC 13 rating 30 W 500000 operations le max 1 25 A Associated fuse protection gGat4A Maximum operating rate 1800 cycles hr Maximum frequency 2 Hz 2 cycles s Response time closing lt 10 ms Response time opening lt 10 ms Contact rating B300 40 1639502 12 2006 Introduction Altitude Derating The following table provides the deratings to apply for dielectric strengths and maximum operating temperature according to altitude Corrective factors for altitude 2000 m 3000 m 3500 m 4000 m 4500 m 6561 68 ft 9842 52 ft 11482 94 ft 13123 36 ft 14763 78 ft Dielectric Strength Ui 1 0 93 0 87 0 8 0 7 Max Operating Temperature 1 0 93 0 92 0 9 0 88 1639502 12 2006 41 Introd
105. motor speed that can be set to a range of values Contrast with discrete The product of current and voltage apparent power consists of both active power and reactive power It is measured in volt amperes and often expressed in kilovolt amperes kVA or megavolt amperes MVA Its calculation is Apparent Power Avg RMS Current x Avg RMS Voltage 1639502 12 2006 575 Glossary Cc CANopen An open industry standard protocol used on the internal communication bus The protocol allows the connection of any standard CANopen device to the island bus CT current transformer D definite time A variety of TCC or TVC where the initial magnitude of the trip time delay remains a constant and does not vary in response to changes in the value of the measured quantity e g current Contrast with inverse thermal device In the broadest terms any electronic unit that can be added to a network More DeviceNet DIN DIN rail discrete specifically a programmable electronic unit e g PLC numeric controller or robot or I O card DeviceNet is a low level connection based network protocol that is based on CAN a serial bus system without a defined application layer DeviceNet therefore defines a layer for the industrial application of CAN Deutsches Institut fur Normung The European organization that organizes the creation and maintenance of dimensional and engineering standards A steel mounting rail mad
106. of 1 page for each active fault Each page contains the e fault name e address of the LTM R controller experiencing the fault e total number of unresolved faults A typical fault display page looks like this eo 2 THERMAL OVERLOAD Motor Starter 1 lt fault display page number total number of active faults fault name flashing address of LTM R controller experiencing the fault flashing kOoONnD If more than 1 fault is active use the S and keypad buttons to move back and forth through the fault display pages Because some fault messages contain more than 4 lines of text you may need to use the and P keypad buttons to scroll up and down within a fault display page and display the entire fault message The 1 to many HMI automatically opens the fault display whenever a fault occurs When you remove the cause of a specific fault and execute a fault reset command that fault no longer appears in the fault display You can also close the fault display by clicking the keypad button This does not fix the underlying cause of any fault nor it does not clear any fault You can re open the fault display at any time by navigating to the Home page scrolling to the Faults command line then clicking the keypad button If you open the fault display when no faults are active the HMI displays the message No Faults Present For more information about navigating the men
107. on these arrows to display additional pages kOoONnD 440 1639502 12 2006 Use Steps Navigating the configuration software interface is a simple 2 step process Step Description 1 In the tree control on the left side of the interface navigate to an end branch if necessary click on a node to open that branch then e select the branch you want The selected branch is marked by a green shaded arrow The main window displays information related to the selected branch In the main window on the right side of the interface e if necessary for some multi tabbed pages click on the lt or gt arrow to navigate through the page tabs then select a tab or e if necessary use the scroll bars at the top or bottom of the page to view the desired information 1639502 12 2006 441 Use Configuring Parameters Overview Selecting a File Use PowerSuite software to configure parameter settings remotely in your PC then transfer the edited parameter settings to the LTM R controller The configuration software uses the edited parameter settings to overwrite the parameter settings in the LTM R controller only when the following conditions are met e atleast one transferred parameter setting is different from the same setting in the LTM R controller and e measured current is less than 10 of FLC Configurable parameters can be found in the e Settings bran
108. only a single character within a field and edit that character as follows Lock Outs Addr 1 RpdCycl Time 0002Sec Starts PerHr 002 Dy Lock Outs Addr 1 RpdCycl Time 0002Sec Starts PerHr Boz Dy Lock Outs Addr 1 RpdCycl Time 0002Sec Starts PerHr pe Lock Outs Addr 1 PS RpdCycl Time 0002Sec Starts PerHr 102 re Value List In a few cases a setting presents a list of value selections Selecting a value from Settings the list is very much like incrementing or decrementing the entire value of a numerical setting as shown below Auto Group 1 Number Resets Reset Time 0050 Auto Group 2 Auto Group 1 Number Resets ee Reset Time 0050 a Auto Group 2 Ga Auto Group 1 J Number Resets 4 Reset Time 0050 Auto Group 2 408 1639502 12 2006 Use Executing a Value Write Command 1 to many Overview The Magelis XBTN410 HMI in 1 to many configuration provides executable value write commands A value write command immediately executes a task The value write command line is identified by either a e v at the left end of a command line or e v gt at the right end of a command line If a value write command is unsuccessful the HMI displays an error message If the value write command is successful no message is displayed Value write commands include Value write command Task Location Clear Settings Clears settings and restores de
109. s saved setting 4 When you have displayed the desired value press the Trip Class SS button to save the setting The changes to a indicating the selected value is now this parameter s 10 saved setting After displaying the new setting for 2 seconds the HMI automatically returns to the previous higher level screen Th Overload Trip Class 1639502 12 2006 363 Use Editing Numerical Values The following example describes changing the Long Start Fault Timeout setting from its default value of 10 seconds to a new setting of 25 seconds Step Description Screen display 1 Navigate to the Long Start Fault Timeout parameter Long Start Fault Time 2 R Press the button to step into the Long Start Fault Fault Time Timeout setting The sign indicates the displayed value is the saved setting 010 Sec 3 Press the E button again to select the first left Fault Time most digit for editing Because 0 is the desired value for the first digit this digit will not be edited 0 Sec 4 Press the Ero button again to select the second digit Fault Time for editing 01 Sec 5 Press the O button once to increment the second Fault Time digit to the value 2 02 Sec 6 Press the G button to select the third digit for editing Fault Time 020 Sec 7 Press the D button 5 times to increment t
110. set to 1 and e Motor Low Speed Command is set to 1 logic output O 1 is enabled e Motor Low Speed Command is set to 0 logic output O 2 is enabled e Logic input 1 3 is not used in the control circuit but can be configured to set a bit in memory e Logic outputs 0 1 and O 2 deactivate and the motor stops when control voltage becomes too low e Logic outputs 0 1 O 2 and O 4 deactivate and the motor stops in response to a diagnostic error Note See Control Wiring and Fault Management p 229 for information about the interaction between e the LTM R controller s predefined control logic and e the control wiring an example of which appears in the following diagrams 248 1639502 12 2006 Motor Control Functions Two Speed The following wiring diagram represents a simplified example of the LTM R controller Dahlander in a two speed Dahlander consequent pole local control 3 wire impulse application Application Diagram Low High Speed Speed Stop E e E 1 A Dahlander application requires two sets of wires passing through the CT windows The LTM R controller can also be placed upstream of the contactors If this is the case and if the Dahlander motor is used in variable torque mode all the wires downstream of the contactors must be the same size 2 The N C interlock contacts KM1 and KM2 are not mandatory because the LTM R controller f
111. status memory address name unit of measure value as edited in the configuration software local value default value value as stored in the LTM R controller device value minimum value maximum value status 1639502 12 2006 439 Use Navigation Overview To navigate the configuration software interface use the features of the tree control and main window identified below PowerSuite Default File Edit Services Link Settings Tools View Help SPHASD S sR FF Telemecanir e i 5 Tesys T Current Settings Device Information Ed Current Phase Imbalance Current Phase Loss i Current Phase Reverse B Ground Current Flam Under Current 4 gt l f Settings fS General lotor O E Current f Power f Load Shedding f Diagnostics gt Lock Outs f Communication f5 HMI Display Fault Enable Statistics Monitoring Fault Time start Seconds Parameters Logic Functions Fault Time Run i Seconds Fault Level i Warn Enable Warning level i PowerSuite Connected Expand or contract branch on tree control Green shaded arrow indicates the selected tree control branch Main window displays the contents of the selected tree control branch Tabs indicate this main window selection includes multiple pages Click on a tab to display its contents 5 Left and right arrows indicate additional tabbed pages Click
112. the LTM R controller is connected to an expansion module the it also monitors voltage and power parameters The LTM R controller uses these parameters in protection functions to detect fault and warning conditions The LTM R controller s response to fault and warning conditions is fixed for the predefined operating modes Logic output O 4 activates on a fault and logic output O 3 activates on a warning For more information about pre defined operating modes see p 222 You can configure these motor protection functions to detect the existence of undesirable operating conditions that if not resolved can cause motor and equipment damage All motor protection functions include fault detection and most protection functions also include warning detection In addition to using the protection functions and parameters included in a pre defined operating mode you can use the Custom Logic Editor in PowerSuite software to create a new customized operating mode To create a custom operating mode select any pre defined operating mode then edit its code to meet the needs of your application Using the Custom Logic Editor you can create a customized operating mode by e modifying the LTM R controller s responses to protection faults or warnings e creating new functions based on either pre defined or newly created parameters A fault is a serious undesirable operating condition Fault related parameters can be configured for most protecti
113. the calculated imbalance 10 Warning enable Enable Disable Disable Warning threshold a calculated imbalance of 10 70 10 Current phase loss Fault enable Enable Disable Enable Timeout 0 1 30 s in 0 1 s increments 3s Warning enable Enable Disable Enable Current phase reversal Fault enable Enable Disable Disable Phase sequence e A B C A B C e A C B 1 Thermal Overload Inverse Thermal Fault Reset Timeout is set by the Auto Reset Group 1 Timeout parameter OC1 and OC2 are set via the Motor Full Load Current and the Motor High Speed Full Load Current parameters respectively OC1 and OC2 settings can be set directly in Amperes in the Settings menu of an HMI or in the Settings branch of PowerSuite software 3 Thermal Overload Definite Time D Time is set by the Long Start Fault Timeout parameter 120 1639502 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Protection functions Parameters Setting range Factory setting Long start locked rotor at Fault enable Enable Disable Enable start Fault timeout 1 200 s in 1 s increments 10s Fault threshold 100 800 of FLC 100 of FLC in 10 increments Jam locked rotor during run Fault enable Enable Disable Enable Fault timeout 1 30 s in 1 s increments 5s Fault threshold 100 800 of FLC in 1 increments 200 of FLC Warning enable Enable Disable Disable Warning threshold 100 800 of FLC in 1 increments 200 of FLC
114. the load shedding condition when voltage rises above a configurable load shedding restart threshold and remains above the threshold for the duration of a configurable load shedding restart timer When the LTM R controller clears the load shedding condition e in 2 wire maintained configuration it issues a Run command to re start the motor e in 3 wire impulse configuration it does not automatically re start the motor If your application includes another device that externally provides voltage load shedding the LTM R controller s load shedding function should not be enabled All load shedding thresholds and timers can be adjusted when the LTM R controller is in its normal operating state When a load shedding timer is counting at the time it is adjusted the new duration time does not become effective until the timer expires This function is available only when your application includes an LTM E expansion module 190 1639502 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Functional Characteristics Parameter Settings Function Characteristics The voltage load shedding function includes the following features e 2 thresholds e Load Shedding Threshold e Load Shedding Restart Threshold e 2 time delays e Load Shedding Timeout e Load Shedding Restart Timeout e 1 status flag e Load Shedding e 1 counting statistic e Load Sheddings Count In addition the voltage load shedding function e disables logic output
115. warning threshold 559 Word Ground current fault configuration B bit 0 Ground current mode bits 1 15 Reserved 1639502 12 2006 505 Use Register Variable type Read Write variables Note p 478 560 Ulnt Ground CT primary 561 Ulnt Ground CT secondary 562 Ulnt External ground current fault timeout 563 Ulnt External ground current fault threshold 564 Ulnt External ground current warning threshold 565 Ulnt Motor nominal voltage 1 566 Ulnt Voltage phase imbalance fault timeout starting 1 567 Ulnt Voltage phase imbalance fault timeout running 1 568 Ulnt Voltage phase imbalance fault threshold 1 569 Ulnt Voltage phase imbalance warning threshold 1 570 Ulnt Overvoltage fault timeout 1 571 Ulnt Overvoltage fault threshold 1 572 Ulnt Overvoltage warning threshold 1 573 Ulnt Undervoltage fault timeout 1 574 Ulnt Undervoltage fault threshold 1 575 Ulnt Undervoltage warning threshold 1 576 Ulnt Voltage phase loss fault timeout 1 577 Word Voltage load shedding configuration 1 bit O Load shedding enable bits 1 15 Reserved 578 Ulnt Load shedding timeout 1 579 Ulnt Load shedding threshold 1 580 Ulnt Load shedding restart timeout 1 581 Ulnt Load shedding restart threshold 1 582 Reserved 583 Ulnt Motor nominal power 1 584 Ulnt Overpower fault timeout 1 585 Ulnt Overpower fault threshold 1 586 Ulnt Overpower warning threshold 1 58
116. 0 377 491 n 1 378 492 n 2 379 493 n 3 380 494 n 4 381 495 average voltage 81 93 n 0 377 426 491 n 1 378 427 492 n 2 379 493 n 3 380 494 n 4 381 495 bumpless transfer mode 46 212 369 419 bus cables length 312 C clear all command 444 command clear all 96 321 329 366 387 515 1639502 12 2006 581 Index clear controller settings 387 415 450 515 clear network port settings 387 450 515 clear statistics 88 387 415 450 515 clear thermal capacity level 132 261 370 387 450 515 fault reset 414 515 logic outputs register 515 motor low speed 248 515 motor run forward 234 238 242 248 515 motor run reverse 238 242 248 515 self test 387 515 527 statistics 96 commissioning first power up 321 introduction 316 PowerSuite software 331 required information 319 required parameters 323 sys config menu 1 to 1 329 verify configuration 339 verify wiring 335 communications link 445 config via HMI engineering tool enable 46 50 317 374 507 HMI keypad enable 46 50 317 374 507 HMI network port enable 46 317 network port enable 49 374 507 configurable settings 126 configuration file 253 creating 436 manage 436 saving 437 transfer 437 438 configuration software configuration functions 444 installation 433 power up 436 QuickWatch window 447 configuration via SyCon 456 connect PC to LTM R controller 445 connecting th
117. 0 overcurrent 510 overpower 510 overvoltage 510 register 1 509 register 2 510 test 509 thermal overload 509 under power factor 510 undercurrent 509 underpower 510 undervoltage 510 voltage phase imbalance 510 voltage phase loss 510 voltage phase reversal 510 wiring 510 fault management 254 584 1639502 12 2006 Index introduction 255 fault power cycle requested 500 fault reset authorized 499 auto reset active 500 fault reset mode 46 369 414 419 automatic 260 507 manual 258 507 remote 266 507 thermal overload 507 fault statistics 87 characteristics 64 history 93 faults count 89 90 375 490 auto reset 489 controller internal 376 489 current phase imbalance 375 489 current phase loss 375 490 diagnostic 376 490 ground current 375 489 HMI port 376 489 internal port 376 489 jam 375 489 long start 375 489 motor temperature sensor 375 490 network port 376 489 network port config 376 489 network port internal 376 489 over power factor 376 490 overcurrent 375 490 overpower 376 490 overvoltage 376 490 thermal overload 375 489 under power factor 376 490 undercurrent 375 489 underpower 376 490 undervoltage 376 490 voltage phase imbalance 375 490 voltage phase loss 376 490 wiring 490 features Profibus DP 452 file transfer device to PC 437 PC to device 438 first power up 321 FLC 218 248 FLC settings 327 FLC1
118. 0 programming 347 Magelis XBTN410 1 to 1 352 editing values 362 fault and warning display 360 392 HMI display 383 keypad control 395 LCD 355 main menu 367 menu structure 366 navigating the menu structure 361 physical description 353 scrolling variable list 358 services 382 387 settings 368 statistics 375 SysConfig menu 329 Magelis XBTN410 1 to many 397 command lines 403 editing values 406 fault management 430 home page 412 keypad 400 LCD 401 menu structure level 2 413 menu structure overview 411 monitoring 429 motor starter page 416 navigating the menu structure 404 physical description 399 product ID page 428 remote reset page 414 reset to defaults page 415 service commands 431 settings page 418 starters currents page 413 starters status page 413 statistics page 425 value write command 409 XBTN reference page 415 Magelis XBT L1000 programming software install 348 maintenance 521 detecting problems 522 troubleshooting 523 measurement functions characteristics 63 metering and monitoring functions 59 metering functions customized 62 HMI tools 62 minimum wait time 498 modules in the GS file 455 motor 1 phase 507 3 phase 507 588 1639502 12 2006 Index auxiliary fan cooled 46 49 119 130 135 330 369 370 507 average current ratio 499 custom operating mode 253 full load current ratio 93 120 135 140 248 370 420 512 full loa
119. 0 1 A FLCmin Minimum Full Load Current The smallest amount of motor current the LTM R controller will support This value is determined by the LTM R controller model as follows LTM R controller model FLCmin LTMRO8 0 40A LTMR27 1 35A LTMR100 5 00A 1639502 12 2006 577 Glossary hysteresis A value added to lower limit threshold settings or subtracted from upper limit threshold settings that retards the response of the LTM R controller before it stops measuring the duration of faults and warnings inverse thermal A variety of TCC where the initial magnitude of the trip time delay is generated by a thermal model of the motor and varies in response to changes in the value of the measured quantity e g current Contrast with definite time M Modbus Modbus is the name of the master slave client server serial communications protocol developed by Modicon now Schneider Automation Inc in 1979 which has since become a standard network protocol for industrial automation N nominal power nominal voltage NTC NTC analog Motor Nominal Power Parameter for the power a motor will produce at rated voltage and rated current Setting range 0 1 999 9 kW in increments of 0 1 kW Default setting 7 5 kW Motor Nominal Voltage Parameter for rated voltage Setting range 200 690 V Default setting 480 V negative temperature coefficient Characteristic of a thermistor
120. 0 15 Not significant 457 Word Logic inputs status bit O Logic input 1 bit 1 Logic input 2 bit 2 Logic input 3 bit 3 Logic input 4 bit 4 Logic input 5 bit 5 Logic input 6 bit 6 Logic input 7 bit 7 Logic input 8 bit 8 Logic input 9 bit 9 Logic input 10 bit 10 Logic input 11 bit 11 Logic input 12 bit 12 Logic input 13 bit 13 Logic input 14 bit 14 Logic input 15 bit 15 Logic input 16 4a 3 3 3a a a a 500 1639502 12 2006 Use Register Variable type Read only variables Note p 478 458 Word Logic outputs status bit O Logic output 1 bit 1 Logic output 2 bit 2 Logic output 3 bit 3 Logic output 4 bit 4 Logic output 5 bit 5 Logic output 6 bit 6 Logic output 7 bit 7 Logic output 8 a 4 a bits 8 15 Reserved 459 Word I O status bit O Input 1 bit 1 Input 2 bit 2 Input 3 bit 3 Input 4 bit 4 Input 5 bit 5 Input 6 bit 6 Input 7 bit 7 Input 8 bit 8 Input 9 bit 9 Input 10 bit 10 Input 11 bit 11 Input 12 bit 12 Output 1 13 14 bit 13 Output 2 23 24 bit 14 Output 3 33 34 bit 15 Output 4 95 96 97 98 460 Ulnt Warning code 1639502 12 2006 501 Use Register Variable type Read only variables
121. 0 5s Ground current fault threshold 2A Ground current warning enable Enable Ground current warning threshold 1A Undervoltage fault enable Enable Undervoltage fault threshold 85 of Vnom Undervoltage fault timeout 3s Undervoltage warning enable Enable Undervoltage warning threshold 90 of Vnom 56 1639502 12 2006 Application Example Enter Parameter Settings Use the PowerSuite software to e open a configuration file with factory default settings e edit the settings of the required parameters listed above e save a copy of the completed configuration settings to a new configuration file Saving a copy of your configuration settings provides you with a record of your configuration and helps you identify your configuration settings in case you ever need to re download them to the LTM R controller To create a configuration file follow these steps Step Description 1 Start up the PowerSuite software 2 In the Load Configuration screen select Default and click Ok This loads the default factory settings into your configuration software Open the Settings branch of the tree control In the Motor sub branch locate and set the Operating parameter settings In the Current sub branch locate and set the Protection parameter settings In the File menu select Save as The Save As window opens NI OO on BI O In the Save As window type in a new fi
122. 00 to 999 Custom Logic variables 1200 to 1399 Table Structure Communication variables are listed in 4 column tables Column 1 Column 2 Register in decimal format Variable type see p 479 Column 3 Variable name and access via Read only or Read Write Modbus requests Column 4 Note code for additional information 1639502 12 2006 477 Use Note Unused Addresses The Note column gives a code for additional information Variables without a code are available for all hardware configurations and without functional restrictions The code can be e numerical 1 to 9 for specific hardware combinations e alphabetical A to Z for specific system behaviors If the note is Then the variable is available for 1 the LTM R LTM EV40 combination 2 9 future combinations If the note is Then A the variable can be written only when the motor is off B the variable can be written only in configuration mode Cc the variable can be written only with no fault D Z the variable is available for future exceptions Unused addresses fall into 3 categories e Not significant in Read only tables means that you should ignore the value read whether equal to 0 or not e Reserved in Read Write tables means that you must write 0 in these variables e Forbidden means that read or write requests are rejected that these addresses
123. 000 cee eee eee e eee 207 Control Modes and Operating States 0 0 0 0 eee eee 209 Control Modes eree iaa belts ae Ply es ana oe dlele barks ek bs Bonk 210 Operating States a e eb AS eb ee Ea el es 214 Slat Cycles esi te etre EE wikis Rielly eee eee Gey Reel ae Ee we oe wae 218 Operating M d Si rriena rd Pi BAR eee ay BO OE ee ee Fads 222 Control PrinGiples se25 ee o n Sates SA ox eh wae RAG es a ois he 223 5 3 Chapter 6 6 1 6 2 Chapter 7 Predefined Operating Modes 0 0 cece tte 225 Control Wiring and Fault Management 0 000 eee eee 229 Overload Operating Mode 2 cette 231 Independent Operating Mode 0 0 cece eect ene 234 Reverser Operating Mode 0 0 cece tte 238 Two Step Operating Mode 0 000 cece ee tee eae 242 Two Speed Operating Mode 0 cee ees 248 Custom Operating Mode 0 2 0 cette eae 253 Fault Management 0 000 tte eee 254 Fault Management Introduction 0 0 0 0 cee eee 255 Manual Reset 2 iss ene noes eevee eds eee eee be Ree ee ee E 258 Automatic Reset ieran eera wee Se ae ea ee a es Pate le eae 260 Remote Reset uate ga Nees Sweat eve Pepa d ep ty Aon EEE eD OADE 266 Fault and Warning Codes 0 0 eect tenes 268 lnistall tion sist ia anna whe ahaa arn a ence areca aoe a a aa 271 introductions siise ele ee Bee ec he ite be halt te See ee ad ad 271 LTM R Controller and Expansion
124. 0s Threshold 68 115 of Motor nominal voltage 70 Restart timeout 1 9999 s 10s in increments of 0 1 minutes Restart threshold 68 115 of Motor nominal voltage 90 1639502 12 2006 123 Motor Protection Functions PowerProtection When connected to an expansion module the LTM R controller provides the Functions additional power protection functions listed below All of the following functions can be enabled or disabled Protection functions Parameters Setting range Factory setting Underpower Fault enable Enable Disable Disable Fault Timeout 1 100 sin1sincrements 60 s Fault threshold 20 800 of Motor nominal 20 of Motor nominal power in 1 increments power Warning enable Enable Disable Disable Warning threshold 20 800 of Motor nominal 20 of Motor nominal power in 1 increments power Overpower Fault enable Enable Disable Disable Fault timeout 1 100 s in 1 s increments 60s Fault threshold 20 800 of Motor nominal power in 1 increments 150 of Motor nominal power Warning enable Enable Disable Disable Warning threshold 20 800 of Motor nominal 150 of Motor nominal power in 1 increments power Under power factor Fault enable Enable Disable Disable Fault timeout 1 25 s in 0 1 s increments 10 s Fault threshold 0 1 in 0 01 increments 0 60 Warning enable Enable Disable Disable Warning threshold
125. 1 X No Active power 5 X No Reactive power 5 X No Power factor 3 for cos 0 6 X No Active power consumption 5 x Yes Reactive power 5 X Yes N A Not applicable X the functionality is available with the units indicated the functionality is not available with the units indicated 1 Note The accuracy levels presented in this table are typical accuracy levels Actual accuracy levels may be lower or greater than these values 1639502 12 2006 63 Metering and Monitoring Functions Fault and Warning Counters Characteristics The fault and warning counting functions have the following characteristics Statistics LTM R controller LTM R controller with Value saved on expansion module power loss All Faults counter X X Yes All Warnings counter X x Yes Auto Resets counter X X Yes Protection Fault counters X X Yes Control Command Diagnostic Fault counter X X Yes Wiring Error counters X X Yes Communication Loss Faults counter X X Yes Internal Faults counter X X Yes Fault history X X Yes X the functionality is available with the units indicated the functionality is not available with the units indicated System and Device Monitoring Faults Characteristics The system and device monitoring faults have the following characteristics Diagnostic faults LTM R controller LTM R controller with Value save
126. 10 Stops the motor Local Stop command Resets the LTM R controller and clears all faults that can be reset Local Reset command Note Behavior of the Reset key depends on Fault Reset Mode configuration see p 255 354 1639502 12 2006 Use LCD Display 1 to 1 Overview In a 1 to 1 configuration the Magelis XBTN410 presents two different LCD displays LCD mode Displays Description Configuration mode SysConfig menu Contains basic configuration settings required for commissioning Opens at first power up Main menu Contains optional settings read only statistics read only LTM R controller information and service commands Opens on power up if SysConfig menu settings have been entered and saved and no fault is active Presentation mode HMI display Contains a scrolling list of dynamically changing values for pre selected variables Faults and warnings Contains a description of the most recently occurring fault or warning The LCD displays the SysConfig menu until its basic configuration settings have been entered and saved as part of the commissioning process When the SysConfig menu settings have been entered and saved the LTMR controller clears the Controller System Config Required parameter Thereafter the LCD can present any of the other displays After the SysConfig settings have been entered and saved
127. 146 UDInt Reactive power consumption kVARh 1 147 149 Ulnt Not significant 490 1639502 12 2006 Use Last Fault n 0 The last fault statistics are completed by variables at addresses 300 to 319 Statistics Register Variable type Read only variables Note p 478 150 Ulnt Fault code n 0 151 Ulnt Motor full load current ratio n 0 FLC max 152 Ulnt Thermal capacity level n 0 trip level 153 Ulnt Average current ratio n 0 FLC 154 Ulnt L1 current ratio n 0 FLC 155 Ulnt L2 current ratio n 0 FLC 156 Ulnt L3 current ratio n 0 FLC 157 Ulnt Ground current ratio n 0 FLC min 158 Ulnt Full load current max n 0 x 0 1 A 159 Ulnt Current phase imbalance n 0 160 Ulnt Frequency n 0 x 0 1 Hz 161 Ulnt Motor temperature sensor n 0 162 165 Word 4 Date and time n 0 See DT_DateTime p 482 166 Ulnt Average voltage n 0 V 1 167 Ulnt L3 L1 voltage n 0 V 1 168 Ulnt L1 L2 voltage n 0 V 1 169 Ulnt L2 L3 voltage n 0 V 1 170 Ulnt Voltage phase imbalance n 0 1 171 Ulnt Active power n 0 1 172 Ulnt Power factor n 0 x 0 01 1 173 179 Not significant 1639502 12 2006 491 Use N 1 Fault The n 1 fault statistics are completed by variables at addresses 330 to 339 Statistics Register Variable type Read only variables Note p
128. 1639502 v1 0 TeSys T LTM R Profibus Motor Management Controller User s Manual 12 2006 a brand of ie Telemecanique www telemecanique com Table of Contents Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 3 1 3 2 Safety Information 2 00 e eee eee eee 11 Ab ut the BOOK 2 taht rari nra tere See n 13 Introducing the TeSys T Motor Management System 15 Presentation of the TeSys T Motor Management System 16 System Selection Guide 00 00 cece eee 24 Physical Description of the LTM R Motor Management Controller with Profibus Protocole oci ecng esr ated ies Beene Sats AA Aiea Pend ea eee eke 31 Physical Description of the LTM E Expansion Module 35 Technical Specifications of the LTM R Controller 004 38 Technical Specifications of the Expansion Module 000 42 Configurable Parameters 00000 0 cece eee 45 Application Example 200 c eee eee ee eee eee 51 PULPOSC se ane fe ech One e a a e deans fea wee id aa EU foe eae 52 LTM R Controller Wiring 00000 ccc te tee 54 Configuring Parameters 00000 c cece cette eee 55 Metering and Monitoring Functions 0005 59 Summary of Characteristics 0 0 cece 61 OVENIEW Ss eens She wd GA i he oe i oe ee ee Pes 61 Accessing Metering Functions and Parameter Data 0 4 62 Measurement 220 2 pu bd ba
129. 248 FLC2 248 FLCmax 327 FLCmin 327 frequency 78 93 503 n 0 377 426 491 n 1 378 427 492 n 2 379 493 n 3 380 494 n 4 381 495 full load current max 93 487 n 0 491 n 1 492 n 2 493 n 3 494 n 4 495 full load current settings 327 G general configuration register 1 507 register 2 507 general purpose registers for logic functions 517 ground CT primary 48 70 162 330 506 secondary 48 70 162 330 506 ground current 70 158 fault after starting 371 fault configuration 505 fault enable 121 158 371 421 faults count 90 375 mode 48 70 121 158 159 162 330 371 421 505 n 0 377 496 n 1 378 496 n 2 379 496 n 3 380 497 n 4 381 497 ratio 48 70 417 warning after starting 371 warning enable 121 158 371 421 1639502 12 2006 585 Index ground current ratio 93 n 0 377 426 491 n 1 378 427 492 n 2 379 493 n 3 380 494 n 4 381 495 GS file modules 455 H hardware configuration 342 LTM R controller alone 343 HMI display contract setting 508 keypad password 387 language setting 330 368 383 motor temp sensor enable 384 HMI display active power enable 384 513 average current enable 384 512 average current ratio enable 384 513 average voltage enable 384 513 contrast setting 383 current phase imbalance enable 384 512 date enable 383 513 definite overcurrent enable 383 definite overcurrent ratio enable 512 frequ
130. 3 At a Glance Overview The LTM R controller provides current sensing metering and monitoring in support of the current temperature and ground fault protection functions When connected to an expansion module the LTM R controller also provides voltage and power sensing functions Metering and monitoring can be categorized as follows Measurements real time or calculated measurements of current voltage or power provided by analog inputs Statistics protection diagnostic motor control and historical fault and warning counts stored by the LTM R controller for analysis of system performance and maintenance System and device faults faults affecting the LTM R controller s ability to operate properly internal check communications wiring and configuration errors Motor statistics historical data describing motor starts and operating time for analysis of device operation Thermal overload display data displaying estimates of the time until the next thermal overload fault and after a thermal overload fault has occurred the time to reset System operating status including the motor state on ready run fault warning and the time for auto reset of faults 1639502 12 2006 59 Metering and Monitoring Functions What s in this This chapter contains the following sections Chapter Section Topic Page 3 1 Summary of Characteristics 61 3 2 Measurements 67 3 3 Fault and W
131. 410 HMI automatically displays information about a fault or warning including LTM R controller self diagnostic faults and warnings when it occurs For information about the display of faults and warnings when the HMI is used in a 1 to 1 configuration see p 392 For information about the display of faults and warnings when the HMI is used in a 1 to many configuration see p 430 PowerSuite software displays a visual array of active faults and warnings including LTM R controller self diagnostic faults and warnings when these faults occur For information about this display of active faults and warnings see p 448 522 1639502 12 2006 Maintenance Troubleshooting The LTM R controller performs self diagnostic tests at power up and during operation These tests the errors they detect and the steps to take in response to a problem are described below Type Error Action Major Internal temperature fault This fault indicates a warning at 80 C a minor fault at 85 C and a major internal fault at 100 C Take steps to reduce ambient temperature including faults add an auxiliary cooling fan remount the LTM R controller and expansion module to provide more surrounding free space If the condition persists 1 Cycle power 2 Wait 30s 3 If the fault persists replace the LTM R controller CPU failure These faults indicate a hardware failure Take the following st
132. 42 48 110 115 AC 380 400 415 440 500 127 220 230 240 660 1000 60 45 AC 24 42 48 110 115 127 220 230 240 265 277 380 415 460 480 660 1000 5 DC 24 48 110 125 220 230 250 440 460 LC1F185 50 55 AC 24 42 48 110 115 AC 380 400 415 440 500 127 220 230 240 660 1000 60 55 AC 24 42 48 110 115 127 220 230 240 265 277 380 415 460 480 660 1000 5 DC 24 48 110 125 220 230 250 440 460 LC1F225 50 55 AC 24 42 48 110 115 AC 380 400 415 440 500 127 220 230 240 660 1000 60 55 AC 24 42 48 110 115 AC 265 277 380 415 127 220 230 240 460 480 660 1000 5 DC 24 48 110 125 220 230 250 440 460 1639502 12 2006 303 Installation TeSys F catalog Control Circuit VA or W Coil voltages references Frequency maintained max interposing relay not interposing relay required Hz required LC1F265 10 AC 24 42 48 110 115 AC 277 380 415 480 500 127 220 230 240 600 660 1000 5 DC 24 DC 48 110 125 220 230 250 440 460 LC1F330 10 AC 24 42 48 110 115 AC 277 380 415 480 500 127 220 230 240 600 660 1000 5 DC 24 DC 48 110 125 220 230 250 440 460 LC1F400 15 AC 48 110 120 125 AC 265 277 380 400 127 200 208 220 230 415 480 500 550 600 1000 230 240 8 DC 48 110 125 220 250 40 400 440 LC1F500 18 AC
133. 48 110 120 127 200 208 220 230 230 240 265 277 380 400 415 480 500 550 600 1000 8 DC 48 110 125 220 250 440 LC1F630 22 AC 48 110 120 125 AC 265 277 380 400 127 200 208 220 240 415 480 500 550 600 1000 73 DC 48 110 125 220 250 440 LC1F780 50 AC 110 120 127 200 208 AC 265 277 380 415 480 220 240 500 52 DC 110 125 220 250 440 LC1F800 15 AC 110 127 220 240 AC 380 440 25 DC 110 127 220 240 380 440 Dual parallel contactors of this size require an interposing relay Control circuit frequency may be 40 400Hz but power to contactors monitored by CTs must be 50Hz or 60Hz in frequency 304 1639502 12 2006 Installation NEMA Type S Catalog references and characteristics for NEMA Type S contactors are listed in the table Contactors below Coil voltages are grouped according to whether an interposing relay is required NEMA size VA maintained Control Circuit Coil voltages max Frequency interposing relay not required interposing relay required Hz 00 33 00 0 1 27 2 37 24 115 120 208 220 240 277 380 440 480 550 600 38 ae 50 60 4 23 115 120 208 220 240 277 380 440 480 550 600 5 15 115 120 208 220 240 277 380 440 480 6 59 115 120 208 220 240 277 380 440 480 550 600 7 Dual parallel contactors of this size require an interposing relay The mini
134. 502 12 2006 Commissioning At a Glance Overview This chapter provides an overview for commissioning the LTM R controller and the expansion module What s in this This chapter contains the following topics Chapter Topic Page Introduction 316 Required Information 319 First Power up 321 Required Parameters 323 FLC Full Load Current Settings 327 Commissioning Using Magelis XBTN410 1 to 1 329 Commissioning Using PowerSuite Software 331 Profibus DP Commissioning and Communication Checking 332 Verifying System Wiring 335 Verify Configuration 339 1639502 12 2006 315 Commissioning Introduction Introduction Commissioning must be performed after the physical installation of the LTM R controller expansion module and other hardware devices The commissioning process includes e initialization of the installed devices and e configuration of the LTM R controller parameters that are required for operation of the LTM R controller expansion module and other system hardware The person performing commissioning must be familiar with the system hardware and how it will be installed and used in the application Hardware devices can include motor voltage transformers external load current transformers ground current transformers communication network The product specifications for these devices provide the required parameter information You need to un
135. 56 4 Lockout Time Input 0 5 Indication to a remote host controller that the RUN Auto Mode FORWARD RUN REVERSE and STOP commands will or will not be accepted 0 LOCAL CONTROL 1 AUTO MODE Input 0 6 A fault condition exists System Fault 455 2 Input 0 7 A warning condition exists System Warning 455 3 Input 1 4 Ready System Ready 455 0 Input 1 5 Motor ramping Motor Starting 455 15 Input 1 6 Motor running Motor Running 455 7 Input 1 7 Tripped System tripped 455 4 Input 2 3 IAV average current FLA Average Current Ratio 466 Input 4 Boolean inputs status Boolean Inputs 9 16 of expansion high byte module 457 8 15 Input 5 Boolean inputs status Boolean Inputs 1 6 of LTM R controller low byte inputs 7 8 of expansion module 457 0 7 1639502 12 2006 461 Use Position Description Input 6 Boolean outputs status Reserved high byte 458 8 9 458 10 15 are not significant Input 7 Boolean outputs status Status of boolean outputs 13 23 33 low byte and 95 458 0 3 458 4 7 are not significant Input 8 System status register 2 456 8 Network port comm loss 456 9 Motor lockout 456 10 15 Reserved high byte 456 8 15 Input 9 456 0 Fault auto reset active System status register 2 low byte 456 1 Reserved 456 0 7 456 2 Fault power cycle requested 456 3 Motor restart time undefined 456 4 Rapid cycle lockout 456 5 Load
136. 6 Use DT_ExtOperating Mode If date is September 4 2008 at 7 a m 50 minutes and 32 seconds Register 15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0 655 2 0 0 8 656 0 9 0 4 657 0 7 5 0 658 3 2 0 0 With data entry format DT 2008 09 04 07 50 32 DT_ExtOperatingMode format is an enumeration of motor operating modes Value Description 2 2 wire overload 3 3 wire overload 4 2 wire independant 5 3 wire independant 6 2 wire reverser 7 3 wire reverser 8 2 wire 2 step 9 3 wire 2 step 10 2 wire 2 speed 11 3 wire 2 speed 258 Custom 2 wire overload 259 Custom 3 wire overload 260 Custom 2 wire independant 261 Custom 3 wire independant 262 Custom 2 wire reverser 263 Custom 3 wire reverser 264 Custom 2 wire 2 step 265 Custom 3 wire 2 step 266 Custom 2 wire 2 speed 267 Custom 3 wire 2 speed 1639502 12 2006 483 Use DT_FaultCode DT_FaultCode format is an enumeration of fault codes Fault code Description 0 No error 3 Ground current 4 Thermal overload 5 Long start 6 Jam 7 Current phase imbalance 8 Undercurrent 10 Test 11 HMI port error 12 HMI port communication loss 13 Network port internal error 18 Diagnostic 19 Wiring 20 Overcurrent 21 Current phase loss 22 Current phase reversal 23 Motor temp sensor 24 Vol
137. 7 22 Register 461 461 8 15 23 Register 461 461 0 461 7 24 Register 462 462 8 462 15 25 Register 462 462 0 462 7 26 Reserved 27 28 Register 451 451 8 451 15 Monitoring of faults 29 Register 451 451 0 451 7 30 Register 452 452 8 452 15 31 Register 452 452 0 452 7 32 Register 453 453 8 453 15 33 Register 453 453 0 453 7 34 Reserved 35 Note For descriptions of registers see the Communication Variables tables introduced in Modbus Register Map Organization of Communication Variables p 477 466 1639502 12 2006 Use PKW Encapsulated Acyclic Accesses in DP VO Overview Some Profibus masters do not provide DP V1 services The PKW Periodically Kept in acyclic Words feature is implemented to allow acyclic read or write accesses to be encapsulated in DP VO This feature is enabled in the Profibus DP configuration tool by selecting the appropriate module For each module a second entry with PKW exists The PKW data is added to the cyclic data Module without Modules in the following table are without PKW PKW IN OUT o aA oO NI gt Olo INI OD oO A wo nN gt 1639502 12 2006 467 Use Module with PKW Read Write Registers Modules in the following table are with PKW IN OUT lw NM gt 09 5
138. 7 Ulnt Underpower fault timeout 1 588 Ulnt Underpower fault threshold 1 589 Ulnt Underpower warning threshold 1 590 Ulnt Under power factor fault timeout 1 591 Ulnt Under power factor fault threshold 1 506 1639502 12 2006 Use Register Variable type Read Write variables Note p 478 592 Ulnt Under power factor warning threshold 1 593 Ulnt Over power factor fault timeout 594 Ulnt Over power factor fault threshold 595 Ulnt Over power factor warning threshold 1 1 1 596 599 Reserved 600 Ulnt HMI keypad password 601 Word General configuration register 1 bit O Controller system config required 0 exit the configuration menu 1 go to the configuration menu bits 1 7 Reserved Control mode configuration bits 8 10 one bit is set to 1 bit 8 Config via HMI keypad enable bit 9 Config via HMI engineering tool enable bit 10 Config via network port enable bit 11 Not significant bit 12 Motor phases sequence O ABC 1 ACB bits 13 14 Motor phases 1 3 phase default 2 1 phase bit 15 Motor auxiliary fan cooled default 0 602 Word General configuration register 2 bits 0 2 Fault reset mode 1 Manual default 2 Remote or control unit keypad 4 Automatic bit 3 HMI port parity setting 0 none default 1 even bits 4 8 Reserved bit 9 HMI
139. 8 Ulnt Full load current max n 2 x 0 1 A 219 Ulnt Current phase imbalance n 2 220 Ulnt Frequency n 2 x 0 1 Hz 221 Ulnt Motor temperature sensor n 2 222 225 Word 4 Date and time n 2 See DT_DateTime p 482 226 Ulnt Average voltage n 2 V 1 227 Ulnt L3 L1 voltage n 2 V 1 228 Ulnt L1 L2 voltage n 2 V 1 229 Ulnt L2 L3 voltage n 2 V 1 230 Ulnt Voltage phase imbalance n 2 1 231 Ulnt Active power n 2 1 232 Ulnt Power factor n 2 x 0 01 1 233 239 Not significant 1639502 12 2006 493 Use N 3 Fault The n 3 fault statistics are completed by variables at addresses 390 to 399 Statistics Register Variable type Read only variables Note p 478 240 Ulnt Fault code n 3 241 Ulnt Motor full load current ratio n 3 FLC max 242 Ulnt Thermal capacity level n 3 trip level 243 Ulnt Average current ratio n 3 FLC 244 Ulnt L1 current ratio n 3 FLC 245 Ulnt L2 current ratio n 3 FLC 246 Ulnt L3 current ratio n 3 FLC 247 Ulnt Ground current ratio n 3 FLC min 248 Ulnt Full load current max n 3 0 1 A 249 Ulnt Current phase imbalance n 3 250 Ulnt Frequency n 3 x 0 1 Hz 251 Ulnt Motor temperature sensor n 3 252 255 Word 4 Date and time n 3 See DT_DateTime p 482 256 Ulnt Average voltage n 3 V 1 257 Ulnt L3 L1 voltage n 3 V 1 258 Ulnt L1 L2 voltage n 3 V 1 259 Ulnt L2 L3 volta
140. 8 XXX Opens the Motor Starter page for the selected controller 1 8 Starters currents Opens the Starters Currents page Remote reset Opens the Remote Reset page Home Viviviviviviv Returns to the Home page 1639502 12 2006 413 Use Faults Display The Magelis XBTN410 HMI displays active faults in a series of pages 1 fault to a page when e a fault occurs and the display of active faults automatically opens e you select Faults in the Home page and manually open the display of active faults For information about fault management including the faults display pages see p 430 Remote Reset Use the Remote Reset page to remotely execute a Fault Reset Command for a Page faulted LTM R controller for controllers with Fault Reset Mode set to Remote and to navigate to other pages Level 2 Description REMOTE RESET lt 4 01FLT023 067FLT50 gt Executes a Fault Reset Command for 4 02FLT034 078FLT60 gt the selected LTM R controller 1 8 if remote fault reset is enabled for that lt 4 03FLT045 089FLT70 gt controller lt 4 04FLT056 o90FLT80 gt Starters currents Opens the Starters Currents page Starters status p gt Opens the Starters Status page Home Returns to the Home page Each of the first 4 lines of this page provide the following fault reset information at the indicated locations left right 401 FLT 023 067 FLT 50 g
141. 9502 12 2006 Use Fault n 4 records information in the following parameters Level 3 Level 4 Parameter name reference Fault n 4 Fault Code Fault Code n 4 Date Date And Time n 4 Time FLC Ratio Motor Full Load Current Ratio n 4 FLC Max Motor Full Load Current Max n 4 Avg Current Average Current n 4 L1 Current L1 Current n 4 L2 Current L2 Current n 4 L3 Current L3 Current n 4 Gr Current Ground Current n 4 AvgCurrRatio Average Current Ratio n 4 L1CurrRatio L1 Current Ratio n 4 L2CurrRatio L2 Current Ratio n 4 L3CurrRatio L3 Current Ratio n 4 GrCurrRatio Ground Current Ratio n 4 Curr Ph Imb Current Phase Imbalance n 4 Th Capacity Thermal Capacity Level n 4 Avg Volts Average Voltage n 4 L3 L1 Volts L3 L1 Voltage n 4 L1 L2 Volts L1 L2 Voltage n 4 L2 L3 Volts L2 L3 Voltage n 4 Volt Ph Imb Voltage Phase Imbalance n 4 Frequency Frequency n 4 Active Power Active Power n 4 Power Factor Power Factor n 4 Temp Sensor Motor Temp Sensor n 4 1639502 12 2006 381 Use Main Menu Product ID 1 to 1 Product ID Menu The Product ID sub menu is the fourth selection in Level 2 of the Main menu The Product ID menu contains information about the LTM R controller expansion module and network communications module in the following Level 3 sub menus e LTM R controller e Expansion module e Network
142. A1 A211 C 12 13 C 14 15 C 16 7 e 98 96 d nd O eE LTMR100PBD PROFIBUS ae Tyres 3 8 ezg i l SS Test Reset Or No NO No PY P olia 14 23 24 33 34 g Z1 Z2 T1 T2 S A BDGND VPH HFOOOOOObYFOOOOC IOOCOO Of The LTM R controller and expansion module dO O O O OF JOOCOOOOOOCOOOCFIOOOCOP Lv1 Lv2 LV3 At A211 C i2 i3 C 14 15 le 497 98 95 96 d NO nc QELEM LT evs0ep EEEE LTMR100PBD FROR pa A ETE 1 PP PEE 3 F gga 5 n OR mn GAS aa GAS era AOA era m Power 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 10 Test 7 Reset ONO NO NO FH F 17 C7 18 C8 1 9 C9 1 10 C10 glis 14 23 24 33 34f gizi z2 T1 T2 s_ A _BDGND VP OOOOOOOA O00000 400000000 Of 344 1639502 12 2006 Use LTM R Controller Use the 5 LEDs on the face of the LTM R controller to monitor its state as follows LEDs LED Color Describes Indicates HMI Comm yellow Communication activity between e On communication LTM R controller and expansion e Off no communication module Power green LTM R controller power or internal fault Solid green power on no intern
143. AL_2BYTES_INF_TOOHIGH written value not in the range of the register MSB value is too high 13 FGP_ERR_VAL_2BYTES_INF_TOOLOW written value not in the range of the register MSB value is too low 16 FGP_ERR_VAL_INVALID written value not a valid value 20 FGP_ERR_BAD_ANSWER external request sends back an error frame Case of a read error Error Code Error Name Explanation 1 FGP_ERR_REQ_STACK_FULL external request sends back an error frame 3 FGP_ERR_REGISTER_NOT_FOUND register not managed or the request needs super user access rights FGP_ERR_ANSWER_DELAYED external request answer postponed 7 FGP_ERR_NOT_ALL_REGISTER_FOUND one or both registers cannot be found 1639502 12 2006 471 Use Acyclic Data Read Write via Profibus DP V1 Overview Reading Acyclic Data DS_Read DS_Read Example For Acyclic DP V1 access a mechanism based on slot index and length addressing is implemented in the LTM R controller Note All accessible registers are described in the Communication variable tables They are organized in groups Identification variables Statistics variables and sub groups if necessary Variables are accessed every 10 registers You cannot access registers located between two sub groups If the access is not possible no register is accessed and an error value e g not all registers found will be returned via DP V1 With DS_Read function the Profibus DP master can read data
144. ARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION The application of this product requires expertise in the design and programming of control systems Only persons with such expertise should be allowed to program and apply this product Follow all local and national safety codes and standards Failure to follow this instruction can result in death serious injury or equipment damage 1639502 12 2006 271 Installation What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following sections Section Topic Page 6 1 LTM R Controller and Expansion Module Installation 273 6 2 Wiring the Profibus DP Communication Network 306 272 1639502 12 2006 Installation 6 1 LTM R Controller and Expansion Module Installation Installation Overview Installation This section describes the installation procedures and wiring principles of the LTM R controller and the LTM E expansion module What s in this This section contains the following topics Section Topic Page LTM R Controller and Expansion Module Dimensions 274 Mounting the LTM R Controller and the Expansion Module 277 Assembling the LTM R Controller and the Expansion Module 282 Connecting to an HMI Device 285 Wiring General Principles 289 Wiring Current Transformers CTs 293 Wiring Ground Fault Current Transformers 298 Wiring Temperature Sensors 300 Recommended Contactors 301
145. Addresses 64 to 69 Word 6 Controller Commercial Reference If Controller Commercial Reference LTM R Register MSB LSB 64 L T 65 M space 66 R 67 68 69 1639502 12 2006 481 Use DT_DateTime DT_DateTime format is Word 4 and indicates Date and Time Register 15 12 11 8 7 4 3 Register N Y Y Y Y Register N 1 M M D D Register N 2 H H m m Register N 3 S S 0 0 Where e Y year The format is 4 Binary Coded Decimal BCD digits The value range is 2006 2099 e M month The format is 2 BCD digits The value range is 01 12 e D day The format is 2 BCD digits The value range is 01 31 for months 01 03 05 07 08 10 12 01 30 for months 04 06 09 11 01 29 for month 02 in a leap year 01 28 for month 02 in a non leap year e H hour The format is 2 BCD digits The value range is 00 23 e m minute The format is 2 BCD digits The value range is 00 59 e S second The format is 2 BCD digits The value range is 00 59 e 0 unused Data entry format and value range are Data entry format DT YYYY MM DD HH mm ss Minimum value DT 2006 01 01 00 00 00 January 1 2006 Maximum value DT 2099 12 31 23 59 59 December 31 2099 Note If you give values outside the limits the system will return an error Example Addresses 655 to 658 Word 4 Date and Time setting 482 1639502 12 200
146. BTN410 HMI displays the SysConfig menu the very first time the LTM R controller powers up The SysConfig menu contains parameters that are essential to the operation of the LTM R controller and must be configured during commissioning After the SysConfig menu parameters are configured and saved the HMI closes the SysConfig menu and displays the Main menu The Main menu contains additional parameters with factory default settings that also must be configured as part of the commissioning process 1639502 12 2006 321 Commissioning First Power up in the Magelis XBTN410 First Power up in PowerSuite Software The first time the LTM R controller powers up after leaving the factory the Magelis XBTN410 LCD automatically displays the Sys Config menu Sys Config ENTER lt Press this key to enter the Sys Config menu gt a Sys Config line 1 Language line 2 When the settings of the Sys Config menu are saved the Sys Config menu closes and the LCD displays the Main menu Sys Config End Config ENTER No Saves configuration settings Yes ENTER lt closes the Sys Config menu and opens the Main menu Main menu Settings The Sys Config menu parameters are configured as part of the commissioning process For more information on the Sys Config menu see p 329 The first time the LTM R controller power up after leaving t
147. Boolean value is saved when its value changes 406 1639502 12 2006 Use Numeric Settings Numeric value settings are incremented or decremented and can be edited in 2 ways e by selecting the entire setting and then incrementing or decrementing its value e by selecting individual characters within the setting and then incrementing or decrementing the value of each digit Use the button to select the value to be edited as follows Lock Outs Addr RpdCycl Time 0002Sec Starts PerHr 002 Lock Outs Addr RpdCycl Time 0002Sec 002 o gt Starts PerHr Lock Outs Addr 1 RpdCycl Time 0002Sec Starts PerHr 002 o0 1 The Lock Outs page opens with no setting selected for editing 2 Click the MOD button once to select the first displayed numerical field for editing 3 Click the MOD button a second time to select the next displayed numerical field for editing After a setting is selected for editing you can use the and buttons to increment or decrement the entire value then use the Gk button to save the edit Lock Outs Addr 1 RpdCycl Time 0002Sec Starts PerHr 002 Lock Outs Addr RpdCycl Time 0002Sec Starts PerHr 010 Lock Outs Addr 1 RpdCycl Time 0002Sec Starts PerHr 003 z 2 3 a 1639502 12 2006 407 Use Alternatively after a setting is highlighted you can use the and buttons to select
148. C AU G2 Voltage Undervoltage RB 1 5 AU G2 RB 1 5 AU G2 RB 1 5 NC AU G2 Overvoltage RB 1 5 AU G2 RB 1 5 AU G2 RB 1 5 NC AU G2 Voltage Phase Imbalance RB 1 5 AU G2 RB 1 5 AU G2 RB 1 5 NC AU G2 Power Underpower RB 1 5 AU G3 RB 1 5 AU G3 RB 1 5 NC AU G3 Overpower RB 1 5 AU G3 RB 1 5 AU G3 RB 1 5 NC AU G3 Under Power Factor RB 1 5 AU G2 RB 1 5 AU G2 RB 1 5 NC AU G2 Over Power Factor RB 1 5 AU G2 RB 1 5 AU G2 RB 1 5 NC AU G2 Communication PLC to LTM R RB 1 5 AU G3 RB 1 5 AU G3 RB 1 5 NC AU G3 Loss LTMEtoLTMR RB 1 5 AU G3 RB 1 5 AU G3 RB 1 5 NC AU G3 RB Test Reset button on the LTM R controller front face or the local HMI PC Power cycle on the LTM R controller 1 5 Set 1 5 logic input on the LTM R controller NC network command AU GX Automatic with conditions configured for the protection function group Where GX G1 G2 or G3 G1 Fault AutoGroup 1 has a configurable number of resets 0 manual 1 2 3 4 5 unlimited and setting delay G2 Fault Auto Group 2 has a configurable number of resets 0 manual 1 2 3 4 5 unlimited and setting delay G3 Fault Auto Group 3 has a configurable number of resets 0 manual 1 2 3 4 5 unlimited and setting delay 1639502 12 2006 265 Motor Control Functions Remote Reset Introduction Setting the Fault Reset Mode parameter to Remote adds resetting faults from the PLC over the LTM R network port Th
149. C RB Test Reset button on the LTM R controller front face or the local HMI PC Power cycle on the LTM R controller 1 5 Set 1 5 logic input on the LTM R controller NC Network command 266 1639502 12 2006 Motor Control Functions Protection Monitored fault Control mode Category Local terminal strip Local HMI Network Thermal Definite RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC overload Inverse Thermal RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC Current Long Start RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC Jam RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC Current Phase Imbalance RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC Current Phase Loss RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC Undercurrent RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC Overcurrent RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC External Ground Current RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC Internal Ground Current RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC Voltage Undervoltage RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC Overvoltage RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC Voltage Phase Imbalance RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC Power Underpower RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC Overpower RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC Under Power Factor RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC Over Power Factor RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC Communication PLC to LTM R RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC Loss LTMEtoLTMR RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB Test Rese
150. Cap 7 A Start command is executed and the LCD R display resumes scrolling in Run state FLC 80 Run Current Avg 394 1639502 12 2006 Use HMI Keypad Control 1 to 1 Overview Stop Reset In a 1 to 1 configuration the functionality of the Stop and Reset buttons remain constant whereas the functionality of the HMI keypad Aux1 and Aux2 keys depends on the e selected operating mode and e control wiring Remember that the HMI keypad commands the LTM R controller s logic outputs only when e logic input I 6 is inactive and e Control Local Channel Setting parameter is set to Local HMI The functions of the following keys do not vary according to the operating mode selection in a properly wired configuration Key Function STOP Stops the motor RESET Resets the LTM R controller after a fault 1639502 12 2006 395 Use Aux1 Aux2 The functions of the Aux1 and Aux2 buttons typically are configured as follows Operating mode Aux1 function Aux2 function 2 Speed Run Slow 0 1 Run Fast 0 2 2 Step Run motor 0 1 Set bits in memory Independent Control O 1 Control 0 2 Overload Set bits in memory Set bits in memory Reverser Run Forward 0 1 Run Reverse 0 2 Note The above key function assignments represent a typical configuration However the actual functionality of any function ke
151. Command NtwkSettings Confirm Clear Network Port Settings Command Statistics Confirm Clear Statistics Command Th Cap Level Confirm Clear Thermal Capacity Level Command HMI Password Password Confirm HMI Keypad Password Self Test Use the self test command to perform in sequence a watchdog check and a RAM check For more information on the self test function see p 527 Executing a self test sets the value of the Self Test Command parameter to 1 After the self test finishes the value of this parameter returns to 0 1639502 12 2006 387 Use Go to Sys Config Use the Go to Sys Config sub menu command to e set the Controller System Configuration Required parameter and e re open the Sys Config menu for editing Note The motor must be turned off before you can execute the Go to Sys Config sub menu command When you execute the Sys Config command the LTM R controller returns to its initialized state The Sys Config menu parameters must be configured before the LTM R controller can resume operations For information about the Sys Config menu see p 329 388 1639502 12 2006 Use Clear The Clear commands perform the following tasks Selection Clears All all editable settings and restores their values to the factory default settings e all statistics and resets their values to 0 Settings all editable settings and restores their values to the factory default settings
152. Current OVER CURRENT continued Fault Overcurrent Fault Enable Fault Level Overcurrent Fault Threshold Fault Time Overcurrent Fault Timeout Warn Overcurrent Warning Enable Warn Level Overcurrent Warning Threshold UNDER CURRENT Fault Undercurrent Fault Enable Fault Level Undercurrent Fault Threshold Fault Time Undercurrent Fault Timeout Warn Undercurrent Warning Enable Warn Level Undercurrent Warning Threshold Current Ground Current Fault Ground Current Mode continued GR CT Mode Ground Current Fault Enable IntFitLvl Internal Ground Current Fault Threshold IntFitTime Internal Ground Current Fault Timeout ExtFitLvl External Ground Current Fault Threshold ExtFitTime External Ground Current Fault Timeout Warn Ground Current Warning Enable IntWarnLvl Internal Ground Current Warning Threshold ExtWarnLvl External Ground Current Warning Threshold 1639502 12 2006 421 Use Voltage Settings From the settings page you can navigate to and edit the following voltage settings Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Parameter name Settings Addr 1 8 Voltage Volt Ph Imbal Loss VOLT PH IMBALANCE Fault Voltage Phase Imbalance Fault Enable Fault Level Voltage Phase Imbalance Fault Threshold FitTimeStart Voltage Phase Imbalance Fault Timeout Starting FitTimeRun Voltage Phase Imbalance Fault Timeout Running Warn Voltage Phase Imbalance War
153. Current Ratio Formulas The Ground Current Ratio parameter provides the ground current value as a percentage of FLCmin The ground current value is compared to FLCmin Calculated measurement Formula Ground current ratio 100 x ground current FLCmin 1639502 12 2006 71 Metering and Monitoring Functions Ground Current Ratio Characteristics The ground current ratio function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Unit 0 2000 of FLCmin Accuracy See ground current characteristics above Resolution 0 1 FLCmin Refresh interval 100 ms 72 1639502 12 2006 Metering and Monitoring Functions Average Current Description Average Current Average Current Formulas Average Current Characteristics Average Current Ratio Average Current Ratio Formulas The LTM R controller calculates average current and provides the value for phase in amperes and as a percentage of FLC The average current function returns the rms value of the average current The LTM R controller calculates the average current using the measured line currents The measured values are internally summed using the following formula Calculated measurement Formula Average current three phase motor lavg L1 L2 L3 3 Average current single phase motor lavg L1 L3 2 The average current f
154. FLCmin Yes Start lavg lt 5 FLCmin Start complete 1639502 12 2006 215 Motor Control Functions Protection Monitoring by Operating States The motor operating states and the fault and warning protections provided by the LTM R controller while the motor is in each operating state denoted with an X are described below It can transition to an internal fault condition from any operating state Protection Category Monitored Fault Warning Operating states Sys Config Ready Not Ready Start Run Diagnostic Run Command Check X Stop Command Check X Run Check Back Stop Check Back Wiring configuration errors PTC connection XxX X X Xx CT Reversal Voltage Phase Reversal Current Phase Reversal XxX X XxX Xx x Xx Xx Voltage Phase Loss Phase Configuration Internal faults Minor Major x Xx Thermal resistance Motor temperature sensor PTC Binary PTC Analog NTC Analog xX Xxx Xx Xx X XxX XxX XxX XK Xx Thermal overload Definite Inverse Thermal K XI X Xx Xx Xx Current Long Start x Xx Jam Current Phase Imbalance Current Phase Loss x x lt Overcurrent Undercurrent Ground Fault Internal Ground Fault External x Xx Voltage Overvoltage Level Undervoltag
155. Fault Level Over Power Factor Fault Threshold Fault Time Over Power Factor Fault Timeout Warn Over Power Factor Warning Enable Warn Level Over Power Factor Warning Threshold UNDER POWER FACTOR Fault Under Power Factor Fault Enable Fault Level Under Power Factor Fault Threshold Fault Time Under Power Factor Fault Timeout Warn Under Power Factor Warning Enable Warn Level Under Power Factor Warning Threshold 1639502 12 2006 423 Use Load Shed Rapid Cycle Lock Outs Communication Loss Settings From the settings page you can navigate to and edit the following voltage load shed rapid cycle lockout and communication loss settings Level 4 Level 5 Parameter name Settings Addr 1 8 Load Shed Fault Load Shedding Enable Fault Level Load Shedding Threshold Fault Time Load Shedding Timeout RestartLvl Load Shedding Restart Threshold RestartTimel Load Shedding Restart Timeout LockOuts RpdCycle Time Rapid Cycle Lockout Timeout Comm Loss NET PORT COMM LOSS Fault Network Port Fault Enable HMI PORT COMM LOSS Fault HMI Port Fault Enable 424 1639502 12 2006 Use Statistics 1 to many Overview Statistics The Magelis XBTN410 HMI provides read only statistics pages nested in levels 4 and 5 of the menu structure for a selected LTM R controller To navigate to the statistics page use one of the following paths Level From this pag
156. Function 1 Slot Number Constant value 1 2 Index Register address 10 Common access to registers is every 10 registers The index is always rounded down to an integer 3 Length Length of data blocks in bytes Number of registers x 2 Maximum number of registers 20 40 bytes Any length between 2 and 40 bytes is possible 4 to length 3 Block of data bytes to be written 1639502 12 2006 473 Use DS_Write Example Process Description Example Resetting a fault by setting bit 704 3 to 1 1 Read 700 to 704 Byte Value 0 Function Number Ox5E DS_Read Function 1 Slot Number 1 2 Index 70 700 10 3 Length 10 700 to 704 5 x 2 4to 13 Current values of registers 700 to 704 2 Set bit 3 of register 704 to 1 3 Write the registers 700 to 704 Byte Value 0 Function Number Ox5F DS_Write Function 1 Slot Number 1 2 Index 70 700 10 3 Length 10 700 to 704 5 x 2 4to 13 New values of registers 700 to 704 474 1639502 12 2006 Use Feedback in If the access is not possible no register is accessed and an error value will be Case of Error returned via DP V1 The first 4 bytes of the response on DP in the case of an error are as follows Byte Value Meaning 0 OxDE 0xDF for DS_Read
157. HMI PC Power cycle on the LTM R controller 1 5 Set 1 5 logic input on the LTM R controller 1 Remote network reset commands are not allowed even when the LTM R controller is configured for network control mode 258 1639502 12 2006 Motor Control Functions Protection Category Monitored fault Control mode Local terminal strip Local HMI Network 1 Internal Stack Overflow PC PC PC Watchdog PC PC PC ROM Checksum PC PC PC EEROM PC PC PC CPU PC PC PC Internal Temperature PC PC PC Thermal resistance PTC Binary RB 1 5 RB I 5 RB 1 5 motor temp sensor PTC Analog RB 1 5 RB 1 5 RB 1 5 NTC Analog RB 1 5 RB 1 5 RB 1 5 Thermal overload Definite RB 1 5 RB I 5 RB 1 5 Inverse Thermal RB 1 5 RB 1 5 RB 1 5 Current Long Start RB I 5 RB 1 5 RB 1 5 Jam RB 1 5 RB 1 5 RB 1 5 Current Phase Imbalance RB 1 5 RB I 5 RB 1 5 Current Phase Loss RB 1 5 RB 1 5 RB 1 5 Undercurrent RB I 5 RB I 5 RB 1 5 Overcurrent RB I 5 RB I 5 RB 1 5 External Ground Current RB 1 5 RB I 5 RB 1 5 Internal Ground Current RB I 5 RB I 5 RB 1 5 Voltage Undervoltage RB 1 5 RB 1 5 RB 1 5 Overvoltage RB 1 5 RB 1 5 RB 1 5 Voltage Phase Imbalance RB 1 5 RB 1 5 RB 1 5 Power Underpower RB 1 5 RB I 5 RB 1 5 Overpower RB 1 5 RB I 5 RB 1 5 Under Power Factor RB I 5 RB 1 5 RB 1 5 Over Power Factor RB I 5 RB
158. HMI Keypad Control 1 to 1 00 ete 395 Using the Magelis XBTN410 HMI 1 to many 0 00004 397 Physical Description 1 to many 0 0 0 0 aaaea 399 Command Lines 1 to many 0 0 0 0 0 cece ete ee 403 Navigating the Menu Structure 1 to many 0 00 0 eee eee eee 404 Editing Values 1 to many 0 2000 406 Executing a Value Write Command 1 to many 0200 000 409 Menu Structure 1 to many 0 0 0 eee ee 411 Menu Structure Home Page 1 to many 0 00 eee eee eee 412 Menu Structure All LTM R Controllers and the HMI 1 to many 413 Motor Starter Page 1 to many 0 cee eee 416 Settings 1 to many s ecir ie essorer te riist mer p nhad irp tair anes 418 Statistics 1 to many 0 0 0 cea 425 Product ID 1 to many iti aaeei a Sa e pa te PE ye eri 428 Monitoring 1 to many 0 cee tee 429 Fault Management 1 to many 00 0 e eee eee 430 Service Commands 1 to many 0 0 0 0 eee tees 431 Using PowerSuite Software 0 0 eee 432 Software Installation 0 0 0 tte 433 User Interface i gt tie o Bete do ees 25 ai oie hee a tite eee Site lee 434 File Management 2 0 sae e eee ees bene bee bh bees 436 Navigatlonive ss jahe 6 ese ie sels hae a r E brad pce kone a AE E A a raeg 440 8 7 Chapter 9 Configuring Parameters sosterse rrecieve cii eta 442 Configuration Functions Using PowerSuite
159. I Communication On the LTM R controller front face check the following 2 LEDs LEDs 1 Fallback 2 BF Bus Failure The figure shows the LTM R controller front face with both Profibus DP communication LEDs SS JOOS 1 6 97098 95y 96 SSHLISY Al A2 1 1 C 12 13 C LTMROBPBE 2705334 Power Alarm J HMI Comm _ Fallback Q Test Reset O 13844 234 33 24 z1 z2 11 1218 Aa B DGNDVP QOOVVA TO SSSSSS SSI The Communication Fallback is indicated by a red LED 1 If the red Fallback LED is Then Off The LTM R is not in communication fallback mode On The LTM R is in communication fallback mode The Profibus DP communication status marked as BF Bus Failure is indicated by a red LED 2 If the red BF LED is Then Off The communication is OK 332 1639502 12 2006 Commissioning Commissioning Process with Profibus DP Network If the red BF LED is Then On There is no communication because the master is not connected because there is a configuration mismatch or because of another failure Blinking e On 2 5s e Off 0 5s The Profibus DP address is invalid Communication is only possible after entering the correct communication parameters 1 The BF LED switches on 2 Get the internal configuration address
160. Logic Editor in PowerSuite software to create a new custom operating mode To create a custom operating mode select any pre defined operating mode then edit its code to meet the needs of your application Using the Custom Logic Editor you can e access and read the data from pre defined parameters e add pre defined parameters to the custom operating mode e create new calculated parameters derived from pre defined parameters e create new monitoring functions based on pre defined or calculated parameters 62 1639502 12 2006 Metering and Monitoring Functions Measurements Characteristics The measurement functions have the following characteristics consumption Measurements Accuracy LTM R LTM R controller with Value saved controller expansion module on power loss Line currents e 1 for8 Aand 27A units X X No 2 for 100 A units Ground current internal 5 15 for ground current X X No greater than e 0 1 Aon 8A units 0 2 Aon 27 A units e 0 3 Aon 100 A units Ground current external greater of 5 or 0 01 A x x No Average current e 1 for8Aand 27 Aunits X X No 2 for 100 A units Current phase imbalance e 1 5 for 8 A and 27 A units X X No e 3 for 100 A units Thermal capacity level 1 x X No Motor temperature sensor 2 X X No Frequency 2 X No Line to line voltage 1 X No Line voltage imbalance 1 5 X No Average voltage
161. MI e Thermal Overload Fault Reset Confirm that the local HMI can command a manual fault reset when control is set to manual The PLC if the LTM R controller is connected to a network and The following parameter setting using either PowerSuite software or the LCD display of the Magelis XBTN410 HMI Thermal Overload Fault Reset Confirm that the PLC can command the intended start stop and remote reset functions 338 1639502 12 2006 Commissioning Verify Configuration Overview The final step in the commissioning process is to verify that all configurable parameters used in your application are properly configured When performing this task you will need a master list of all the parameters you intended to configure and their desired settings You must compare the actual settings of configured parameters against this list Tools Only PowerSuite software can display all configured parameters including both required and optional parameters These are found in the Settings branch of the tree control The Magelis XBTN410 HMI can display all parameters in its Main menu but cannot display all parameters located only in its Sys Config menu Process Verifying parameter settings is a 3 part process 1 Transfer the configuration file from the LTM R controller to the PowerSuite software running in your PC This lets you view the LTM R controller s present parameter settings For info
162. MI 1 to 1 352 8 5 Using the Magelis XBTN410 HMI 1 to many 397 8 6 Using PowerSuite Software 432 8 7 Using the LTM R Controller Connected to a Profibus DP 451 Communication Network 1639502 12 2006 341 Use 8 1 Introduction Hardware Configurations Overview Communications The LTM R controller either alone or connected to an expansion module can be operated with or without a user interface device In any configuration the controller can be configured to perform monitoring fault management motor protection and control functions All user interface devices require an independent power source User interface devices and their connections include User interface device Connects to Magelis XBTN410 HMI HMI port via the local RJ45 connector on the LTM R controller or expansion module PC running PowerSuite software HMI port via the local RJ45 connector on the LTM R controller or expansion module Network PLC Network port on the LTM R controller via the network RJ45 connector or terminal wiring 342 1639502 12 2006 Use 8 2 Using the LTM R Controller Alone Stand Alone Configuration Overview When operated without a user interface the LTM R controller either alone or connected to an expansion module provides monitoring protection fault management and control functionality ea Magelis XBTN410 HMI e Pow
163. Module Installation 273 Installation Overview 0 0 te eee 273 LTM R Controller and Expansion Module Dimensions 274 Mounting the LTM R Controller and the Expansion Module 277 Assembling the LTM R Controller and the Expansion Module 282 Connecting to an HMI Device 0 0 eee eee 285 Wiring General Principles 00 000000 eee eee 289 Wiring Current Transformers CTS 0 00 c eee ee eee 293 Wiring Ground Fault Current Transformers 0 00 cee eee eee 298 Wiring Temperature Sensors 0 0 0 0 cee eee 300 Recommended Contactors 0 0 cette 301 Wiring the Profibus DP Communication Network 00000 306 Profibus DP Communication Network 0 00 c eee eee eee ee 306 Profibus DP Communication Port Wiring Terminal Characteristics 307 Connection to Profibus DP 0 0 cee ee 310 COMMISSIONING 3 nic eee ne eee ee eee eee det ee bet ebees 315 Introductio re 3s sre Sa Se eA ee ee ee ae a ee a eas 316 Required Information 0 0 0 0 aaaea 319 Fifst POWErUp i564 Seine sacked stare 22 a eyed 4 aa Sule a Guat pl Pd Gal 321 Required Parameters 0 0 0 cect eee eee 323 FLC Full Load Current Settings 0 0 0 0 0 eee eee eee 327 Commissioning Using Magelis XBTN410 1 to 1 00000 329 Commissioning Using PowerSuite Software 0 000 c eee eee 331 Profibu
164. N410 HMI 1 to 1 The parameter is not located in the indicated menu in the Magelis XBTN410 HMI 1 to 1 Ground CT Required parameters include the following ground current settings Parameters Parameter Setting Range Factory Default Sys Config Main Ground CT Ratio e None No Default X e 100 1 e 200 1 5 e 1000 1 e 2000 1 e Other Ratio Ground CT Primary 1 65535 1 x Ground CT Secondary 1 65535 1 x X The parameter is located in the indicated menu in the Magelis XBTN410 HMI 1 to 1 The parameter is not located in the indicated menu in the Magelis XBTN410 HMI 1 to 1 Contactor Compulsory parameters that apply to the specific contactor used in the application Parameters have the following configurable settings Parameter Setting Range Factory Default Sys Config Main Contactor Rating 1 1000 A 810A X X The parameter is located in the indicated menu in the Magelis XBTN410 HMI 1 to 1 The parameter is not located in the indicated menu in the Magelis XBTN410 HMI 1 to 1 326 1639502 12 2006 Commissioning FLC Full Load Current Settings FLC Basics Note Before setting the FLC you must first set the Contactor rating and Load CT ratio Load CT ratio Load CT primary Load CT secondary Passes Current sensor max Current range max Load CT ratio Current range max is determined by the commercial ref
165. O2 starts Operating time Motor starts per hour Last start max current Last start time XxXxX xX Xx x x x x x Thermal Overload Time to trip x x lt Time to reset x x lt System Operating Statistics Motor running On Ready Fault Warning Minimum wait time x XxX Xx x x Xx x Xx x x x x X the functionality is available with the units indicated the functionality is not available with the units indicated 26 1639502 12 2006 Introduction Fault and Warning Monitoring The LTM R controller provides fault monitoring functions When connected to an expansion module the LTM R controller provides additional voltage fault monitoring Protection Category Monitored Fault LTMR controller LTM R controller with expansion module Diagnostic Run command check Stop command check Run check back Stop check back Wiring configuration errors PTC connection CT reversal XxX x x x KY x Voltage phase reversal Current phase reversal x lt Voltage phase loss Phase configuration Internal Stack overflow Watchdog ROM checksum EEROM CPU Internal temperature Motor temp sensor PTC binary PTC analog NTC analog Thermal overload Definite Inverse thermal Current
166. ON The application of this product requires expertise in the design and programming of control systems Only persons with such expertise should be allowed to program install alter and apply this product Follow all local and national safety codes and standards Failure to follow this instruction can result in death serious injury or equipment damage What s in this This section contains the following topics Section Topic Page Control Modes 210 Operating States 214 Start Cycle 218 1639502 12 2006 209 Motor Control Functions Control Modes Overview The control mode determines which control sources command the LTM R controller outputs Control modes include Control Mode LTM R controller outputs are commanded by Local terminal strip Input devices wired to the input terminals on the front face of the LTM R controller Local HMI An HMI device connected to the LTM R controller s Local HMI port Network A network PLC connected to the controller network port Control Mode Control mode is determined by the combination of the Selection e state of logic input 1 6 and e Control Local Channel Setting parameter When logic input I 6 is And Control Local Channel Setting is Control Mode is inactive Local terminal strip Local terminal strip Local HMI Local HMI active Not applicable Network Note Regardless of the selected control mod
167. PowerSuite software 3 Thermal Overload Definite Time D Time is set by the Long Start Fault Timeout parameter 1639502 12 2006 121 Motor Protection Functions Protection functions Parameters Setting range Factory setting Motor temperature sensor Type e None None e PTC Binary e PTC Analog e NTC Analog Fault enable Enable Disable Disable Warning enable Enable Disable Disable PTC binary no configurable parameters PTC NTC analog Fault threshold 20 6500 Q in 0 1 Q increments 200 Q Warning threshold 20 6500 Q in 0 1 Q increments 200 Q Rapid cycle lockout Timeout 0 999 9 s in increments of 0 1 s Os 1 Thermal Overload Inverse Thermal Fault Reset Timeout is set by the Auto Reset Group 1 Timeout parameter 2 OC1 and OC2 are set via the Motor Full Load Current and the Motor High Speed Full Load Current parameters respectively OC1 and OC2 settings can be set directly in Amperes in the Settings menu of an HMI or in the Settings branch of PowerSuite software 3 Thermal Overload Definite Time D Time is set by the Long Start Fault Timeout parameter 122 1639502 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Voltage When connected to an expansion module the LTM R controller provides the Protection additional voltage protection functions listed below All of the following functions can Fun
168. SS OF MOTOR PROTECTION Clearing the thermal capacity level inhibits thermal protection and can cause equipment overheating and fire Continued operation with inhibited thermal protection should be limited to applications where immediate restart is vital Failure to follow this instruction can result in death serious injury or equipment damage 450 1639502 12 2006 Use 8 7 Using the LTM R Controller Connected to a Profibus DP Communication Network Introduction to the Profibus DP Communication Network Overview This section describes how to use the LTM R controller via the network port using Profibus DP protocol What s in this This section contains the following topics Section Topic Page Profibus DP Protocol Principle and Main Features 452 General Information on Implementation via Profibus DP 453 Modules as Presented in the GS File 455 Profibus DP Configuration via the SyCon Configuration Tool 456 Functions of Profibus DP Profiles 459 Diagnostic Telegram for Profibus DP 464 PKW Encapsulated Acyclic Accesses in DP VO 467 Acyclic Data Read Write via Profibus DP V1 472 User Map User Defined Indirect Registers 476 Modbus Register Map Organization of Communication Variables 477 Profibus DP V1 Addresses 478 Data Formats 479 Data Types 480 Identification Variables 487 Statistics Variables 488 Monitoring Variables 498 Configuration Var
169. Stop command and causes the LTM R controller to monitor the main circuit and ensure that no current is flowing The Stop Command Check e reports a Stop Command fault or warning if current is detected after a delay of 1 second or e ends if the LTM R controller detects current lt 5 of FLCmin The Stop Check Back begins when the Stop Command Check ends The Stop Check Back causes the LTM R controller to continuously monitor the main circuit to ensure no current is flowing The Stop Check Back e reports a Stop Check Back fault or warning if average phase current is detected for longer than 0 5 seconds without a Run command or e ends when a Run command executes The following diagram is an example of the timing sequence for the Start Command Check and Stop Command Check Start Command Start Command Check Stop Command Stop Command Check a E Main Circuit Current a i WS 0 Normal operation Fault or warning condition The LTM R controller monitors the main circuit to detect current The LTM R controller monitors the main circuit to detect no current The LTM R controller reports a Start Command Check fault and or warning if current is not detected after 1 second The LTM R controller reports a Stop Command Check fault and or warning if current is detected after 1 second AON o 1639502 12 2006 99 Metering an
170. The LTM R operating mode wiring diagrams can be drawn according to 2 standards e IEC e NEMA What s in this The appendix contains the following chapters ix Appendix Chapter Chapter Name Page A IEC Format Wiring Diagrams 535 B NEMA Format Wiring Diagrams 555 1639502 12 2006 533 Appendices 534 1639502 12 2006 IEC Format Wiring Diagrams A IEC Wiring Diagrams Overview This section contains the wiring diagrams corresponding to the 5 pre configured operating modes Overload Monitoring of the motor load where control start stop of the motor load is achieved by a mechanism other than the controller Independent Direct on line across the line full voltage non reversing motor starting applications Reverser Direct on line across the line full voltage reversing motor starting applications Two Step Reduced voltage starting motor applications including e Wye Delta Open Transition Primary Resistor Open Transition Autotransformer Two Speed Two speed motor applications for motor types including e Dahlander consequent pole Pole Changer Each application is described individually with 1 complete application diagram 3 wire impulse local control including power and control 3 partial diagrams control logic input wiring variants 2 wire maintained local control 3 wire impulse local control with network control selectable 2 w
171. Under Power Factor Time to restart unknown Over Power Factor PowerSuite A Connected 1639502 12 2006 449 Use Control Commands Overview Self Test Clear PowerSuite software provides the following control commands e Self Test e Clear Protection Settings e Network Port Settings e Statistics e Thermal Capacity Level These commands take effect immediately upon execution They are available only when the configuration software is communicating with the LTM R controller Use the self test command to check the internal workings of both the LTM R controller and the expansion module The self test command is located in the Services menu under Services Maintenance gt Self Test For more information on the self test function see p 527 Use the clear commands for the purposes described below Command Description Parameter name Protection Settings Restores all protection parameters to their factory Clear Controller Settings Command default settings Network Port Settings Restores network port parameters to their factory Clear Network Port Settings Command default settings Statistics Sets all historical statistics to 0 Clear Statistics Command Thermal Capacity Level Sets to 0 the Thermal Capacity Level and Rapid Cycle Clear Thermal Capacity Level Lockout Timeout parameters See the warning below Command A WARNING LO
172. V1 services 453 E electronic device description 454 error codes PKW 471 expansion commercial reference 382 428 487 compatibility code 487 firmware version 382 487 ID code 487 serial number 487 expansion module technical specifications 42 external ground current 162 fault threshold 121 163 371 421 506 fault timeout 121 163 371 421 506 warning threshold 121 163 371 421 506 F fallback control transition 213 fault controller internal 498 current phase imbalance 498 current phase loss 499 current phase reversal 499 diagnostic 499 ground current 498 HMI port 498 internal port 498 jam 498 long start 498 motor temperature sensor 499 network port 498 network port config 498 network port internal 498 over power factor 499 overcurrent 499 overpower 499 overvoltage 499 register 1 498 register 2 499 test 498 thermal overload 498 under power factor 499 undercurrent 498 underpower 499 undervoltage 499 voltage phase imbalance 499 voltage phase loss 499 voltage phase reversal 499 wiring 499 fault code 93 268 498 n 0 377 491 n 1 378 492 n 2 379 493 n 3 380 494 n 4 381 495 fault counters protection 90 fault enable current phase imbalance 509 current phase loss 510 current phase reversal 510 diagnostic 510 ground current 509 HMI port 509 jam 509 long start 509 motor temperature sensor 510 network port 509 over power factor 51
173. Wire Impulse Local Control 3a Stop E E KM1 KM3 fom 4 KM2 KM1 KM3 1 The N C interlock contacts KM1 and KM3 are not mandatory because the controller electronically interlocks O 1 and O 2 1639502 12 2006 549 IEC Format Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Local Control Application Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Local Control with Network Control Selectable Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Local Control with Network Control Selectable The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained local control wiring diagram Start Stop The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse local control with network control selectable wiring diagram L Local control O Off N Network control PON J The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained local control with network control selectable wiring diagram L Local control O Off N Network control 550 1639502 12 2006 IEC Format Wiring Diagrams Two Speed Dahlander Mode Wiring Diagrams Application The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse local control wiring diagram Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Local Control KM3 aot Low High Speed Speed Stop EA
174. Yes This clears the Controller System Config Required parameter After the Sys Config menu has been configured the Magelis XBTN410 HMI displays the Main menu on subsequent power ups The HMI will not again display the Sys Config menu unless e the Controller System Config Required parameter has been cleared by e executing a Clear All Command or e upgrading the LTM R controller s firmware e Sys Config is selected in the Services menu see p 387 1639502 12 2006 329 Commissioning Sys Config Menu The SysConfig menu contains the following 4 levels of sub menu items Structure Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Parameter name Language HMI Language Setting Date Time Year Date And Time Setting Month Day Hour Minutes Seconds Motor Nom Voltage Motor Nominal Voltage Phases Motor Phases Phase Seq Motor Phases Sequence Oper Mode Motor Operating Mode Dir Transit Control Direct Transition Transit Time Motor Transition Timeout 2 Step Level Motor Step 1 To 2 Threshold 2 Step Time Motor Step 1 To 2 Timeout Aux Fan Motor Aux Fan Cooled Temp Sensor Motor Temp Sensor Type Gr CT Mode Ground Current Mode Load CT Load CT Ratio Load CT Ratio Primary Load CT Primary Secondary Load CT Secondary Load CT Multiple Passes Load CT Multiple Passes GF CT Ratio Primary Ground CT Primary Secondary Ground CT Secondary Contactor Rtg Contactor Ratin
175. a setting value you can either e use the arrow keys to input a new value then click to save it or e click to restore the deleted value 400 1639502 12 2006 Use 1 to many LCD In a 1 to many configuration the Magelis XBTN410 HMI presents a flexible LCD that can display up to 4 rows of 20 characters as follows In some cases the LCD displays only 3 text lines because one line containing a fault message or page header is twice the height of normal text Pages The LCD displays pages of text There are two types of pages Page type Contains Displayed Menu structure page page header that is twice the height of by navigating through the HMI menu ordinary LCD text structure to the specific page links to other pages read only parameter values editable parameter settings function commands Fault message page a flashing fault message e automatically when a fault occurs the number of active faults by selecting Faults in the Home page Pages often contain more than 4 lines of text See p 404 for instructions on how to navigate within and between pages 1639502 12 2006 401 Use Page Examples The Home page The top 4 lines of the Home page TeSys T Vx x Starters currents
176. a statistical snapshot taken the instant each of the last 5 faults occurred The most recent fault is n 0 The oldest fault record is n 4 Fault n 0 records information in the following parameters Level 3 Level 4 Parameter name reference Fault n 0 Fault Code Fault Code n 0 Date Date And Time n 0 Time FLC Ratio Motor Full Load Current Ratio n 0 FLC Max Motor Full Load Current Max n 0 Avg Current Average Current n 0 L1 Current L1 Current n 0 L2 Current L2 Current n 0 L3 Current L3 Current n 0 Gr Current Ground Current n 0 AvgCurrRatio Average Current Ratio n 0 L1CurrRatio L1 Current Ratio n 0 L2CurrRatio L2 Current Ratio n 0 L3CurrRatio L3 Current Ratio n 0 GrCurrRatio Ground Current Ratio n 0 Curr Ph Imb Current Phase Imbalance n 0 Th Capacity Thermal Capacity Level n 0 Avg Volts Average Voltage n 0 L3 L1 Volts L3 L1 Voltage n 0 L1 L2 Volts L1 L2 Voltage n 0 L2 L3 Volts L2 L3 Voltage n 0 Volt Ph Imb Voltage Phase Imbalance n 0 Frequency Frequency n 0 Active Power Active Power n 0 Power Factor Power Factor n 0 Temp Sensor Motor Temp Sensor n 0 1639502 12 2006 377 Use Fault n 1 records information in the following parameters Level 3 Level 4 Parameter name reference Fault n 1 Fault Code Fault Code n 1 Date Date And Time n 1 Ti
177. abled or disabled The function is available for all operating states It applies to both single phase and 3 phase motors The PTC Binary motor temperature sensor function includes the following features e 2 function output e Motor Temp Sensor Warning e Motor Temp Sensor Fault e 1 counting statistic e Motor Temp Sensor Faults Count Motor temperature sensor fault warning o gt 0 gt 29000 L Motor temperature sensor fault warning PTC Binary Temperature sensing element resistance The PTC binary motor temperature sensor function has the following non configurable parameter settings Parameter Fixed setting Accuracy Fault Warning threshold 2900 Q 2 Fault Warning re closing threshold 1575 Q 2 166 1639502 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Function Characteristics Example The PTC binary motor temperature sensor function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Tripping time 0 5 0 6 s Trip time accuracy 0 1 s The following diagram describes the occurrence of a PTC binary motor temp sensor fault with an automatic reset A Fault and warning o Run state condition Run state resume Pp 4 Pp 4 29000 5 15750 consid ded Eee se cheteed SoS S Goatees pyar Seen NS eS Shee Beside gt Reset 29009 Fault threshold 1575Q Fault re closing threshold R
178. abled when the LTM R controller is configured for single phase operation It has no configurable parameters 1639502 12 2006 101 Metering and Monitoring Functions Motor Temperature Sensor Error When the LTM R controller is configured for motor temperature sensor protection the LTM R controller provides short circuit and open circuit detection for the temperature sensing element The LTM R controller signals an error when e calculated resistance at the T1 and T2 terminals falls below the fixed short circuit tripping threshold or e calculated resistance at the T1 and T2 terminals exceeds the fixed open circuit tripping threshold The LTM R controller clears the fault condition when the calculated resistance either falls below open circuit fault or exceeds short circuit fault a fixed re closing threshold After the fault condition has been cleared the fault must be reset according to the configured Reset Mode manual automatic or remote Short circuit and open circuit fault thresholds are factory pre set are not configurable and have no fault time delay There are no warnings associated with the short circuit and the open circuit faults Short circuit and open circuit protection of the motor temperature sensing element is available for all operating states for both single phase and 3 phase motors This protection is enabled when a temperature sensor is employed and configured and cannot be disabled The mot
179. actory Default Network port address 1 125 1 Network port baud rate Read only 65535 autobaud OxFFFF Config via network port enable e Enable Enable e Disable Network port fallback setting e Hold LO1 LO2 off e Run e LO1 LO2 off e LO1 LO2 on e LO1 off e LO2 off Network port fault enable Enable Disable Enable Network port warning enable Enable Disable Enable 1639502 12 2006 49 Introduction HMI Port HMI port configurable parameters for the LTM R controller and the expansion module Parameter Settings Parameter Setting Range Factory Default HMI port address setting 0 247 1 HMI port baud rate setting e 19200 19200 e 9600 e 4800 e 1200 HMI port parity setting e Even Even e None Config via HMI engineering tool enable e Enable Enable e Disable Config via HMI keypad enable e Enable Enable e Disable Network port fallback setting used as HMI Hold LO1 LO2 off port fallback setting e Run e LO1 LO2 off e LO1 LO2 on e LO1 off e LO2 off HMI port fault enable Enable Disable Enable HMI port fault time 7 s fixed 7s HMI port warning enable Enable Disable Enable Protection For a list of configurable protection parameters for the LTM R controller and Parameter expansion module see p 119 Settings 50 1639502 12 2006 Application Example At a Glance Overview This chapter contains an example
180. age XXXXXV 19 13 Voltage L3 L1 Voltage xxxxxV L3 L1 Voltage Volt Imbalance xxx _ Voltage Phase Imbalance Power Factor xx xx Power Factor Active Pwr xxxx xkW Active Power React Pwr Xxxx xkVAR Reactive Power Temp Sensor XXxx xQ__ Motor Temp Sensor Settings gt Links to editable settings for the LTM R controller Statistics gt Links to read only statistics for the LTM R controller Self Testv gt Executes the Self Test command See p 527 Product ID gt Links to product reference numbers and firmware versions for the LTM R controller and expansion module Home Returns to the Home page 417 Use Settings 1 to many Overview The Magelis XBTN410 HMI provides several pages of editable parameter settings nested in levels 4 5 and 6 of the menu structure The settings page is your starting place for locating and editing settings including motor local control transfer mode reset fault current voltage power load shed rapid cycle lockouts communication loss The settings page is located in level 4 of the menu structure To navigate to the settings page use one of the following paths Level From this page Select 1 Home page Starters currents or Starters status 2 Starters Currents page or LTM R controller number Starters Status page 3 Motor Starter page Settings For information on navigating the 1 to many menu structure see p 404
181. al faults condition and motor off e Flashing green power on no internal faults and motor on e Off power off or internal faults exist Alarm red Protection fault or warning or internal Solid red internal or protection fault fault condition e Flashing red 2 x per s warning e Flashing red 5 x per s load shed or rapid cycle condition e Off no faults warnings load shed or rapid cycle when power is On Fallback red Communication connection between e Solid red in fallback LTM R controller and network module Off not in fallback no power BF red green Communication activity between e Green communication LTM R controller and network module Red no communication Expansion Use the 5 LEDs on the face of the expansion module to monitor its operating and Module LEDs communications state as follows LED Color Describes Indicates Power green or red Module power or Solid green power on with no internal faults internal fault condition Solid red power on with internal faults Off power off and 1 10 Digital Inputs 1 7 1 8 1 9 yellow State of input On input activated Off input not activated 1639502 12 2006 345 Use Test Reset Use the Test Reset button to perform the following LTM R controller functions Function Description Procedure Fault reset Resets all faults that can be reset Press the button and release within 3 s See p 255 fo
182. al heating characteristics of the motor Refer to the motor manufacturer s instructions before setting this parameter Failure to follow this instruction can result in injury or equipment damage There is no time delay for the thermal overload warning When inverse thermal fault mode is selected the LTM R controller estimates the e Time to Trip the time until a fault will occur e Minimum Wait Time after a fault has occurred the time until the LTM R controller will be automatically reset For more information about Time to Trip see p 111 and for more information about Minimum Wait Time see p 113 The LTM R controller calculates the Thermal Capacity Level in all operating states When power to the LTM R controller is lost the LTM R controller retains the last measurements of the motor s thermal state for a period of 30 minutes permitting it to re calculate the motor s thermal state when power is re applied Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled This function applies to both single phase and 3 phase motors 1639502 12 2006 131 Motor Protection Functions Reset for You can use the Clear Thermal Capacity Level Command issued from the PLC or Emergency an HMI to re start an overloaded motor in an emergency situation This command Restart resets the thermal capacity utilization value to 0 and bypasses the cooling period required by the thermal model before the motor
183. ally changes network settings to their default values for the selected network protocol 436 1639502 12 2006 Use File Transfer Device to PC Saving Files To transfer configuration settings from the LTM R controller to the PC and save those settings in a new configuration file Step Action 1 Be sure the configuration software is communicating with the LTM R controller If the task bar indicates Disconnected select Connect in either the icon bar or in the Link menu 2 Transfer the configuration from the LTM R controller to your PC Select Device to PC in either the icon bar or the Link to File gt Transfer sub menu 3 After the configuration settings are transferred use the configuration software to change configuration settings 4 After your configuration setting edits are complete save your work to a file e Select the Save command in either the icon bar or the File menu The Save As dialog opens then e Inthe Save As dialog navigate to the desired location and click Save Save a copy of any configuration file you intend to transfer to the LTM R controller A saved copy provides both a record of these settings and a backup that can be used to re transfer configuration settings if the initial transfer fails Use the e Save command to save your configuration changes to the open configuration file e Save As command to save a copy of the displayed configuration to
184. am The external ground CT specifications and The following ground CT parameter settings using PowerSuite software Ground CT Primary Ground CT Secondary Confirm that the combination of Ground CT Primary and Ground CT Secondary parameters accurately reflect the intended ground CT ratio The motor temp sensor specifications and The following parameter setting using either PowerSuite software or the LCD display of the Magelis XBTN410 HMI Motor Temp Sensor Confirm that the motor temp sensor actually employed is the same sensor type as set in the Motor Temp Sensor parameter 1639502 12 2006 337 Commissioning 1 0 Wiring Verify the wiring for any I O connections by checking the following Look at Action The wiring diagram Visually confirm that the actual wiring matches the intended wiring as described in the wiring diagram The Aux1 Aux2 and Stop buttons on the Magelis XBTN410 HMI and The following parameter setting using either PowerSuite software or the LCD display of the Magelis XBTN410 HMI e Control Local Channel Setting Confirm that each command performs the intended start or stop function when control is via the local terminal strip or the local HMI port The Reset button on the Magelis XBTN410 HMI and The following parameter setting using either PowerSuite software or the LCD display of the Magelis XBTN410 H
185. aneous activation of O 1 step 1 and 0 2 step 2 logic outputs e In local terminal strip control mode logic input 1 1 controls logic outputs O 1 and O 2 e In network or local HMI control modes the Motor Run Forward Command parameter controls logic outputs O 1 and O 2 The Motor Run Reverse Command parameter is ignored e Logic outputs 0 1 and O 2 deactivate and the motor stops when control voltage becomes too low e Logic outputs 0 1 0 2 and O 4 deactivate and the motor stops in response to a diagnostic error Note See Control Wiring and Fault Management p 229 for information about the interaction between e the LTM R controller s predefined control logic and e the control wiring an example of which appears in the following diagrams 242 1639502 12 2006 Motor Control Functions Two Step Wye The following wiring diagram represents a simplified example of the LTM R Delta Application controller in a two step Wye Delta local control 3 wire impulse application Diagram KM2 Start Stop E Omo TmT oTe Teo Toeo o JKM3 KM3 KM1 KM1 KM2 KM3 1 The N C interlock contacts KM1 and KM3 are not mandatory because the LTM R controller electronically interlocks O 1 and O 2 For additional examples of two step Wye Delta IEC diagrams see p 545 For examples of two step Wye Delta NEMA diagrams see p 565
186. application diagram features 3 wire impulse local contro with network control selectable wiring diagram H OTA Stop Ath ee A2 l A3 H Hand Local Control O Off A Automatic Network Control The following application diagram features 2 wire maintained local control with network control selectable wiring diagram H Hand Local Control T O Off A1 A Automatic Network Control A2 566 1639502 12 2006 NEMA Format Wiring Diagrams Two Step Primary Resistor Mode Wiring Diagrams Application The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse local control wiring diagram Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Local Control 3a L1 L2 L3 RES RES RES is i Start Stop px O oO Q10 eae 10 at en We i 1639502 12 2006 567 NEMA Format Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Local Control Application Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Local Control with Network Control Selectable Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Local Control with Network Control Selectable The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained local control wiring diagram The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse local
187. are identification 1639502 12 2006 411 Use Menu Structure Home Page 1 to many Overview The Home Page opens by default on HMI start up when the Magelis XBTN410 is connected to 1 or more LTM R controllers all of which are running without faults or warnings The Home page is the only page located in level 1 of the Magelis XBTN410 1 to many menu structure It is the starting place for navigation to all other levels and pages in the menu structure See p 404 for instructions on how to scroll through a page and navigate to other pages in the 1 to many menu structure Home Page The Home page contains the following menu items Menu item Description TeSys T VX X Page header with LTM R controller firmware version Starters currents gt Links to a page that displays average current and provides links to data and commands for each LTM R controller Starters status Links to a page that displays status On Off Fault and provides links to data and commands for each LTM R controller Faults Displays a series of fault messages Remote Reset Links to a page that displays the status of each LTM R controller and provides a reset command for each LTM R controller Reset to defaults Links to a page with commands that reset to factory defaults each LTM R controller s statistics or settings XBTN Reference Links to a page that d
188. are not accessible at all Profibus DP V1 Addresses Profibus DP V1 Mapping The following mapping is the reference for Profibus DP V1 Acyclic Data Read and Acyclic Data Write functions Profibus DP V1 index Register address 10 Profibus DP V1 length Number of registers x 2 with a maximum number of registers 20 See p 472 for details about the access to variables 478 1639502 12 2006 Use Data Formats Overview Integer Int Ulnt Dint IDInt Word Word n The data format of a communication variable can be integer Word or Word n as described below For more information about a variable size and format see p 480 Integers fall into the following categories e Int signed integer using one register 16 bits e Ulnt unsigned integer using one register 16 bits e DInt signed double integer using two registers 32 bits e UDint unsigned double integer using two registers 32 bits For all integer type variables the variable name is completed with its unit or format if necessary Example Address 474 Ulnt Frequency x 0 01 Hz Word Set of 16 bits where each bit or group of bits represents command monitoring or configuration data Example Address 455 Word System Status Register 1 bit 0 System ready bit 1 System on bit 2 System fault bit 3 System warning bit 4 System tripped bit 5 Fault reset authorized
189. arning Counters 87 3 4 System and Device Monitoring Faults 94 3 5 Motor History 107 3 6 Thermal Overload Statistics 111 3 7 System Operating Status 112 60 1639502 12 2006 Metering and Monitoring Functions 3 1 Summary of Characteristics Overview Introduction This section provides a summary of characteristics for the measurement statistics diagnostic fault motor statistics thermal overload and system operating functions available using the LTM R controller and the expansion module What s in this This section contains the following topics Section Topic Page Accessing Metering Functions and Parameter Data 62 Measurements 63 Fault and Warning Counters 64 System and Device Monitoring Faults 64 Motor History 65 Thermal Overload Statistics 65 System Operating Status 66 1639502 12 2006 61 Metering and Monitoring Functions Accessing Metering Functions and Parameter Data HMI Tools Customized Functions and Data Use any of the following user interface tools to monitor the metering functions and parameters included in a pre defined operating mode e aPC with PowerSuite software e the Magelis XBTN410 HMI device e aPLC via the remote communication link For more information about pre defined operating modes see p 222 In addition to monitoring metering functions and parameters incorporated in a pre defined operating mode you can use the Custom
190. arning Threshold Power continued Under PF Fault Enable Under Power Factor Fault Enable Fault Level Under Power Factor Fault Threshold Fault Time Under Power Factor Fault Timeout Warn Enable Under Power Factor Warning Enable Warn Level Under Power Factor Warning Threshold Over PF Fault Enable Over Power Factor Fault Enable Fault Level Over Power Factor Fault Threshold Fault Time Over Power Factor Fault Timeout Warn Enable Over Power Factor Warning Enable Warn Level Over Power Factor Warning Threshold Load Shed Fault Enable Load Shedding Enable Fault Level Load Shedding Threshold Fault Time Load Shedding Timeout Restart Level Load Shedding Restart Threshold Restart Time Load Shedding Restart Timeout Diagnostics Diag Fault Fault Enable Diagnostic Fault Enable Warn Enable Diagnostic Warning Enable Wiring WiringFit Fault Enable Wiring Fault Enable Lock Outs RpdCycl time Rapid Cycle Lockout Timeout Starts PerHr Starts Per Hour Lockout Threshold 1639502 12 2006 373 Use Network Port The Network Port and HMI Port sub menus contain the following editable parameters and HMI Port Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Parameter name reference Network Port Address Network Port Address Setting Baud Rate Network Port Baud Rate Setting Config Ctrl Config Via Network Port Enable Comm Loss Fault Network Port Fault Enable Fallback Network Port Fallback Setting Warni
191. arning enable 124 198 373 423 warning threshold 124 198 373 423 506 overvoltage 187 fault enable 123 188 372 422 425 fault threshold 123 188 372 422 425 506 fault timeout 123 188 372 422 425 506 faults count 90 376 warning enable 123 188 372 422 425 warning threshold 123 188 372 422 425 506 P parameters configurable 45 parameters refresh rate 445 password 444 password HMI keypad 387 phase imbalances register 504 physical description expansion module 35 LTM R controller 31 PKW data 467 PKW error codes 471 PKW feature 453 467 power consumption active 490 reactive 490 power factor 82 83 84 93 417 503 n 0 377 426 491 n 1 378 427 492 n 2 379 493 n 3 380 494 n 4 381 495 power motor protection functions parameter setting ranges 124 PowerSuite software configuring parameters 442 control commands 450 fault management 448 fault monitoring 448 metering and monitoring 445 navigation 440 user interface 434 predefined operating modes control wiring and fault management 229 preferences dialog communication 443 preventive maintenance 526 configuration settings 526 environment 527 statistics 526 Profibus DP 310 features 452 protocol principle 452 Profibus DP implementation general information 453 protection functions 117 communication 257 configuration 216 256 current 216 257 customized 117 diagnostic 216 256 Internal 216
192. as the controller supply voltage the controller logic inputs are internally powered by the control voltage of the controller Controller inputs are isolated from the inputs of the expansion module The 3 controller terminals for common wiring are not connected to the common of the LTM R but are internally connected to the A1 control voltage terminal see p 291 m SISISISIS F IJOCGOLLVOVOYVOSV OVVO v1 Lv2 iva fat a2Qit c 12 13 C 14 15 C coll Tor 98 95 96 LTMEV40FM LTMRO8PBD PROFIBUS pa 9 J So SR OR T 2 i Test Reset SSTISSSS SSSSES JSSSTSSSTS The 4 digital inputs on the expansion module I 7 1 10 are not powered by the control voltage of the controller They are externally powered and the inputs voltage depends on the expansion module model 24 Vdc 110 Vac or 220 Vac 2705334 ra a Power Alarm J Fallback J v o oy cil oll oll sil HMI Comm E Note Because the expansion module is powered by the controller it doesn t have a separate control voltage For more information on input characteristics see p 38 1639502 12 2006 289 Installation Terminal Wiring Both the Controller and Expansion Module terminals have the same characteristics Characteristics Terminals have an insulation rating of 250 Vac The table below describes the characteristics of cables that may
193. ast 2 counters e acounter for the specific fault detecting function and e a counter for all faults When a warning occurs the LTM R controller increments a single counter for all warnings However when the LTM R controller detects a thermal overload warning it also increments the thermal overload warnings counter When a fault is automatically reset the LTM R controller increments only the auto resets counter All fault and warning counters are reset to 0 by executing the Clear Statistics Command 88 1639502 12 2006 Metering and Monitoring Functions All Faults Counter Description The Faults Count parameter contains the number of faults that have occurred since the Clear All Statistics Command last executed The Faults Count parameter increments by a value of 1 when the LTM R controller detects any fault All Warnings Counter Description The Warnings Count parameter contains the number of warnings that have occurred since the Clear All Statistics Command last executed The Warnings Count parameter increments by a value of 1 when the LTMR controller detects any warning Auto Reset Counter Description The Auto Reset Count parameter contains the number of times the LTM R controller attempted but failed to auto reset a fault The Auto Reset Count parameter increments by a value of 1 each time the LTMR controller unsuccessfully attempts to auto reset a fault If an auto reset att
194. ata from logic inputs e telecommunication commands TC received from the control source e logic processing by the control or monitoring function e utilization of the processing results e activation of logic outputs e display of predefined messages e activation of LEDs e telecommunication signals TS sent via a communications link The control and monitoring function process is displayed below Logic Inputs Logic gnp LTM R Logic Outputs gt TS Functions gt a cae ee Peon Predefined as OutputCommands V Control Monitoring gt gt Functions System Status HMI commands Signal LEDs gt Protection gt Functions N gt L _ I O Control Logic Ly c TS t ustom Logic ee Equations gt Predefined TC gt gt messages Logic Inputs and The LTM R controller provides 6 logic inputs 2 logic outputs 1 warning relay and 1 Outputs fault relay By adding an expansion module you can add 4 more logic inputs Selecting a predefined operating mode automatically assigns the logic inputs to functions and defines the relationship between logic inputs and outputs Using the custom logic editor you can change these assignments 224 1639502 12 2006 Motor Control Functions Predefined Operating Modes Overview Operating Mode Types The LTM R cont
195. ate and signals e awarning when current in any phase exceeds a set threshold after the motor has reached run state e a fault when current in any phase continuously exceeds a separately set threshold for a specified period of time after the motor has reached run state The jam function is triggered when the motor is jammed during run state and stops or is suddenly overloaded and draws excessive current Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled The function applies to both single phase and 3 phase motors The jam function includes the following features e 2 thresholds e Warning Threshold e Fault Threshold e 1 fault time delay e Fault Timeout e 2 function outputs e Jam Warning e Jam Fault e 1 counting statistic e Jam Faults Count Jam warning and fault Run state amp pe Jam warning __ m m gt Imax gt Is1 12 gt Imax AND 13 gt __ Imax gt Is2 amp T 0 ___s Jam fault Run state AND 11 Phase 1 current 12 Phase 2 current I3 Phase 3 current Is1 Warning threshold Is2 Fault threshold T Fault timeout 1639502 12 2006 151 Motor Protection Functions Parameter The jam function has the following parameters Settings Parameters Setting range Factory setting Fault enable Enable Disable Enable Fault timeout 1 30 s in 1 s increments 5s Fault threshold 100
196. atio of current in phase 1 in li1 L1 lavg x 100 lavg Imbalance ratio of current in phase 2 in li2 L2 lavg x 100 lavg Imbalance ratio of current in phase 3 in li3 L3 lavg x 100 lavg Current imbalance ratio for three phase in limb Max li1 li2 1i3 Characteristics The line current imbalance function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Unit Accuracy e 1 5 for 8 A and 27 A units 3 for 100 A units Resolution 1 Refresh interval 100 ms 1639502 12 2006 75 Metering and Monitoring Functions Thermal Capacity Level Description Trip Current Characteristics Thermal Capacity Models The thermal capacity level function calculates the amount of thermal capacity used and estimates the amount of time remaining until a fault condition is reached see p 111 After a fault this function estimates the thermal capacity and time required for the motor to cool calculations see p 173 This function uses two thermal models one for copper stator and rotor windings of the motor and the other for the iron frame of the motor The thermal model with the maximum utilized capacity is reported This function also estimates and displays e the time remaining before a thermal overload fault is triggered and e the time remaining until the fault condition is cleared after a thermal overload fault has been triggered The Thermal Capacity level functio
197. ation States Command Output data Monitoring Input data lt RUN REVERSE RUN REVERSE 2 2 2 1 Time sec Note The pulse width must be more than 1 s Sequence Description 0 Device switched off no current no internal stored switch on command 1 REVERSE FORWARD command activated 1 1 actual or internal stored switch on command activated 1 2 after a delay time current will be measured 1 3 a measured current in addition to the actual or internal stored switch on command RUN REVERSE FORWARD impacts the confirmation signal RUN FORWARD REVERSE OFF command activated 2 1 the confirmation signal RUN FORWARD REVERSE will be set back 2 2 after a motor stop no current will be measured 2 3 no current and no internal stored switch on command impacts the OFF signal 460 1639502 12 2006 Use Input Data Cyclic input data Position Description Input 0 0 Run Reverse The main circuit contacts are closed Input 0 1 Indication that the device is in the OFF state Off Input 0 2 The main circuit contacts are closed Run Forward Input 0 3 An overload warning condition exists Thermal Overload Warning 461 3 Input 0 4 Communication status register high byte 4
198. ation faults plus the number of failed attempts to identify the network communication module When the LTM R controller increments either of the above internal fault counters it also increments the Faults Count parameter 92 1639502 12 2006 Metering and Monitoring Functions Fault History Fault History The LTM R controller stores a history of LTM R controller data that was recorded at the time of the last five detected faults Fault n O contains the most recent fault record and fault n 4 contains the oldest retained fault record Each fault record includes e Fault Code e Date and Time e Value of Settings e Motor Full Load Current Ratio of FLCmax e Value of Measurements Thermal Capacity Level Average Current Ratio L1 L2 L3 Current Ratio Ground Current Ratio Full Load Current Max Current Phase Imbalance Voltage Phase Imbalance Power Factor Frequency Motor Temp Sensor Average Voltage L3 L1 Voltage L1 L2 Voltage L2 L3 Voltage Active Power 1639502 12 2006 93 Metering and Monitoring Functions 3 4 System and Device Monitoring Faults Overview Introduction Access What s in this Section The LTM R controller and the expansion module detect faults which affect the LTM R controller s ability to work properly internal controller check and check of communications wiring and configuration errors The system and device monitoring fault records may be acc
199. ation on the menu structure see p 366 The following example changes the password from an initial value of 0000 to a password value of 1001 Step Description Screen display 1 Navigate to the HMI Password parameter in the Services menu HMI Password Change Pswd 2 R Press the button to step into the Password Change Pswd setting The value 0000 appears by default and is not necessarily the active password 0000 3 R Press the button again to select the first left most Change Pswd digit for editing 0 k k 4 Press the O button once to increment the first Change Pswd digit to the value 1 The sign changes to indicating the value is being edited 21 5 A Press the button to move to the second digit for Change Pswd editing Because this digit will be 0 no further editing is required 2 Q Note Any digit not the focus of editing is hidden and f displayed as an asterisk 390 1639502 12 2006 Use Step Description Screen display 6 Press the button to move to the third digit for Change Pswd editing Because this digit also will be 0 no further editing is required Q Q 7 Press the button to move to the fourth digit for Change Pswd editing Pi k k 0 8 Press the O button once to increment the first Change Pswd digit to the value 1 The sign changes to indica
200. ault Time start Seconds Parameters f Logic Functions Fault Time Run Seconds Fault Level 5 Warn Enable Warning level PowerSuite Connected You can select Settings sub branches in any order Make your edits in the main window Languages Sub You can select an HMI display language in the Settings gt Languages sub menu menu You can also make this selection by navigating to the Settings General sub branch of the tree control Preferences The Communications page of the Preferences dialog also contains configurable Dialog parameter settings To access these settings select Preferences in the Settings menu 1639502 12 2006 443 Use Configuration Functions Using PowerSuite Overview Restore Factory Defaults Password The configuration software s Services menu provides access to the following configuration functions e Reset to Factory Restore Factory Defaults e Password Use the Services gt Reset to Factory command to clear all settings and restore factory defaults This menu command executes the Clear All Command parameter For a list of general parameters and their factory default settings see p 45 for a list of protection parameters and their factory default settings see p 119 Use the Services Password command to access a dialog where you can enable password protection and create a password Using a pass
201. ault enable register 1 bits 0 1 Reserved bit 2 Ground current fault enable bit 3 Thermal overload fault enable bit 4 Long start fault enable bit 5 Jam fault enable bit 6 Current phase imbalance fault enable bit 7 Undercurrent fault enable bit 8 Reserved bit 9 Test fault enable bit 10 HMI port fault enable bits 11 14 Reserved bit 15 Network port fault enable 632 Word Warning enable register 1 bit 0 Not significant bit 1 Reserved bit 2 Ground current warning enable bit 3 Thermal overload warning enable bit 4 Reserved bit 5 Jam warning enable bit 6 Current phase imbalance warning enable bit 7 Undercurrent warning enable bits 8 9 Reserved bit 10 HMI port warning enable bit 11 Controller internal temperature warning enable bits 12 14 Reserved bit 15 Network port warning enable 1639502 12 2006 509 Use Register Variable type Read Write variables Note p 478 633 Word Fault enable register 2 bit O Reserved bit 1 Diagnostic fault enable bit 2 Wiring fault enable bit 3 Overcurrent fault enable bit 4 Current phase loss fault enable bit 5 Current phase reversal fault enable bit 6 Motor temperature sensor fault enable bit 7 Voltage phase imbalance fault enable bit 8 Voltage phase loss fault enable
202. aults Count parameter 1639502 12 2006 91 Metering and Monitoring Functions Communication Loss Counters Description The LTM R controller records the total number of faults detected since the Clear Statistics Command last executed for the following communication functions Counter Contains HMI Port Faults Count The number of times communications via the HMI port was lost Network Port Internal Faults Count The number of internal faults experienced by the network module reported by the network module to the LTM R controller Network Port Config Faults Count The number of major faults experienced by the network module exclusive of network module internal faults reported by the network module to the LTM R controller Network Port Faults Count The number of times communicaitons via the network port was lost When the LTM R controller increments any of the above communication loss counters it also increments the Faults Count parameter Internal Fault Counters Description The LTM R controller records the total number of the faults detected since the Clear Statistics Command last executed for the following internal faults Counter Contains Controller Internal Faults Count The number of major and minor internal faults For information on internal faults see p 95 Internal Port Faults Count The number of LTM R controller internal communic
203. balance Voltage Phase Imbalance n 1 Frequency Frequency n 1 Active Pwr Active Power n 1 Power Factor Power Factor n 1 Temp Sensor Motor Temp Sensor n 1 1639502 12 2006 427 Use Product ID 1 to many Overview The Magelis XBTN410 HMI provides a description of the product number and firmware for both the LTM R controller and expansion module To navigate to the product ID page use one of the following paths Level From this page Select 1 Home page Starters currents or Starters status 2 Starters Currents page or Starters Status page LTM R controller number 3 Motor Starter page Product ID For information on navigating the 1 to many menu structure see p 404 Product ID In the Product ID page you can read the following information about the LTM R controller and expansion module Level 4 Parameter name description Product ID Addr 1 8 LTMR Catalog Ref Controller Commercial Reference product number LTMR Firmware Controller Firmware Version LTME Catalog Ref Expansion Commercial Reference product number LTME Firmware Expansion Firmware Version 428 1639502 12 2006 Use Monitoring 1 to many Overview Monitoring Multiple LTM R controllers Monitoring a Single LTM R controller Use the Magelis XBTN410 HMI in a 1 t
204. bee ee ei ebb ee pa py ne Mabe pees 63 Fault and Warning Counters 0 000 cece eee eee 64 System and Device Monitoring Faults 0 0 cee eee ee 64 Motor HIStOry ie owe th ee ek ee es ad aoe Sie a Rag ld 65 Thermal Overload Statistics 0 2 0 eee 65 System Operating Status 2 tee 66 Measurements nni pere A aa eres ee eee GR a A 67 OVOGIVIEW cs pit La ea eh Ae ey ee ie es Ae ed aid Ae 67 Line CumentS yes Sid cee eons nes chee P a Nee not a paeau ap aeng 68 Ground Current s e ities Aes alee eal esta eta a ely Neil A lS ease 70 Average Curent n sue 2 pa ease a Ace ite ean pa bet Sea Gta ap Ae 73 Current Phase Imbalance 0 00 00 eects 75 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 Thermal Capacity Level 0 0 onin ie en e pe tt eee 76 Motor Temperature Sensor 0 0 cette eee 78 FREQUENCY reia e e i te ee ee eee eR AT a E 78 Line to Line Voltages sisii ene 79 Line Voltage Imbalance 00 00 ccc eee 80 Average Voltages nis fecserins fave ng a as diate e veces ate ane wen eect 81 Active POW T g meien ee a eee Ged one eT Bie ae eed ache ee 82 Reactive Powerc vis niet oh eee a sane Csi eine E eee 83 Power Factor iesse canann eat qed ee heed et bed bee Medd ba E 84 Active Power Consumption 0 00 c cette eae 86 Reactive Power Consumption sasaaa cee eens 86 Fault and Warning Counters 0 0 0 87 OVENVIGW ocre bela nAn Ob epee hells Se Saye e
205. ble aC POPE 96 552 1639502 12 2006 IEC Format Wiring Diagrams Two Speed Pole Changing Mode Wiring Diagrams Application The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse local control wiring diagram Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Local Control 3a LF x7 KM1 J KM2 Ae eee eee eee eee eee JI Fi Low High Speed _ Speed Stop E e E 1 A pole changing application requires two sets of wires passing through the CT windows The controller can also be placed upstream of the contactors If this is the case all the wires downstream of the contactors must be the same size 2 The N C interlock contacts KM1 and KM2 are not mandatory because the controller firmware interlocks O 1 and O 2 1639502 12 2006 553 IEC Format Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Local Control Application Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Local Control with Network Control Selectable Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Local control with Network The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained local control wiring diagram LS Low Speed O Off HS High Speed The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse local control with network control selectable wiring diagram L Local control O Off N Network control LS Low Speed HS High Spe
206. ble 3a I L1 v2 x3 H Hand Local Control Atl O Off A2 T A Automatic Network Control a3 T Stop Start RE 8 1639502 12 2006 559 NEMA Format Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Local Control with Network Control Selectable L1 The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained local control with network control selectable wiring diagram 3a L2 L3 i H Hand Local Control O Off A Automatic Network Control A1 560 1639502 12 2006 NEMA Format Wiring Diagrams Independent Mode Wiring Diagrams Application The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse local control wiring diagram Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Local Control 3a gf Sie L1 L2 L3 M M JM 1639502 12 2006 561 NEMA Format Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Local Control Application Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Local Control with Network Control Selectable Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Local Control with Network Control Selectable The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained local control wiring diagram OFF OI a The following applicatio
207. by the LTM R controller What s in this This section contains the following topics Section i Topic Page Underpower 194 Overpower 197 Under Power Factor 200 Over Power Factor 203 1639502 12 2006 193 Motor Protection Functions Underpower Description Functional Characteristics The underpower function signals e a warning when the value of active power falls below a set threshold e a fault when the value of active power falls and remains below a separately set threshold for a set period of time This function has a single fault time delay Both the fault and warning thresholds are defined as a percentage of the Motor Nominal Power parameter setting Pnom The underpower function is available only in run state when the LTM R controller is connected to an expansion module Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled The function applies to both single phase and 3 phase motors The underpower function includes the following features e 2 thresholds e Underpower Warning Threshold e Underpower Fault Threshold e 1 fault time delay e Underpower Fault Timeout e 2 function outputs e Underpower Warning e Underpower Fault e 1 counting statistic e Underpower Faults Count 194 1639502 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Block Diagram Underpower warning and fault Vavg lavg gt Power Factor gt Parameter Settings Function
208. c Input Behavior 1 3 User defined 1 4 e In 3 wire impulse control a Stop command n 2 wire maintained control a user defined input that can be configured to send information to a PLC address over the network Note In Overload operating mode logic input 1 4 is not used and can be user defined 1 5 A Fault Reset command is recognized when this input receives the rising edge of a signal Note this input must first become inactive and then receive the rising edge of a subsequent signal for another reset to occur Local Remote control of the LTM R controller s outputs e Active Remote control by the PLC over the network Inactive Local control through either the terminal strip or the local HMI port as determined by the Control Local Channel Setting parameter Logic Output The behavior of logic outputs O 1 and O 2 is determined by the selected operating Behavior mode See the topics that follow for a description of the 5 pre defined operating mode types and the When the LTM R co behavior of logic outputs O 1 and O 2 ntroller has lost communication with either the network or the local HMI the LTM R controller enters a fallback condition When it receives a stop command in a fallback condition logic outputs O 1 and O 2 behave as follows Control Circuit Type Response of logic outputs O 1 and O 2 to a stop command 2 wire maintained A stop command overrides the fa
209. c inputs 1 1 or 1 2 as start commands and the absence of current disables the start command Control Logic Predefined control logic manages faults and reset commands as follows Action on Faults e Logic output 0 4 opens in response to a fault condition and Resets e Logic output O 4 closes in response to a reset command 1639502 12 2006 229 Motor Control Functions Control Logic The control circuits shown in the wiring diagrams in this chapter and in the and Control Appendix indicate how the LTM R controller s control logic and the control circuit Wiring Together combine to stop a motor in response to a fault Managing Faults For 3 wire impulse control circuits the control strategy links the state of logic output O 4 to the state of the current at logic input 1 4 e Control logic opens logic output O 4 in response to a fault e Logic output 0 4 opening interrupts current at logic input 1 4 disabling the control logic latch command on logic output O 1 e Logic output O 1 opens due to control logic described above and stops the flow of current to the contactor coil In order to restart the motor the fault must be reset and a new start command must be issued e For 2 wire maintained control circuits the control strategy links the state of logic output O 4 directly with the logic inputs 1 1 or 1 2 e Control logic opens logic output O 4 in response to a fault e Logic output 0 4 opening interrupts curren
210. cal Control O Off A Automatic Network Control Ll nts aN Stop ote H OJA QIO 0 0 A1 I Forward PO 29 A2 I Oe A3 I Reverse pjazza gO Ozz Ou Ous The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained local control with network control selectable wiring diagram H Hand Local Control HO Maintained Joma Atl I A Automatic Network Control A2 Local Control FL R o i F Forward pi TA with Network E Aenea x a olor control o o selectable Eer EEEE TEETE TENETE TE Oiii OOOO OOO EE te 12 WER E 1G O 564 1639502 12 2006 NEMA Format Wiring Diagrams Two Step Wye Delta Mode Wiring Diagrams Application The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse local control wiring diagram Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Local Control Stop Q10 1639502 12 2006 565 NEMA Format Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Local Control Application Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Local Control with Network Control Selectable Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Local Control with Network Control Selectable The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained local control wiring diagram The following
211. cal Description 1 to 1 353 LCD Display 1 to 1 355 Navigating the Menu Structure 1 to 1 361 Editing Values 1 to 1 362 Menu Structure 1 to 1 366 Main Menu 1 to 1 367 Main Menu Settings 1 to 1 368 Main Menu Statistics 1 to 1 375 Main Menu Product ID 1 to 1 382 Monitoring Using the Scrolling HMI Display 1 to 1 383 Main Menu Services 1 to 1 387 Fault Management 1 to 1 392 HMI Keypad Control 1 to 1 395 352 1639502 12 2006 Use Physical Description 1 to 1 1 to 1 Interface 1 to 1 Keypad In a 1 to 1 physical configuration the Magelis XBTN410 HMI looks like this 1 LCD display 2 8 button keypad The 1 to 1 configuration requires a customized keypad label for the 4 buttons AUX1 AUX2 STOP and RESET located at the bottom of the HMI You will need to type or print the button names on a blank keypad label then insert the label into the HMI For instructions on selecting customizing and installing a customized keypad label refer to the Telemecanique Magelis Instruction Sheet that ships with the HMI In a 1 to 1 configuration the keypad buttons perform the following functions Keys Description Comment Q moves down to the next item in e a value list e the same level of the menu structure e press to decrease the selected numerical digit by 1 unit gt e moves up to the previous item in e avalue list e the same level of the menu st
212. can be restarted A WARNING LOSS OF MOTOR PROTECTION Clearing the thermal capacity level inhibits thermal protection and can cause equipment overheating and fire Continued operation with inhibited thermal protection should be limited to applications where immediate restart is vital Failure to follow this instruction can result in death serious injury or equipment damage The Clear Thermal Capacity Level Command will not reset the fault response Instead e only an action external to the LTM R controller for example a reduction in the motor load can clear the fault condition e only a reset command from the valid reset means configured in the Fault Reset Mode parameter will reset the fault response A WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION A reset command may re start the motor if the LTM R controller is used in a 2 wire control circuit Equipment operation must conform to local and national safety regulations and codes Failure to follow this instruction can result in death serious injury or equipment damage 132 1639502 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Operation The thermal overload inverse thermal protection function is based on a thermal model of the motor that combines two thermal images e acopper based image representing the thermal state of the stator and rotor windings and e an iron based image representing the thermal state of the motor frame Using meas
213. can use to either tailor a predefined control program or create a new program to meet the needs of your specific application 1639502 12 2006 207 Motor Control Functions What s in this Chapter e fault reset mode which directs the control program to allow fault resets by a person a master network controller or the LTM R control program depending upon the type of fault and the authorized control source Fault reset modes include e manual reset allows resets by a person using a local reset means e remote reset adds the ability to reset via commands from the remote master network controller via the LTM R controller s network port e automatic reset adds the ability of the LTM R controller to reset faults automatically after a time delay This chapter contains the following sections Section Topic Page 5 1 Control Modes and Operating States 209 5 2 Operating Modes 222 5 3 Fault Management 254 208 1639502 12 2006 Motor Control Functions 5 1 Control Modes and Operating States At a Glance Summary This section describes e how to configure control of the LTM R controller outputs and e the LTM R controller s operating states including e how the LTM R controller transitions between operating states during startup and e the motor protection functions provided by the LTM R controller in each operating state UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATI
214. cation controller in an independent local control 3 wire impulse application Diagram 3a ETA TETTA Oo KM1 el Start Stop For additional examples of independent operating mode IEC diagrams see p 541 For examples of independent operating mode NEMA diagrams see p 561 1639502 12 2006 235 Motor Control Functions 1 0 Assignment Independent operating mode provides the following logic inputs Logic inputs 2 wire maintained assignment 3 wire impulse assignment 1 14 Start Stop motor Start motor 1 2 Open Close 0 2 Close 0 2 1 3 Free Free 1 4 Free Stop motor and open O 1 and 0 2 1 5 Reset Reset 1 6 Local 0 or network 1 Local 0 or network 1 Independent operating mode provides the following logic outputs Logic outputs Assignment 0 1 13 and 14 KM1 contactor control 0 2 23 and 24 Controlled by 1 2 0 3 33 and 34 Warning signal 0 4 95 96 97 and 98 Fault signal Independent operating mode uses the following HMI keys HMI keys 2 wire maintained assignment 3 wire impulse assignment Aux 1 Control motor Start motor Aux 2 Control 0 2 Close O 2 Stop Stop motor and open O 2 while pressed Stop motor and open O 2 236 1639502 12 2006 Motor Control Functions Timing The following diagra
215. ccurs including a thermal overload warning the LTM R controller increments the Warnings Count parameter 90 1639502 12 2006 Metering and Monitoring Functions Control Command Errors Counter Description The Diagnostic Faults Count parameter contains the total number of Diagnostic Faults that occurred since the Clear All Statistics Command last executed A Diagnostic Fault occurs when the LTM R controller detects any of the following control command errors Start Command Check errors Stop Command Check errors Stop Check Back errors Run Check Back errors For information on these control command functions see p 98 When the LTM R controller increments the Diagnostic Faults Count parameter it also increments the Faults Count parameter Wiring Faults Counter Description The Wiring Faults Count parameter contains the total number of the following wiring faults that have occurred since the Clear Statistics Command last executed e Wiring Fault which is triggered by a e CT Reversal Error e Phase Configuration Error e Motor Temperature Sensor Wiring Error e Voltage Phase Reversal Fault e Current Phase Reversal Fault The LTM R controller increments the Wiring Faults Count parameter by a value of 1 each time any one of the above 3 faults occurs For information on connection errors and related faults see p 101 When the LTM R controller increments the Wiring Faults Count parameter it also increments the F
216. ch of the tree control e Settings menu s Languages sub menu e Communication page of the Preferences dialog After you have completed making your edits be sure to save your work See p 437 for information on saving files Note You can also use the Custom Logic Editor to edit parameter settings before transferring them to the LTM R controller To configure parameters first select a configuration file to edits Either e transfer parameter settings from the LTM R controller to the configuration software in your PC using the Device to PC command in the Link gt File Transfer sub menu See p 437 for information on uploading parameter settings e open a previously saved configuration file 442 1639502 12 2006 Use Settings Branch After opening a configuration file expand the tree control Settings branch and select each sub branch The main window displays the configurable parameters associated with the selected sub branch PowerSuite Default File Edit Services Link Settings Tools View Help SHAS ee eS e Telemecanique gt Tesys T Current Settings Device Information Current Phase Imbalance Current Phase Loss ff Current Phase Reverse Ground Current Avam fi Under Current 4 gt f Settings gt General Motor f Voltage Current Power Load Shedding f Diagnostics f Lock Outs f Communication gt HMI Display Fault Enable Hf Statistics f Monitoring F
217. ck ESC to return to the scrolling HMI display The fault and warning display contains the following information Line Displays Value s A System state WARN FAULT B1 Fault or Warning Code See p 268 for a list of fault and warning codes and their descriptions B2 Operating mode IND REV 2ST 2SP OVL C left LTM R controller state Ready Rdy Run Start C right Fault or warning description Protection name 360 1639502 12 2006 Use Navigating the Menu Structure 1 to 1 Overview Example Use the Gere and buttons to navigate the Sys Config and Main menus scroll within a value select a setting in a list value list exit a value list without making a selection Note that in the example below the button serves 2 different purposes 1 steps into the next lower level of the menu structure 2 selects an item in a value list and returns to the previous higher level screen Menu structure navigation example Settings Languag e Language Language Language Francais Francais Settings Date Time ENTER Year Date Time Year 2006 1639502 12 2006 361 Use Editing Values 1 to 1 Overview U
218. ck Next 4 In the language screen select a language and click OK In the name and company screen type in your name and your company name or accept the defaults and click Next 6 If a screen appears warning you that protocols will be uninstalled click Yes to continue In the Protocols Choices screen be sure that Modbus is selected then click Next In the Select Components screen make no selections then click Next In the Choose Destination Location screen either accept the default path or use the Browse button to navigate to a new one then click Next 10 In the Start Copying Files screen review your selections then click e Back to return to earlier screens and make changes e Next to proceed to the final screen 11 In the Finish screen click Finish The Magelis XBT L1000 programming software is installed 1639502 12 2006 349 Use Download 1 to 1 and 1 to many Software Application Files Overview You must download the software application file required by your installation of the Magelis XBTN410 HMI from the www telemecanique com website From the Telemecanique website you can freely obtain the following software application files File name Description LTM_1T1_ language _ version dop 1 to 1 application file LTM_1T8_ language _ version dop 1 to many application file The HMI can save and use only one software application file at a time If you change your d
219. control with network control selectable wiring diagram H OTA Stop Ath ee A2 l A3 H Hand Local Control O Off A Automatic Network Control The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained local control with network control selectable wiring diagram H Hand Local Control ze O Off A1 A Automatic Network Control A2 568 1639502 12 2006 NEMA Format Wiring Diagrams Two Step Autotransformer Mode Wiring Diagrams Application The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse local control wiring diagram Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Local Control 3a as Sa lm L1 L2 L3 R R R 2S 2S 2S 100 100 84 84 65 65 50 50 0 0 1S 1S 4 Start Stop pat es Q10 LTMR T1 T2 T3 M 1S i 2s K 1639502 12 2006 569 NEMA Format Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Local Control Application Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Local Control with Network Control Selectable Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Local Control with Network Control Selectable The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained local control wiring diagram OFF ON WS Oo Oo serene eee EP AO RATS G LA The following app
220. cription Reference number LTM R to LTM E connector cable 40mm 1 57 in length closely LTMCC004 couples the expansion module to the left side of the LTM R controller LTM R to LTM E RJ45 connector cable 0 3m 11 81 in length LU9RO3 LTM R to LTM E RJ45 connector cable 1 0m 3 28 ft length LU9R10 PowerSuite cable kit includes LTM E LTM R to PC communication VW3A8106 cable 1 0m 3 28 ft length Profibus network communication cable 100m 328 08 ft length TSXPBSCA100 Profibus network communication cable 400m 328 08 ft length TSXPBSCA400 LTM R LTM E to Magelis HMI device communication cable 2 5m XBTZ938 8 20 ft length 1639502 12 2006 23 Introduction System Selection Guide Overview This section describes the LTM R controller with and without the optional expansion module for metering and monitoring protection and control functions e Metering and Monitoring functions e measurements statistics system and device monitoring motor states e fault and warning monitoring e Protection functions e thermal motor protection e current motor protection e voltage and power motor protection e Control functions e control modes local remote control source selection e operating modes e fault management 24 1639502 12 2006 Introduction Metering The following table lists the equipment required to support the metering functions of Functions the motor management
221. cters Description Left Right lt gt Links to a page With no character next to the blinking arrow click the e keypad button to move to the page indicated by the left arrow e S keypad button to move to the page indicated by the right arrow N A 0p Toggle bit commands ror With a 0 or a 1 next to the blinking arrow click the S 1 gt keypad button to toggle the Boolean setting value 4 v gt Value write commands With a v next to the blinking arrow click the e keypad button to execute the command indicated by the left arrow e O keypad button to execute the command indicated by the right arrow For example e Reset to Defaults Statistics e Reset to Defaults Settings Self Test 4 gt Command cannot execute There is no connection between the HMI and the indicated LTM R controller 1639502 12 2006 403 Use Navigating the Menu Structure 1 to many Overview Use the HMI keypad a and s9 buttons to scroll within a page link to a page in the next lower level in the menu structure return to a page in the next higher level in the menu structure jump to the Home page 404 1639502 12 2006 Use Example The following navigation example begins and ends at the Home page TeSys T T Scroll within page Navigate between pages Starters currents gt Starters status gt TeSys T oar Starters currents gt Starters status
222. ctions HMI Port Parameter Settings The LTM R controller monitors HMI port communications and reports both a warning and a fault if no valid communication has been received by the HMI port for longer than 7 seconds Fault and warning monitoring can be enabled or disabled Both fault and warning monitoring are enabled by default The HMI port communication has the following fixed and configurable settings Parameter Setting Range Factory Default HMI port fault enable Enable Disable Enable HMI port warning enable Enable Disable Enable HMI port fallback setting 1 e Hold 0 1 0 2 off e Run 0 1 O 2 off 0 1 0 2 on 0 1 off O 2 off 1 The operating mode affects the configurable parameters for the HMI port fallback settings 1639502 12 2006 105 Metering and Monitoring Functions Fallback Condition When communication between the LTM R controller and either the network or the local HMI is lost the LTM R controller is in a fallback condition The behavior of logic outputs O 1 and O 2 following a communication loss is determined by e the operating mode see p 222 and e the Network Port Fallback Setting and HMI Port Fallback Setting parameters Fallback setting selectings can include Port Fallback Setting Description Hold 0 1 O 2 Directs the LTM R controller to hold the state of logic outputs O 1 and O 2 as of the time of the communication l
223. ctions be enabled or disabled Protection functions Parameters Setting range Factory setting Voltage phase imbalance Fault enable Enable Disable Disable Fault timeout starting 0 2 20 s in 0 1 s increments 0 7s Fault timeout running 0 2 20 s in 0 1 s increments 2s Fault threshold 3 15 of the calculated imbalance 10 imbalance in 1 increments Warning enable Enable Disable Disable Warning threshold 3 15 calculated imbalance 10 imbalance in 1 increments Voltage phase loss Fault enable Enable Disable Enable Fault timeout 0 1 30 s in 0 1 s increments 3s Warning enable Enable Disable Enable Voltage phase reversal Fault enable Enable Disable Enable Motor phases sequence A B C A B C e A C B Undervoltage Fault enable Enable Disable Disable Fault timeout 0 2 25 s in 0 1 s increments 3s Fault threshold 70 99 of Motor nominal voltage 85 of Motor in 1 increments nominal voltage Warning enable Enable Disable Disable Warning threshold 70 99 of Motor nominal voltage 85 of Motor in 1 increments nominal voltage Overvoltage Fault enable Enable Disable Disable Fault timeout 0 2 25 s in 0 1 s increments 3s Fault threshold 101 115 of Motor nominal voltage 110 of Motor in 1 increments nominal voltage Warning enable Enable Disable Disable Warning threshold 101 115 of Motor nominal voltage 110 of Motor in 1 increments nominal voltage Load shedding Enable Enable Disable Enable Timeout 1 9999 s in increments of 0 1 s 1
224. current Ground current Motor temperature sensor Rapid cycle lockout WK X X X X KL KY X x x Voltage phase imbalance Voltage phase loss Voltage phase reversal Undervoltage Overvoltage Load shedding Underpower Overpower Under power factor Over power factor XIX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X x Xx X the functionality is available with the units indicated the functionality is not available with the units indicated 1639502 12 2006 29 Introduction Control Functions The following table lists the equipment required to support the control functions of the motor management system Control functions LTM R controller LTM R controller with expansion module Motor control modes Local terminal strip X X Local HMI X X Network X X Operating mode Overload X X Independent X X Reverser X X Two step X X Two speed X X Fault Management Manual reset X X Automatic reset X X Remote reset X X X the functionality is available with the units indicated the functionality is not available with the units indicated 30 1639502 12 2006 Introduction Physical Description of the LTM R Motor Management Controller with Profibus Protocol Overview The microprocessor based LTM R controller provides control protection and moni
225. current n 4 424 425 UDint L2 current n 4 426 427 UDint L3 current n 4 428 429 UDint Ground current n 4 1639502 12 2006 497 Use Monitoring Variables Monitoring Monitoring variables are described below Variables Monitoring variable groups Registers Monitoring of faults 450 to 454 Monitoring of status 455 to 459 Monitoring of warnings 460 to 464 Monitoring of measurements 465 to 539 Register Variable type Read only variables Note p 478 450 Ulnt Minimum wait time s 451 Ulnt Fault code code of the last fault or of the fault that takes priority See DT_ExtOperatingMode p 483 452 Word Fault register 1 bits 0 1 Reserved bit 2 Ground current fault bit 3 Thermal overload fault bit 4 Long start fault bit 5 Jam fault bit 6 Current phase imbalance fault bit 7 Undercurrent fault bit 8 Reserved bit 9 Test fault bit 10 HMI port fault bit 11 Controller internal fault bit 12 Internal port fault bit 13 Network port internal fault bit 14 Network port config fault bit 15 Network port fault 498 1639502 12 2006 Use Register Variable type Read only variables Note p 478 453 Word Fault register 2 bit 0 Not significant bit 1 Diagnostic fault bit 2 Wiring fault bit 3 Overcurrent fault bit 4 Current phase loss fau
226. cycle lockout e Counting by another timeout e g thermal time to restart START Motor is in start cycle Run Start cycle complete Run1 Step 1 2 step operating mode Run2 Step 2 2 step operating mode Fwd Forward reverser operating mode Rev Reverse reverser operating mode STOP Stop command issued motor still running above On current level Slow Low speed 2 speed operating mode Fast High speed 2 speed operating mode WARN Warning event detected FAULT Fault event detected Parameter value Parameter Displays the values of parameters specific added to the HMI display LTM R controller 1 2 3 4 5 6 The number 1 6 of each active logic outputs state or x output on the LTM R controller An x indicates an inactive output LTM E inputs LTM E Indicates the inputs displayed in Line C are expansion module inputs 358 1639502 12 2006 Use Line Displays Values Description B1 Control wiring 2W 2 wire maintained configuration 3W 3 wire impulse configuration Unit of measure Parameter Displays the unit of the displayed specific parameter value in the HMI display Outputs Out LTM R controller output state is displayed in Line A B2 Motor operating mode IND Independent type REV Reverser 2ST 2 step 2SP 2 speed OVL Overload Unit of measure Parameter Further describes the unit in Line B1 specific for displayed parameter values
227. d Monitoring Functions The following diagram is an example of the timing sequence for the Run Check Back and Stop Check Back N Start Command d Run Check pax A UG Stop Command n Stop Check Back A N ZA Main Circuit Current __ A 2 4 gt Normal operation Fault or warning condition After the motor enters the run state the LTM R controller continuously monitors the main circuit to detect current until a stop command is given or the function is disabled The LTM R controller continuously monitors the main circuit to detect no current until a Start command is given or the function is disabled The LTM R controller reports a Run Check Back fault and or warning if the current is not detected for longer than 0 5 seconds without a Stop command The LTM R controller reports a Stop Check Back fault or warning if the current is detected for longer than 0 5 seconds without a Start command No current flowing for less than 0 5 seconds Current flowing for less than 0 5 seconds 100 1639502 12 2006 Metering and Monitoring Functions Wiring Faults Description Enabling Fault The LTM R controller checks external wiring connections and reports a fault when it detects incorrect or conflicting external wiring The LTM R controller can detect the following 5 wiring errors CT Reversal Error Phase Configuratio
228. d Phase imbalances register bit O L1 current highest imbalance bit 1 L2 current highest imbalance bit 2 L3 current highest imbalance bit 3 L1 L2 voltage highest imbalance 1 bit 4 L2 L3 voltage highest imbalance 1 bit 5 L3 L1 voltage highest imbalance 1 bits 6 15 Not significant 516 523 Reserved 524 539 Forbidden 504 1639502 12 2006 Use Configuration Variables Configuration Configuration variables are described below Variables Configuration variable groups Registers Configuration 540 to 649 Setting 650 to 699 Register Variable type Read Write variables Note p 478 540 Ulnt Motor operating mode B See DT_ExtOperatingMode p 483 541 Ulnt Motor transition timeout s 542 545 Reserved 546 Ulnt Thermal overload configuration B bits 0 2 Motor temperature sensor type 0 None 1 PTC binary 3 PTC analog 4 NTC analog bits 3 4 Thermal overload mode 0 Definite 1 Inverse thermal bits 5 15 Reserved 547 Ulnt Thermal overload fault definite timeout 548 Reserved 549 Ulnt Motor temperature sensor fault threshold x 0 1 ohm 550 Ulnt Motor temperature sensor warning threshold x 0 1 ohm 551 552 Reserved 553 Ulnt Rapid cycle lockout timeout s 554 Reserved 555 Ulnt Current phase loss timeout 556 Ulnt Overcurrent fault timeout 557 Ulnt Overcurrent fault threshold 558 Ulnt Overcurrent
229. d as a maintenance function to avoid thermal strain on the motor The motor starts per hour function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Accuracy 5 minutes 0 5 minutes Resolution 5 minutes Refresh interval 100 ms Load Sheddings Counter Description The Load Sheddings Count parameter contains the number of times the load sheddings protection function has been activated since the last Clear Statistics Command For information on the Load Sheddings protection function see p 190 108 1639502 12 2006 Metering and Monitoring Functions Last Start Max Current Description The LTM R controller measures the maximum current level reached during the last start of the motor and reports the value in the Motor Last Start Current Ratio parameter for analysis of the system for maintenance purposes Characteristics The last start max current function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Unit of FLC Accuracy 1 for 8 A and 27 A units 2 for 100 A units Resolution 1 FLC Refresh interval 100 ms Last Start Time Description The LTM R controller tracks the duration of the last motor start and reports the value in the Motor Last Start Duration parameter for analysis of the system for maintenance purposes Characteristics The motor last start duration function has the following characteris
230. d on expansion module power loss Internal watchdog faults x x No Controller internal temperature x x No Temperature sensor connections x x No Current transformer connections X X No Voltage transformer connections x No Control command diagnostics start check x x No stop check run check back and stop check back Control configuration checksum x x No Communication loss X X Yes X the functionality is available with the units indicated the functionality is not available with the units indicated 64 1639502 12 2006 Metering and Monitoring Functions Motor History Characteristics Motor history includes the following characteristics Motor statistics LTM R controller LTM R controller with Value saved on expansion module power loss Motor starts count x X Yes Motor LO1 starts count logic output O 1 starts X X Yes Motor LO2 starts count logic output O 2 starts X X Yes Motor starts per hour count x X Yes Load sheddings x X Yes Last start max current X X Yes Last start duration X X No Operating time X X No Max internal controller temperature X X No X the functionality is available with the units indicated the functionality is not available with the units indicated Thermal Overload Statistics Characteristics The thermal overload statistics have the following characteristics Th
231. d power 194 197 high speed full load current ratio 120 135 140 248 370 420 512 last start current 503 last start current ratio 109 375 last start duration 109 375 504 LO1 starts count 108 375 LO2 starts count 108 375 nominal power 48 369 419 506 nominal voltage 48 184 187 330 369 506 operating mode 48 330 366 505 phases 48 101 330 phases sequence 49 123 183 330 369 507 predefined operating mode 225 restart time undefined 500 running 113 499 speed 500 starting 499 starts count 108 375 starts per hour count 108 504 step 1 to 2 threshold 48 242 330 369 step 1 to 2 timeout 48 242 330 369 temp sensor type 49 temperature sensor 78 417 temperature sensor fault threshold 505 temperature sensor type 505 temperature sensor warning threshold 505 transition lockout 500 transition timeout 48 241 242 248 330 369 505 trip class 120 135 370 508 motor control functions 207 motor full load current max n 0 377 426 n 1 378 427 n 2 379 n 3 380 n 4 381 motor full load current ratio n 0 377 426 491 n 1 378 427 492 n 2 379 493 n 3 380 494 n 4 381 495 motor history 107 characteristics 65 last start max current 109 last start time 109 motor operating time 110 motor starts 108 motor starts per hour 108 motor operating mode independent 225 overload 225 reverser 225 two speed 225 two step 225 motor phases seque
232. d red fallback the LTM R controller and network or HMI off no power not in fallback control source BF indicates network status green communication red no communication 1639502 12 2006 33 Introduction Plug in Terminals and Pin Assignments The LTM R controller has the following plug in terminals and pin assignments Terminal block Pin Description Control Voltage Logic Input and A1 supply voltage input Common Source Terminals A2 the negative of a power supply for For information on logic input DC models or the grounded behavior see p 226 secondary of a control power transformer for AC models 11 Logic Input 1 12 Logic Input 2 13 Logic Input 3 14 Logic Input 4 15 Logic Input 5 16 Logic Input 6 C Input common DPST Relay Output Terminals 97 98 NC contact For information on logic output 95 96 NO contact behavior see p 227 Note The 97 98 contacts and the 95 96 contacts are on the same relay so the open closed status of one pair of contacts is always the opposite of the status of the other pair Relay Output Terminals LO1 13 14 NO LO1 23 24 NO LO1 33 34 NO Ground Fault Input Temperature Z1 Z2 connection for external ground fault Sensor Input and PLC Terminals current transformer T1 T2 connection for embedded motor temperature sensing elements S Profibus shield or FE pin
233. derstand how the LTM R controller will be used to be able to configure the protection monitoring and control functions for the application For information about configuring control parameters see p 207 For information about configuring protection parameters see p 115 316 1639502 12 2006 Commissioning Initialization Configuration Tools The LTM R controller is ready to be initialized after the hardware installation is complete To initialize the LTM R controller e be sure the motor is off then e turn on the LTM R controller A CAUTION IMPROPER INITIALIZATION Disconnect power to the motor before initializing the LTM R controller Failure to follow this instruction can result in injury or equipment damage Neither the LTM R controller nor the expansion module require additional hardware configuration for example turning dials or setting dip switches to be initialized When powered up for the first time the LTM R controller enters an initial state and is ready for commissioning Identify the configuration control source and the configuration tool before configuring parameters The LTM R controller and expansion module can be configured locally using an HMI device or remotely via the network connection The LTM R controller can be commissioned using ea Magelis XBTN410 HMI on which a 1 to 1 software application has been installed e aPC running PowerSuite software e a PLC connec
234. dition to the required parameters you may also need to configure additional optional parameters In the Magelis XBTN410 HMI optional parameters are found in the Main menu In PowerSuite software they are found in the Settings branch of the tree control along will the required parameters 1639502 12 2006 323 Commissioning General Parameters Required parameters include the following general settings Parameter name Setting range Factory default Sys Confg Main Language e English e Fran ais e Espa ol e Deutsch Italiano English X Date And Time Setting Year e 2006 2099 2006 Month e January February March April May June July August September October November December January Day e 1 31 Hour 00 23 00 Minute e 00 59 00 Second e 00 59 00 X X The parameter is located in the indicated menu in the Magelis XBTN410 HMI 1 to 1 The parameter is not located in the indicated menu in the Magelis XBTN410 HMI 1 to 1 324 1639502 12 2006 Commissioning Motor Required parameters include the following motor settings Parameters Parameter name Setting range Factory default Sys Config Main Motor Nominal Voltage 110 690 V 400 V x x Motor Phases e 3 phase motor 3 phase motor X e 1 phase motor Motor Phases Sequence e A B C A B C X X
235. e Select 1 Home page Starters currents or Starters status 2 Starters Currents page or Starters Status page LTM R controller number 3 Motor Starter page Statistics For information on navigating the 1 to many menu structure see p 404 From the settings page you can navigate to and read the following statistics Level 4 Level 5 Parameter name Statistics Addr 1 8 MaxTemp LTMR OperTime Voltage Phase Imbalance Fault Enable AllStarts Voltage Phase Imbalance Fault Threshold LastStartDur Voltage Phase Imbalance Fault Timeout Starting LastStartAmp Voltage Phase Imbalance Fault Timeout Running All Faults Voltage Phase Imbalance Warning Enable Overload Flts Voltage Phase Imbalance Warning Threshold Overload Warn Curr Imb Fits Voltage Phase Loss Fault Enable LongStart Fits Voltage Phase Loss Fault Timeout UnderCurr Flts Voltage Phase Loss Warning Enable Ground Faults Voltage Phase Reversal Fault Enable HMI Loss Fits Ntwk Int Fits Overvoltage Fault Enable Ntwk Cnfg Fits Overvoltage Fault Threshold Ntwk Port Fits Overvoltage Fault Timeout Internal Fits Overvoltage Warning Enable InterPort Flts Overvoltage Warning Threshold 1639502 12 2006 425 Use Level 4 Level 5 Parameter name Statistics Addr 1 8 Fault n
236. e the LTM R controller will respond to Stop commands from any local control source When logic input 1 6 is inactive the default control mode is Local Terminal Strip For a predefined operating mode only one control source may be enabled to direct the outputs You can use the custom logic editor to add one or more additional control sources 210 1639502 12 2006 Motor Control Functions Local Terminal In Local Terminal Strip control mode the LTM R controller commands its outputs Strip according to the state of its inputs This is the default control mode setting when logic input I 6 is inactive The following conditions apply to Local Terminal Strip control mode e Any terminal inputs assigned to start and stop commands control the outputs according to the motor operating mode e When a logic input is active it sets a bit in the Logic Input number 1 to 6 parameter for monitoring by the PLC e HMI and PLC network start commands are ignored Local HMI In Local HMI control mode the LTM R controller commands its outputs in response to start and stop commands received from an HMI device connected to the Local HMI port via theLocal HMI RJ45 connector on either the LTM R controller or the expansion module The following conditions apply to Local HMI control mode e Any HMI start and stop commands control the outputs according to the motor operating mode e All terminal inputs when active place bits int
237. e Level x x x Xx Voltage Phase Imbalance XIX X X X X XxX XxX X Xx X Monitored Not monitored 216 1639502 12 2006 Motor Control Functions Protection Category Monitored Fault Warning Operating states Sys Config Ready Not Ready Start Run Power Power Factor Over Power Factor Level X Under Power Factor Level x Overpower Level X Underpower Level X X Monitored Not monitored 217 1639502 12 2006 Motor Control Functions Start Cycle Description The start cycle is the time period allowed for the motor to reach its normal FLC level The LTM R controller measures the start cycle in seconds beginning when it detects On Level Current defined as maximum phase current equal to 10 of FLC During the start cycle the LTM R controller compares e detected current against the configurable Long Start Fault Threshold parameter and e elapsed start cycle time against the configurable Long Start Fault Timeout parameter There are 3 start cycle scenarios each based on the number of times O 1or 2 maximum phase current crosses the Long Start Fault Threshold A description of each scenario is described below For information on the statistics the LTM R controller retains describing motor starts see p 65 For information about the long start protection function se
238. e Phase Imbalance Description The voltage phase imbalance function signals e a warning when the voltage in any composed phase differs by more than a set percentage from the average voltage in all 3 phases e afault when the voltage in any composed phase differs by more than a separately set percentage from the average voltage in all 3 phases for a set period of time Note A composed phase is the combined measure of two phases L1 L2 L2 L3 or L3 L1 This function has two adjustable fault time delays e one applies to voltage imbalances occurring while the motor is in start state and e one applies to voltage imbalances occurring while the motor is in run state or when the long start time duration expires Both timers begin if the imbalance is detected in start state Note Use this function to detect and guard against smaller voltage phase imbalances For larger imbalances in excess of 40 of the average voltage in all 3 phases use the voltage phase loss motor protection function This function is available in start state and run state when the LTM R controller is connected to an expansion module The function identifies the phase causing a voltage imbalance If the maximum deviation from the 3 phase voltage average is the same for two phases the function identifies both phases Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled The function applies only to 3 phase motors
239. e bus 308 connection to Profibus DP 310 contactor rating 45 330 508 control bumpless transfer mode 513 direct transition 48 241 248 330 369 local channel setting 46 210 369 419 513 principles 223 register 1 515 register 2 515 setting register 513 terminal strip mode 513 control circuit 2 wire 226 3 wire 226 control modes 209 210 local HMI 211 local terminal strip 211 network 211 selecting 210 control via HMI 499 control voltage characteristics LTM R controller 39 control wiring 226 controller altitude derating 41 commercial reference 382 428 487 compatibility code 487 config checksum 503 firmware version 382 487 ID code 487 internal fault 95 103 internal faults count 92 376 internal temperature 96 503 internal temperature max 110 375 489 internal temperature warning enable 96 port ID 503 power 499 serial number 487 system config required 321 330 355 387 507 counters communication loss 92 internal faults 92 introduction 88 current average 73 503 582 1639502 12 2006 Index ground 503 L1 503 L2 503 L3 503 phase imbalance 417 range max 487 scale ratio 487 sensor max 487 current highest imbalance L1 504 L2 504 L3 504 current motor protection functions parameter setting ranges 119 current phase imbalance 75 93 141 503 fault enable 120 144 370 420 fault threshold 120 144 370 420 508 fault timeout running 120 144
240. e fault resets the Auto Reset Attempts Group number 1 2 or 3 Setting parameter A WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION An auto reset command may restart the motor if the LTM R controller is used in a 2 wire control circuit Equipment operation must conform to local and national safety regulations and codes Failure to follow this instruction can result in death serious injury or equipment damage 260 1639502 12 2006 Motor Control Functions Reset Behavior After power is cycled the LTM R controller clears and sets to 0 the values of the following parameters e Auto Reset Group number 1 2 or 3 Timeout and e Auto Reset Group number 1 2 or 3 Setting On a successful reset the Number of Resets count is cleared and set to 0 A reset is successful if after reset the motor runs for 1 minute without a fault of a type in the designated group Emergency Use the Clear Thermal Capacity Level Command in applications where it is Restart necessary to clear the Thermal Capacity Level parameter following a Thermal Overload inverse thermal fault This command permits an emergency restart before the motor has actually cooled It also clears and sets to 0 auto restart group timeout and number of auto resets statistics A WARNING LOSS OF MOTOR PROTECTION Clearing the thermal capacity level inhibits thermal protection and can cause equipment overheating and fire Continued operation with inhibit
241. e is not performing load shedding e is not counting down the rapid cycle timer e is ready to start Not Ready e The motor is stopped and is not receiving current e The LTM R controller e detects a fault e is performing load shedding e is counting down the rapid cycle timer Start e The motor begins to receive current The LTM R controller e detects that current has reached the On Level Current threshold e detects that current has not both crossed and re crossed the long start fault threshold e continues to count down the long start fault timer Run e The motor continues to receive current TheLTM R controller detects that current has both crossed and re crossed the long start fault threshold before the LTM R controller fully counted down the long start fault timer 214 1639502 12 2006 Motor Control Functions Operating State The operating states of the LTM R controller firmware as the motor progresses Chart from Off to Run state are described below The LTM R controller verifies current in each operating state The LTM R controller can transition to an internal fault condition from any operating state al System Config initial state Config needed Config complete Config needed No fault no load shed rapid cycle timer expired Not Ready Ready Fault or load shed lavg gt 10
242. e or several power generation and transport sites via the internet TeSys T Motor Management System The two main hardware components of the system are the LTM R Controller and the LTM E Expansion Module The system can be configured and controlled using a Magelis HMI device PC with PowerSuite software or remotely over the network using a PLC Components such as external load current transformers and ground current transformers add additional range to the system 18 1639502 12 2006 Introduction LTM R Controller The range includes six LTM R controller models using Profibus communication protocol The microprocessor based LTM R controller is the central component in the system that manages the control protection and monitoring functions of single phase and 3 phase AC induction motors The LTM R controller is designed to work over various fieldbus protocols This manual focuses only on systems designed to communicate over the Profibus protocol LTM R controller Functional description Reference number current sensing 0 4 100 A single phase or 3 phase current inputs 6 discrete logic inputs 4 relay outputs 3 SPST 1 DPST connections for a ground current sensor connection for a motor temperature sensor connection for network connection for HMI device or expansion module motor control functions power indicator fault and warning LED indicators network communica
243. e p 149 Start Cycle During the start cycle the LTM R controller transitions through the motor s operating Operating States states as follows Step Event Operating state 1 LTM R controller receives a start command input signal Ready 2 The LTM R controller confirms that all startup preconditions Ready exist e g no faults load shedding or rapid cycle timer 3 The LTM R controller closes the appropriate output contacts Ready designated as terminals 13 14 or 23 24 thereby closing the control circuit of the motor starting contactors 4 The LTM R controller detects that maximum phase current Start exceeds the On Level Current threshold 5 The LTM R controller detects that current rises above and then Run falls below the Long Start Fault Threshold before the Long Start Fault Timeout timer expires 218 1639502 12 2006 Motor Control Functions 2 Threshold In this start cycle scenario the start cycle executes successfully Crosses e Current rises above then drops below the fault threshold e TheLTM R controller reports the actual start cycle time i e the time elapsed from detection of On Level Current until the maximum phase current drops below the fault threshold Start cycle with 2 threshold crosses single step l A IS pS EEES re eaten SA eh Geert Sid cee aim ie Bi Start time 10 FLC gt i Long start faul
244. e pursuant to DIN standards typically 35 mm wide that allows for easier snap on mounting of IEC electrical devices including the LTM R controller and the expansion module Contrast with screw mounting of devices to a control panel by drilling and tapping holes Describes inputs e g switches or outputs e g coils that can be only On or Off Contrast with analog 576 1639502 12 2006 Glossary DPST double pole single throw A switch that connects or disconnects two circuit conductors in a single branch circuit A DPST switch has 4 terminals and is the equivalent of two single pole single throw switches controlled by a single mechanism as depicted below sS F FLA full load amperes Same as full load current FLC FLC full load current Also known as rated current The current the motor will draw at the rated voltage and rated load The LTM R controller has two FLC settings FLC1 Motor Full Load Current Ratio and FLC2 Motor High Speed Full Load Current Ratio each set as a percentage of FLC max FLC1 Motor Full Load Current Ratio FLC parameter setting for low or single speed motors Setting range 5 100 of FLC max Default setting 25 of FLC max FLC2 Motor High Speed Full Load Current Ratio FLC parameter setting for high speed motors Setting range 5 100 of FLC max Default setting 25 of FLC max FLCmax Full Load Current Max Peak current parameter Setting ranges from 1 8400 A in increments of
245. eaters maximum of 125 with 3 repeaters in 4 segments 452 1639502 12 2006 Use General Information on Implementation via Profibus DP Overview Cyclic Acyclic Services DP V1 Read Write Services PKW Feature The Profibus DP LTM R controller supports a Profibus application profile based on DP VO and DP V1 services Motor Management Starter MMS In general data is exchanged via cyclic services and via acyclic services The application profiles define for the cyclic data e manufacturer independent data e manufacturer specific data The fixed set and defined use of manufacturer independent data enables the replacement of a module from vendor A by a module from vendor B DP V1 read and write services enable access to the data that cannot be accessed by cyclic data exchange In order to make this data accessible also for DP VO masters a special feature called PKW Periodically Kept in acyclic Words is implemented In cyclically exchanged data there are encapsulated request and response frames They provide access to TeSys T system s internal registers See PKW Encapsulated Acyclic Accesses in DP VO p 467 Note This feature can be selected or deselected by choosing the relevant item module from the list offered during configuration with any Profibus configuration tool 1639502 12 2006 453 Use Electronic Device Description The TeSys T
246. ed The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained local control with network control selectable wiring diagram L Local control O Off N Network control LS Low Speed HS High Speed Control ae Selectable Tp paa Fi onl gore I ds 554 1639502 12 2006 NEMA Format Wiring Diagrams NEMA Wiring Diagrams Overview This section contains the wiring diagrams corresponding to the 5 pre configured operating modes Overload Monitoring of the motor load where control start stop of the motor load is achieved by a mechanism other than the controller Independent Direct on line across the line full voltage non reversing motor starting applications Reverser Direct on line across the line full voltage reversing motor starting applications Two Step Reduced voltage starting motor applications including e Wye Delta Open Transition Primary Resistor Open Transition Autotransformer Two Speed Two speed motor applications for motor types including Single winding consequent pole Separate winding Each application is described individually with 1 complete application diagram 3 wire impulse local control including power and control 3 partial diagrams control logic input wiring variants 2 wire maintained local control 3 wire impulse local control with network control selectable 2 wire main
247. ed for overload predefined operating mode uses the change in state from off to on level current to begin the Start state This delay allows the motor to draw current on startup required to overcome the inertia of the motor at rest 138 1639502 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Functional Characteristics Block Diagram Note Configuration of this protection function requires configuration of the Long Start protection function including the Long Start Fault Timeout parameter This function applies to both single phase and 3 phase motors The thermal overload definite time function includes the following features e 2 configurable threshold settings one setting OC1 is used for single speed motors both settings are required for 2 speed motors e OC1 Motor Full Load Current Ratio or e OC2 Motor High Speed Full Load Current Ratio e 1 time delay e Overcurrent Time O Time set by the Thermal Overload Fault Definite Timeout parameter e 2 function outputs e Thermal Overload Warning e Thermal Overload Fault e 2 counting statistics e Thermal Overload Faults Count e Thermal Overload Warnings Count Thermal overload warning and fault 1 12 13 gt Imax Imax gt Is Run state pE gt amp Imax Imax gt Is AND 11 Phase 1 current 12 Phase 2 current I3 Phase 3 current Is Fault and warning threshold OC1
248. ed thermal protection must be limited to applications where immediate restart is vital Failure to follow this instruction can result in death serious injury or equipment damage Number of Each protection group can be set to manual 1 2 3 4 or unlimited automatic reset attempts Resets Select 0 to disable automatic reset of protection fault groups and require a manual reset even though the Fault Reset Mode parameter is configured for automatic reset Select A to enable a unlimited auto reset attempts After the time delay has expired the LTM R controller continually attempts to reset every fault in that reset group 1639502 12 2006 261 Motor Control Functions Auto Reset Group 1 Auto Reset Group 2 Group 1 faults require a pre defined cooling time after the monitored parameter returns to and falls below a pre defined threshold Group 1 faults include Thermal Overload and Motor Temp Sensor faults The cooling time delay is non configurable However you can e add to the cooling time delay by setting the Auto Reset Group 1 Timeout parameter to a value greater than 0 or e disable auto reset by setting the Auto Reset Group 1 Timeout parameter to 0 Auto reset group 1 has the following configurable parameters Parameters Setting range Factory setting Auto Reset Attempts Group 1 0 manual 1 2 3 4 A unlimited A Setting number of reset attempts Auto Reset Group 1 Timeout 0 65535 s 480
249. ee Ae ee ees cer dies 87 Introducing Fault and Warning Counters 0 0 00 eee eee 88 All Faults Counters ose e ree ee a heey ey Reve ee Rl se ee 89 All Warnings Counter 0 2 0 eens 89 Auto Reset Counter s is dn gus Sep Sk i ee ee a ee a es 89 Protection Faults and Warnings Counters 0 00 c eee eee eee 90 Control Command Errors Counter a a sssaaa ete 91 Wiring Faults Counter 0 0 0 0 cette 91 Communication Loss Counters 0 0 0 0 0 cette 92 Internal Fault Counters 0 0 ete ee 92 Fault Histone boa ered ee eee heed oe ed hh kee ee AP WS 93 System and Device Monitoring Faults 0 0 0 cee eee eee 94 OVE RVIGW wis ees GE ah as eae et Ge eee ee Se Es 94 Controller Internal Fault 0 0 0 ee eee 95 Controller Internal Temperature 1 0 0 0 cee eee 96 Control Command Diagnostic Errors asss ee 98 Wiring Faults 33 ee s bises boa PE ee heb eee bie eee 101 Controller Configuration Checksum 0 00 saaana 103 Communication LOSS aaaea cect 104 Motor HiStOy e 43 Sahn et do dy Ee Pe eee eee 107 OVENVIEW niyin Pea ese Ok ad ae ee ee ee E Y 107 Motor Starts errero nieee the eo PM ened Been Peed beta 108 Motor Starts Per Hour 0 0 eee eee 108 Load Sheddings Counter 0 0 cece eee 108 Last Start Max Current 0 0 0 0 cette ee 109 Last Start TMG sis 2 Pe athe es Ae eek eden Pen eee 109 Motor Operating Time 0 0 0 eee 110 Maximum Internal Controll
250. eference Current Th Overload Fault Enable Thermal Overload Fault Enable Trip Type Thermal Overload Mode FLC1 or OC1 Motor Full Load Current Ratio FLC2 or OC2 Motor High Speed Full Load Current Ratio Trip Class Motor Trip Class Aux Fan Motor Aux Fan Cooled Reset Level Thermal Overload Fault Reset Threshold Def O Time Thermal Overload Fault Definite Timeout Def D Time Long Start Fault Timeout Warn Enable Thermal Overload Warning Enable Warn Level Thermal Overload Warning Threshold Clr ThEnable Clear Thermal Capacity Level Command Curr Ph Imb Fault Enable Current Phase Imbalance Fault Enable Fault Level Current Phase Imbalance Fault Threshold FitTimeStart Current Phase Imbalance Fault Timeout Starting FitTimeRun Current Phase Imbalance Fault Timeout Running Warn Enable Current Phase Imbalance Warning Enable Warn Level Current Phase Imbalance Warning Threshold 370 1639502 12 2006 Use Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Parameter name reference Current continued Curr Ph Loss Fault Enable Current Phase Loss Fault Enable Fault Time Current Phase Loss Fault Timeout Warn Enable Current Phase Loss Warning Enable Curr Ph Rev Fault Enable Current Phase Reversal Fault Enable Long Start Fault Enable Long Start Fault Enable Fault Level Long Start Fault Threshold Fault Time Long Start Fault Timeout Jam Fault Enable Jam Fault Enable Fault Level Jam Fault Thresh
251. ements PowerSuite software Functional description Reference number commission the system through menu entries LTM CONF e configure the system through menu entries display warnings and faults Additional components required for PowerSuite software aPC separate power source e LTM R LTM E to PC communication cable VW3A8106 PC communications cable Magelis XBTN410 HMI The system uses the Magelis XBTN410 HMI human machine interface device with a liquid crystal display and navigation buttons for metering configuring and operating the LTM R controller This HMI device is compact in size for door mounted applications It must be programmed using XBTL1000 programming software Magelis XBT HMI Functional description Reference number commission the system through menu entries configure the system through menu entries display warnings and faults Additional components required for an optional HMI device separate power source e LTM R LTM E to HMI communication cable e Magelis XBTL1000 programming software XBTN410 HMI XBTZ938 cable XBTL1000 software 20 1639502 12 2006 Introduction Current External load current transformers expand the current range for use with motors Transformers greater than 100 full load Amperes External ground current transformers measure
252. empt is successful defined as the same fault not recurring within 60 s this counter is reset to zero If a fault is reset either manually or remotely the counter is not incremented For information on fault management see p 254 1639502 12 2006 89 Metering and Monitoring Functions Protection Faults and Warnings Counters Protection Fault Each protection function has a counter that contains the total number of faults for Counts that protection function that occurred since the Clear Statistics Command last executed Protection function counters include Current Phase Imbalance Faults Count Current Phase Loss Faults Count Current Phase Reversal Faults Count Ground Current Faults Count Jam Faults Count Long Start Faults Count Motor Temp Sensor Faults Count Over Power Factor Faults Count Overcurrent Faults Count Overpower Faults Count Overvoltage Faults Count Thermal Overload Faults Count Under Power Factor Faults Count Undercurrent Faults Count Underpower Faults Count Undervoltage Faults Count Voltage Phase Imbalance Faults Count Voltage Phase Loss Faults Count Voltage Phase Reversal Faults Count When the LTM R controller increments any of the above protection function counters it also increments the Faults Count parameter Protection The Thermal Overload Warnings Count parameter contains the total number of Warning Counts warnings for the thermal overload protection function When any warning o
253. en the Config via network port enable parameter is enabled e Local L configuration mode preserves the local configuration made via the HMI port This type of module is selected when the Config via network port enable parameter is disabled Modules with Short and long description of modules with PKW PKW Short description as shown in the GSD Long description MMC R PKW Motor Management Controller remote configuration mode MMC R PKW EV40 Motor Management Controller LTM EV40 remote configuration mode MMC L PKW Motor Management Controller Ilocal configuration mode MMC L PKW EV40 Motor Management Controller LTM EV40 local configuration mode 1639502 12 2006 455 Use Profibus DP Configuration via the SyCon Configuration Tool Introduction Configuration of a TeSys T System With SyCon you can configure the Profibus DP network and generate an ASCII file to import into the PLC configuration into Unity Pro or PL7 or Concept The starting point for this example is a configuration that includes a Premium PLC as the Profibus DP master and a slave in a Profibus DP network The SyCon version used is V2 9 and higher Example of a network configuration Step Action 1 Import your GSD file with File Copy GSD 2 Insert a master click Insert Master or select ha In the Insert Master window select a master e g CIF60
254. ency enable 383 512 ground current enable 384 512 I O status enable 383 512 items register 1 512 items register 2 513 L1 current enable 384 512 L1 current ratio enable 384 513 L1 L2 current enable 384 L1 L2 voltage enable 513 L2 current enable 384 512 L2 current ratio enable 384 513 L2 L3 voltage enable 384 513 L3 current enable 384 512 L3 current ratio enable 384 513 L3 L1 voltage enable 384 513 last fault enable 383 512 max current phase enable 384 512 motor temperature sensor enable 512 power consumption enable 513 power factor enable 384 513 reactive power enable 384 512 starts per hour enable 383 512 thermal capacity level enable 383 512 thermal capacity remaining enable 513 time enable 383 513 time to trip enable 383 513 voltage phase imbalance enable 384 513 HMI keypad password 444 507 HMI keys independent operating mode 236 overload operating mode 233 reverser operating mode 240 two speed operating mode 251 two step operating mode 246 HMI language 511 HMI language setting 46 Deutsch 511 English 511 Espa ol 511 Frangais 511 Italiano 511 HMI port address setting 50 374 507 baud rate setting 50 374 415 507 comm loss 500 endian setting 507 fallback setting 105 374 511 fault enable 50 105 374 424 fault time 50 faults count 92 376 parity setting 50 374 415 507 warning enable 50 105 374 hysteresis 128 I O status 501 implementat
255. ended power wiring as described in the power wiring diagram The list of faults and warnings in Look for any of the following faults or warnings PowerSuite software or the overpower LCD display of the Magelis XBTN410 HMI underpower e over power factor under power factor The list of all or read only parameters in Look for unexpected values in the following PowerSuite software or the scrolling HMI parameters display of the Magelis XBTN410 HMI e active power reactive power power factor 1639502 12 2006 335 Commissioning Control Circuit Wiring To verify control circuit wiring check the following Look at Action The control wiring diagram Visually confirm that the actual control wiring matches the intended control wiring as described in the control wiring diagram The LTM R controller Power LED If the LED is off the LTM R controller may not be receiving power The LTM R controller HMI LED If the LED is off the LTM R controller may not be communicating with the expansion module The expansion module Power LED If the LED is off the expansion module may not be receiving power Current Verify the load current transformer wiring and if the application includes external Transformer load current transformers also verify that wiring by checking the following Wiring Look at Action The external CT wiring d
256. ent failure has been discovered and corrected Auto reset group 3 has the following configurable parameters Parameters Setting range Factory setting Auto Reset Attempts Group 3 Setting 0 manual 1 2 3 4 A unlimited number of reset attempts 0 Auto Reset Group 3 Timeout 0 65535 s 60s 1639502 12 2006 263 Motor Control Functions Auto Reset The LTM R controller allows the following auto reset methods Methods Protection Monitored fault Control mode category Local terminal strip Local HMI Network Diagnostic Run Command Check RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 NC Stop Command Check RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 NC Run Check Back RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 NC Stop Check Back RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 NC Wiring PTC connection RB PC I 5 RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 configuration CT Reversal RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 SREE Voltage Phase Reversal RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 Current Phase Reversal RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 Voltage Phase Loss RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 Phase Configuration RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 NC Internal Stack Overflow PC PC PC Watchdog PC PC PC ROM Checksum PC PC PC EEROM PC PC PC CPU PC PC PC Internal Temperature PC PC PC Motor temp PTC Binary AU G1 AU G1 AU G1 SENSON PTC Analog AU G1 AU G1 AU G1
257. epends on the nature of the fault that has occurred and how the related protection function is configured For example Thermal faults can be reset after the Fault Reset Timeout counts down and the utilized thermal capacity falls below the Fault Reset Threshold level If the fault includes a reset timeout setting the timeout must fully count down before a reset command executes Internal device faults can be reset only by cycling power LTM R controller memory does not retain diagnostic and wiring faults after a power loss but does retain all other faults after a power loss Internal diagnostic and wiring faults cannot be automatically reset All wiring and diagnostic faults can be manually reset by local reset methods For diagnostic faults network reset commands are valid only in remote network control mode For wiring faults network reset commands are not valid in any control mode The LTM R controller fault monitoring functions save the status of communications monitoring and motor protection faults on a power loss so that these faults must be acknowledged and reset as part of an overall motor maintenance strategy Protection category Monitored fault LTM R controller LTM R controller with expansion module Saved on power loss Diagnostic Run Command Check Stop Command Check Run Check Back Stop Check Back Wiring configuration errors PTC connection CT Reversal x x Xx x
258. eps Program checksum error 1 Cycle power RAM fest 2 Wait 30s eee 3 If the fault persists replace the LTM R controller Stack overflow Stack underflow Watchdog timeout Minor Invalid configuration error Indicates either a bad checksum Config checksum error or good internal Configuration checksum checksum but bad data Invalid config error Both caused by hardware faults EEROM error failure Take the following steps 1 Cycle power and wait 30 s 2 Reset the configuration settings to factory defaults 3 If the fault persists replace the LTM R controller Internal network These faults indicate a hardware failure Take the following steps communications failure 1 Cycle power and wait 30 s AID out of range error 2 If the fault persists replace the LTM R controller 1639502 12 2006 523 Maintenance Type Error Action Diagnostic Start command check Check the following errors Stop command check e relay outputs e all wiring including e control wiring circuit including all electromechanical devices Run check back e power wiring circuit including all components e load CT wiring Stop check back After all checks are complete 1 Reset the fault 2 Ifthe fault persists cycle power and wait 30 s 3 If the fault persists replace the LTM R controller 524 1639502 12 2006 Maintenance Type Error Action Wiring CT reversal error Correct the polarity of the CTs
259. er Temperature 0 00 c eee eee eee 110 Thermal Overload Statistics 0 2 eee 111 Time to Tip tia cd bye cece shine Siew ae iho ice Mi tehaledei ea bib R a wa deb ayers 111 System Operating Status 2 0 eee 112 OVEIVIEW herds ee cea n p 0 Riba hee Pe ee vee bee 112 MotorState s E et ey tie Se ld a sie fe St Te ee ag 113 Chapter 4 4 1 4 2 4 3 44 Chapter 5 5 1 5 2 Minimum Wait Time 0 0 0 0 0 0 ee eee eee eee 113 Motor Protection Functions 000000 eeu eees 115 Motor Protection Functions Introduction 0 00 cece eee eee 116 Motor Protection Functions 0 0 00 cee ee eee 117 Setting Ranges of the Motor Protection Functions 0 119 Motor Protection CharacteristicS 0 0 0 ee eee ee 125 Thermal and Current Motor Protection Functions 0000 129 Thermal QVeEMOads neron Fe Ges yF rete e 4 wy OS ee epee A ees a On Mow yee ts awe 130 Thermal Overload Inverse Thermal 0 0 000 131 Thermal Overload Definite Time 0 2 0 00 es 138 Current Phase Imbalance 0 0 00 eee eee 141 Curent Phase LOSS ccf ego oe ed secede Sec de silage nye ace a asa bce ebay eee 145 Current Phase Reversal 0 0 00 ccc cece eee ee nents 148 Longistalts error Sys in Ae eye den fats et oe ee Sik dee Gud aS Get 149 a AM ce ese A a eee h obenr oun aves ae Sabo naehies ae eae eo rama ice ar oa hanes 151 W
260. erSuite software Note Although the LTM R controller can be operated without a user interface you must to use one of the following devices for the purpose of configuring parameters After parameters are configured the device can be detached and the LTM R controller can operate in stand alone configuration Parameters can be configured using either After LTM R controller parameters are configured use the following controls to operate the LTM R controller Use this control To e LEDs e 5LTMR controller LEDs e 5 expansion module LEDs Monitor the state of the LTM R controller and expansion module e LTM R controller Test Reset button Manage faults Programmed operating parameters Digital inputs e 6LTMR controller inputs e 4 expansion module inputs Control the LTM R controller expansion module motor power and control wiring any connected sensors including e motor temp sensors e external ground fault CTs Programmed protection parameters Protect the LTM R controller expansion module motor equipment 1639502 12 2006 343 Use Configurations The stand alone physical configurations of the LTM R controller with and without a connected expansion module are depicted below The LTM R controller alone 1OOCOCOOOOOOOP OOOO
261. erating Mode 2 wire maintained 3 wire impulse 1639502 12 2006 319 Commissioning Commissioning information Specific information or parameter Selections Control source Control Local Channel Setting e Local terminal only e Local HMI only e Remote only e Selectable Remote HMI e Selectable Remote terminal Control transition type If Selectable Bumpless Transition Mode Bump e Bumpless External Load CTs Used in application e No e Yes If yes Load CT Primary e 1 65535 If yes Load CT Secondary e 1 500 Load CT Multiple Passes e 1 100 Ground fault CT settings optional Used in application e No e Yes If Yes Ground CT Primary e 1 65535 If Yes Ground CT Secondary e 1 65535 Motor temperature sensor Type used in application e None e Binary e PTC analog e NTC analog If PTC analog or NTC analog Known Wiring resistance e Not known If PTC analog or NTC analog e 100 5100 Q in 0 1 Q increments Fault Threshold and Warning Threshold Trip resistance Required The source of much of the required information described above will be documents Documents that describe your application These documents can include e wiring diagrams for the LTM R controller and expansion module e alist of all general parameters and protection parameters that must be configured and the setting value for each parameter e design documents for the motor application
262. erence number of the unit Itis stored in units of 0 1 A and has one of the following values 8 0 27 0 or 100 0 A The Contactor rating is stored in units of 0 1 A and is set by the user between 1 0 and 1000 0 A FLCmax is defined as the lower of the Current sensor max and the Contactor rating values FLCmin Current sensor max 20 rounded to the nearest 0 01 A FLCmin is stored internally in units of 0 01 A Note Do not set the FLC below FLCmin Conversion of FLC values are stored as a percentage of FLCmax AmperestoFLC FLC FLC FLCmax Settings Note FLC values must be expressed as a percentage of FLCmax granularity of 1 If you enter an unauthorized value the LTM R will round it up to the nearest authorized value For example on a 0 4 8A unit the step between FLCs is 0 08A If you try to set an FLC of 0 43A the LTM R will round it up to 0 4A 1639502 12 2006 327 Commissioning Example 1 No External CTs Example 2 No External CTs Multiple Passes Example 3 External CTs Reduced Contactor Rating FLC 0 43A Current range max 8 0A Load CT primary 1 Load CT secondary 1 Passes 1 Contactor rating 810 0 A Load CT ratio Load CT primary Load CT secondary passes 1 1 1 1 0 Current sensor max Current range max Load CT ratio 8 0 1 0 8 0 A FLCmax min Current sensor max Contactor rating min 8 0 810 0 8 0A FLCmin Current sensor max 20
263. ermal overload display parameters LTM R controller LTM R controller with Value saved on expansion module power loss Time to trip x X No Time to reset X X No X the functionality is available with the units indicated the functionality is not available with the units indicated 1639502 12 2006 65 Metering and Monitoring Functions System Operating Status Characteristics The system operating status has the following characteristics System operating status LTM R controller LTM R controller with Value saved on expansion module power loss Motor Running x x No On X X No Ready X x No Fault X X No Warning X X No X the functionality is available with the units indicated the functionality is not available with the units indicated 66 1639502 12 2006 Metering and Monitoring Functions 3 2 Measurements Overview Introduction The LTM R controller and the expansion module record real time measurements or calculated values from current voltage or temperature analog inputs The LTM R controller uses these measurements to perform protection control monitoring and logic functions Each measurement is described in detail in this section Data Access The measurements may be accessed via e aPCwith PowerSuite software e the Magelis XBTN410 HMI device e a PLC via the remote communication link
264. ers Two step operating mode has the following parameters Parameter Setting range Factory setting Motor step 1 to 2 timeout 0 999 9s 5s Motor transition timeout 0 999 9 s 100 ms Motor step 1 to 2 threshold 20 800 FLC in 150 FLC 1 increments 1639502 12 2006 247 Motor Control Functions Two Speed Operating Mode Description Use Two Speed operating mode in two speed motor applications for motor types such as e Dahlander consequent pole e Pole Changer Functional This function includes the following features Characteristics Accessible in 3 control modes Local Terminal Strip Local HMI and Network e Firmware interlocking prevents simultaneous activation of O 1 low speed and 0 2 high speed logic outputs e Two measures of FLC e FLC1 Motor Full Load Current Ratio at low speed e FLC2 Motor High Speed Full Load Current Ratio at high speed e The LTM R controller can change speed in two scenarios e The Control Direct Transition bit is Off requires a Stop command followed by expiration of the Motor Transition Timeout e The Control Direct Transition bit is On automatically transitions from high speed to low speed after a time out of the adjustable Motor Transition Timeout e In local terminal strip control mode logic input 1 1 controls logic output O 1 and logic input 1 2 controls logic output O 2 e In network or local HMI control modes when the Motor Run Forward Command parameter is
265. escribes communication speed and parity programming software and LTM R controller firmware 412 1639502 12 2006 Use Menu Structure All LTM R Controllers and the HMI 1 to many Overview Starters Currents Page Starters Status Page Pages located in level 2 of the menu structure contain e information and commands for up to 8 connected LTM R controllers or e fault information for all LTM R controller or e information about the Magelis XBTN410 HMI All level 2 menu structure pages are accessible from the Home page For information about navigating the 1 to many menu structure see p 404 Use the Starters Currents page to monitor the Average Current Ratio for all connected LTM R controllers and to navigate to other pages as described below Level 2 Description STARTERS CURRENTS z 4 11 XXXX I5 XXXX Opens the Motor Starter page for the 4 12 XXXX I6 XXXX gt selected LTM R controller 1 8 4 13 XXXX I7 XXXX gt 4 14 XXXX IB XXXX gt Starters status Opens the Starters Status page Remote reset Opens the Remote Reset page Home Returns to the Home page Use the Starters Status page to monitor the System On and System Fault status of all connected LTM R controllers and to navigate to other pages as described below Level 2 Description STARTERS STATUS 1 XXX 5 XXX 4 2 XXX 6 XXX 4 3 XXX T XXX 4 4 XXX
266. eset This marks the time after which a reset can be executed A start command is required before run state can be resumed In this example auto reset has been enabled 1639502 12 2006 167 Motor Protection Functions Motor Temperature Sensor PTC Analog Description Functional Characteristics Block Diagram The PTC Analog motor temperature sensing function is enabled when the Motor Temp Sensor Type parameter is set to PTC Analog and the LTM R controller is connected to an analog PTC thermistor embedded in the motor The LTM R controller monitors the state of the temperature sensing element and signals e amotor temperature sensor warning when the measured resistance exceeds a configurable warning threshold e amotor temperature sensor fault when the measured resistance exceeds a separately set fault threshold The fault or warning condition continues until the measured resistance falls below 95 of the fault or warning threshold There is no time delay to the motor temperature sensor fault or warning Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled The function is available for all operating states It applies to both single phase and 3 phase motors The PTC Analog motor temperature sensor function includes the following features e 2 configurable thresholds e Motor Temp Sensor Warning Threshold e Motor Temp Sensor Fault Threshold e 2 function outputs e Motor Temp Sensor Warning e
267. esign from 1 to 1 to 1 to many or vice versa you will need to transfer the appropriate software application file to the HMI to support the new configuration For instructions on installing the Magelis XBT L1000 programming software see p 348 For instructions on transferring application files from the Magelis XBT L1000 programming software in your PC to the Magelis XBTN410 HMI see p 357 350 1639502 12 2006 Use Transferring Application Software Files to Magelis XBTN410 HMI Overview After you have installed the Magelis XBT L1000 programming software on your PC and downloaded the required 1 to 1 or 1 to many application software file you are ready to transfer the application software file to the Magelis XBTN410 HMI The Magelis XBTN410 HMI can save and use only 1 software application at a time If you change your physical configuration from 1 to 1 to 1 to many or vice versa you will need to transfer to the HMI the appropriate software application file to support the new configuration For instructions on installing the Magelis XBT L1000 programming software see Ip 348 For instructions on downloading software application files see p 350 Transfer Steps To transfer a software application file from Magelis XBT L1000 programming software on your PC to the Magelis XBTN410 HMI Step Action 1 Supply power to the Magelis XBTN410 HMI 2 Connect the PC 9 PIN Com1 port to the 25 pin data port o
268. essed via e aPCwith PowerSuite software ea Magelis XBTN410 HMI e aPLC via the remote communication link This section contains the following topics Topic Page Controller Internal Fault 95 Controller Internal Temperature 96 Control Command Diagnostic Errors 98 Wiring Faults 101 Controller Configuration Checksum 103 Communication Loss 104 94 1639502 12 2006 Metering and Monitoring Functions Controller Internal Fault Description Major Internal Faults Minor Internal Faults The LTM R controller detects and records faults that are internal to the device itself Internal faults can be either major or minor Major and minor faults can change the state of output relays Cycling power to the LTM R controller may clear an internal fault When an internal fault occurs the Controller Internal Fault parameter is set During a major fault the LTM R controller is unable to reliably execute its own programming and can only attempt to shut itself down During a major fault communication with the LTM R controller is not possible Major internal faults include stack overflow fault stack underflow fault watchdog time out ROM checksum failure CPU failure internal temperature fault at 100 C 212 F RAM test error Minor internal faults indicate that the data being provided to the LTM R controller is unreliable and protection could be compromised During a min
269. etwork control selectable wiring diagram KM1 KM1 1639502 12 2006 539 IEC Format Wiring Diagrams Application The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained local control with Diagram with network control selectable wiring diagram 2 Wire Maintained Local Control with Network Control Selectable 3a ee en KM1 Network Local Stop Start FAS effi FeV 540 1639502 12 2006 IEC Format Wiring Diagrams Independent Mode Wiring Diagrams Application The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse local control wiring diagram Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Local Control 3a ETA TETEA Oo KM1 1639502 12 2006 541 IEC Format Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Local Control Application Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Local Control with Network Control Selectable Application Diagram with 2 Wire The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained local control wiring diagram The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse local control with network control selectable wiring diagram L Local control O Off N Network control LON JPA The following application diag
270. ey all safety messages that follow this symbol to avoid possible injury or death A DANGER DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death or serious injury A WARNING WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided can result in death serious injury or equipment damage A CAUTION CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided can result in injury or equipment damage 1639502 12 2006 11 Safety Information PLEASE NOTE Electrical equipment should be installed operated serviced and maintained only by qualified personnel No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising out of the use of this material 2006 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 12 1639502 12 2006 About the Book A At a Glance Document Scope Validity Note This manual describes the Profibus network protocol version of the TeSys TLTMR motor management controller and LTM E expansion module The purposes of this manual are twofold e to describe and explain the monitoring protection and control functions of the LTM R controller and expansion module e to give you the information you need to implement and support a solution that best meets your application requirements The manual describes the 4 key parts of a successful system implementation e instal
271. f many common motor starting applications This includes managing motor behavior in response to e start and stop actions and e fault and reset actions Because the LTM R controller can be used in special applications such as fire pumps that require the motor to run despite a known fault condition the predefined control logic is designed so that the control circuit and not the predefined control logic determines how the LTM R controller interrupts current flow to the contactor coil Control Logic Predefined control logic acts upon start and stop commands as follows Action on Starts e For all 3 wire impulse control wiring diagrams when input 4 is configured as a and Stops stop command the LTM R controller must detect input current at logic input 1 4 in order to act on a start command e Iflogic input 1 4 is active and a user start action initiates current at logic inputs 1 1 or 2 the LTM R controller detects the rising edge of the current and sets an internal firmware latch command that directs the appropriate relay output to close and remain closed until the latch command is disabled e A stop action that interrupts current at logic input 1 4 causes the LTM R controller to disable the latch command Disabling the firmware latch causes the output to open and remain open until the next valid start condition e For all 2 wire maintained control wiring diagrams the LTM R controller detects the presence of current at logi
272. f setting values whenever they are made Using PowerSuite software all of the LTM R controller s configured settings except for date and time can be saved to a file Once saved you can use PowerSuite software to transfer these settings either to the original LTM R controller or to its replacement Note Only configured settings are saved Historical statistical data is not saved and therefore cannot be applied to a replacement LTM R controller For information on how to use PowerSuite software to create save and transfer configuration setting files see p 436 The primary consideration in replacing an LTM E expansion module is to replace it with the same model 24Vdc or 110 240Vac as the original Both the LTM R controller and the LTM E expansion module contain electronic boards that require particular treatment at the end of their useful life When retiring a device be sure to observe all applicable laws regulations and practices 1639502 12 2006 529 Maintenance Communication Warnings and Faults Introduction Communication warnings and faults are managed in a standard way like any other types of warnings and faults The presence of a fault is signalled by various indicators e State of the LEDs 1 LED is dedicated to communication BF see p 332 State of the output relays Warning Message s displayed on HMI screen e e e e Presence of an exception code such as a report
273. f the limit threshold and is e subtracted from the threshold value for upper limit thresholds e added to the threshold value for lower limit thresholds The following diagram describes the logic result of measurement processing S when hysteresis is applied to an upper limit threshold A l Is2 1 d x Is2 gt Y A 0 a d hysteresis percentage 128 1639502 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions 4 2 Thermal and Current Motor Protection Functions At a Glance Summary This section describes the thermal and current motor protection functions of the LTM R controller What s in this This section contains the following topics Section Topic Page Thermal Overload 130 Thermal Overload Inverse Thermal 131 Thermal Overload Definite Time 138 Current Phase Imbalance 141 Current Phase Loss 145 Current Phase Reversal 148 Long Start 149 Jam 151 Undercurrent 153 Overcurrent 155 Ground Current 158 Internal Ground Current 159 External Ground Current 162 Motor Temperature Sensor 165 Motor Temperature Sensor PTC Binary 166 Motor Temperature Sensor PTC Analog 168 Motor Temperature Sensor NTC Analog 170 Rapid Cycle Lockout 173 1639502 12 2006 129 Motor Protection Functions Thermal Overload Overview Parameter Settings The LTM R controller can be configured to provide therma
274. faults Clear Statistics Clears statistics and restores defaults Reset to Defaults page Self Test Performs a self test Motor Starter page Reset Manual Enables manual resetting of faults Reset Remote Enables remote resetting of faults Reset Automatic Enables automatic resetting of faults Reset page 1639502 12 2006 409 Use Example Use the orthe arrow key to execute a value write command When a value write command executes the lower case v next to the arrow becomes an upper case V as shown below then quickly returns to a lower case v after the command executes Scroll within page Execute command Motor Starter 1 Avg Current 90 FLC L1 Current 85 FLC Statistic Self Testi Product ID gt Home ke Statistic Self Test Product ID gt Home gt 410 1639502 12 2006 Use Menu Structure 1 to many Overview Menu Structure The Magelis XBTN410 HMI 1 to many menu structure is hierarchical in its design and consists of 6 levels of individual pages The upper menu structure levels provide information and commands for the HMI itself and for all LTM R controllers connected to the HMI The lower menu structure levels provide settings statistics and commands for a selected LTM R controller The Magelis XBTN410 HMI 1 to many menu structure presents the following ou
275. fected and remain in their original position until the next valid signal occurs If one or more outputs were active and controlling a motor prior to the transfer then the motor will not stop as a consequence of the transfer A CAUTION and and and e operating in Run state and See instructions below FAILURE TO STOP AND RISK OF UNINTENDED OPERATION LTM R controller operation cannot be stopped from the terminals when control mode is changed to Local Terminal Strip control mode if the LTM R controller is e operating in Overload operating mode e configured for Bumpless transfer of control mode e operated over a network using Network control mode e configured for 3 wire impulse control Failure to follow this instruction can result in injury or equipment damage 212 1639502 12 2006 Motor Control Functions Fallback Transitions Whenever control mode is changed to Local Terminal Strip control mode operation of the LTM R controller cannot be stopped from the terminals because no terminal input is assigned to a STOP command If this behavior is not intended the control mode must be changed to either Network control mode or Local HMI control mode to command a STOP To implement this change take one of the following precautionary steps e the commissioner should configure the LTM R controller for either bump transfer of control mode or 2 wire control e the installer should prov
276. fic I amp M functions 65100 65199 Manufacturer specific 1 amp M functions 1 amp MO The Mandatory Record The transport of the 1 amp M parameters across the Profibus network via MS1 optional or MS2 mandatory is supported Only amp MO data with IMO_Index 65000 can be read No other IM_Indices are supported Structure of the I amp MO record structure for I amp MO mandatory typedef struct BYTE WORD BYTE BYTE WORD BYTE WORD UWORD UWORD UBYTE UWORD sIMO Cc Je a ae et eG abHeader 10 wManufacturerID abOrderID 20 abSerialNumber 16 wHardwareRevision abSoftwareRevision 4 wRevCounter wProfileID wProfileSpecificType abIMVersion 2 wIMSupported During startup of the firmware this structure is initialized with the relevant information A Profibus DPV1 master MS1 or MS2 can read this information at any time using the CALL_REQ mechanism 1639502 12 2006 519 Use 520 1639502 12 2006 Maintenance At a Glance Overview What s in this Chapter This chapter describes the maintenance and self diagnostic features of the LTM R controller and the expansion module A WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION The application of this product requires expertise in the design and programming of control systems Only persons with such expertise should be allowed to program install alter and apply this product Follow all local and
277. from the PLC 530 1639502 12 2006 Maintenance PLC Communication Loss A communication loss is managed like any other fault The LTM R controller monitors the communication with the PLC Using an adjustable network idle time timeout the LTM R controller watchdog function can report a network loss firmware watchdog In the event of a network loss the LTM R controller can be configured to take certain actions These depend on the control mode that the LTM R controller was operating in prior to the network loss If PLC LTM R controller communication is lost while the LTM R controller is in network control mode the LTM R controller enters the fallback state If PLC LTM R controller communication is lost while the LTM R controller is in local control mode and then the control mode is changed to network control the LTM R controller enters the fallback state If PLC LTM R controller communication is restored while the control mode is set to network control the LTM R controller exits the fallback state If the control mode is changed to local control the IMPR exits from the fallback state regardless of the state of PLC controller communications The table below defines the available actions that the LTM R controller may take during a communication loss that the user may select when configuring the LTM R controller Network Communication Loss Actions LTM R controller output control Available LTM R actions after PLC
278. from the slave Below is the contents of a frame that is to be sent Byte Syntax 0 Function Number Ox5E DS Read Function 1 Slot Number Constant value 1 2 Index Register address 10 Common access to registers is every 10 registers The index is always rounded down to an integer 3 Length Length of data blocks in bytes Number of registers x 2 Maximum number of registers 20 40 bytes Any length between 2 and 40 bytes is possible 4 to length 3 Block of data bytes to be read Example Reading of Identification registers 50 to 62 Byte Value 0 Function Number Ox5E DS_Read Function 1 Slot Number 1 2 Index 5 50 10 3 Length 26 50 to 62 13 x 2 4 to 29 Value of registers 50 to 62 472 1639502 12 2006 Use Sending Acyclic Data DS_ Write With DS_ Write function the Profibus DP master can send data to the slave Before writing a block of data it is recommended to read a block of data first in order to protect data that is not impacted The whole block will only be written if you have writing rights to be checked within each register table in the Communication variables tables Column 3 table headers indicate if the variables within each table are Read only or Read Write Below is the contents of a frame that is to be sent Byte Syntax 0 Function Number Ox5F DS Write
279. fy us All pertinent state regional and local safety regulations must be observed when installing and using this product For reasons of safety and to ensure compliance with documented system data only the manufacturer should perform repairs to components When controllers are used for applications with technical safety requirements please follow the relevant instructions Failure to use Schneider Electric software or approved software with our hardware products may result in improper operating results Failure to observe this product related warning can result in injury or equipment damage We welcome your comments about this document You can reach us by e mail at techpub schneider electric com 14 1639502 12 2006 Introducing the TeSys T Motor Management System At a Glance Overview What s in this Chapter This chapter introduces the TeSys T Motor Management System and its companion devices This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation of the TeSys T Motor Management System 16 System Selection Guide 24 Physical Description of the LTM R Motor Management Controller with Profibus 31 Protocol Physical Description of the LTM E Expansion Module 35 Technical Specifications of the LTM R Controller 38 Technical Specifications of the Expansion Module 42 Configurable Parameters 45 1639502 12 2006 15 Introduction Pre
280. g Th Overload Thermal Overload Mode Network Address Network Port Address Setting End Config Controller System Config Required 330 1639502 12 2006 Commissioning Commissioning Using PowerSuite Software Introduction Power Supply and Connections A PC running PowerSuite software can commission the LTM R controller by configuring required parameters at first power up The procedure to configure parameters using PowerSuite software is the same both at first power up or at any later time In all cases use PowerSuite software to 1 configure parameters offline 2 save your settings to a configuration file 3 transfer the configuration from your PC to the LTM R controller For information about configuring parameters using PowerSuite software see p 442 For information about working with configuration files including transferring configuration settings from your PC to the LTM R controller see p 436 The PC requires its own power source and must be connected to the local HMI port with RJ45 connector on either the LTM R controller the expansion module 1639502 12 2006 331 Commissioning Profibus DP Commissioning and Communication Checking Introduction Configure the networking last Even when the connectors are plugged in communication between the LTM R controller s and the PLC cannot start until you enter the correct communication parameters via Powersuite software or the HM
281. ge n 3 V 1 260 Ulnt Voltage phase imbalance n 3 1 261 Ulnt Active power n 3 1 262 Ulnt Power factor n 3 x 0 01 1 263 269 Not significant 494 1639502 12 2006 Use N 4 Fault The n 4 fault statistics are completed by variables at addresses 420 to 429 Statistics Register Variable type Read only variables Note p 478 270 Ulnt Fault code n 4 271 Ulnt Motor full load current ratio n 4 FLC max 272 Ulnt Thermal capacity level n 4 trip level 273 Ulnt Average current ratio n 4 FLC 274 Ulnt L1 current ratio n 4 FLC 275 Ulnt L2 current ratio n 4 FLC 276 Ulnt L3 current ratio n 4 FLC 277 Ulnt Ground current ratio n 4 FLC 278 Ulnt Full load current max n 4 x 0 1 A 279 Ulnt Current phase imbalance n 4 280 Ulnt Frequency n 4 x 0 1 Hz 281 Ulnt Motor temperature sensor n 4 282 285 Word 4 Date and time n 4 See DT_DateTime p 482 286 Ulnt Average voltage n 4 V 1 287 Ulnt L3 L1 voltage n 4 V 1 288 Ulnt L1 L2 voltage n 4 V 1 289 Ulnt L2 L3 voltage n 4 V 1 290 Ulnt Voltage phase imbalance n 4 1 291 Ulnt Active power n 4 1 292 Ulnt Power factor n 4 x 0 01 1 293 299 Not significant 1639502 12 2006 495 Use Last Fault n 0 The last fault main statistics are listed at addresses 150 179
282. ge voltage and provides the value in volts The average voltage function returns the rms value of the average voltage Average Voltage The LTM R controller calculates average voltage using the measured line to line Formulas voltages The measured values are internally summed using the following formula Calculated measurement Formula Average voltage 3 phase motor Vavg L1 L2 voltage L2 L3 voltage L3 L1 voltage 3 Average voltage single phase motor Vavg L3 L1 voltage Average Voltage The average voltage function has the following characteristics Characteristics Characteristic Value Unit Vac Accuracy 1 Resolution 1 Vac Refresh interval 100 ms 1639502 12 2006 81 Metering and Monitoring Functions Active Power Description Formulas Characteristics The active power function measures the active power based on the power factor number of phases average rms phase voltage of L1 L2 L3 average rms phase current of L1 L2 L3 Active Power also known as true power measures Average rms Power It is expressed in watts and is the product of Calculated measurement Formula Active power P for 3 phase motor P 3 x lavg x Vavg x PF Active power P for single phase motor P lavg x Vavg x PF where e e P Active power e PF Power factor lavg Average rms current Vavg Average rms voltage
283. gister remains at the old value This also happens if an access is requested with an incorrect data type example R_MB_16 for reading a 32 bit TeSys T register If you want to re trigger exactly the same command you must e reset the Function code to 0x00 e wait for the response frame with the function code equal to 0x00 then e set it again to its previous value This is useful for a limited master like an HMI Another way of re triggering exactly the same command is to e invert the toggle bit in the function code byte The response is valid when the toggle bit of the response is equal to the toggle bit written in the answer this is a more efficient method but it requires higher programming capabilities 470 1639502 12 2006 Use PKW Error Codes Case of a write error Error Code Error Name Explanation 1 FGP_ERR_REQ_STACK_FULL external request sends back an error frame 3 FGP_ERR_REGISTER_NOT_FOUND register not managed or the request needs super user access rights FGP_ERR_ANSWER_DELAYED external request answer postponed FGP_ERR_NOT_ALL_REGISTER_FOUND one or both registers cannot be found FGP_ERR_READ_ONLY register not authorized to be written 10 FGP_ERR_VAL_1WORD_TOOHIGH written value not in the range of the register word value is too high 11 FGP_ERR_VAL_1WORD_TOOLOW written value not in the range of the register word value is too low 12 FGP_ERR_V
284. has the following configurable parameter setting Parameter Setting range Factory setting Ground Current Mode Internal Internal e External Ground Current Ratio e None None e 100 1 e 200 1 5 e 1000 1 e 2000 1 e OtherRatio Ground CT Primary e 1 65535 1 Ground CT Secondary e 1 65535 1 The external ground current value depends on the parameter settings Calculated measurement Formula External ground current Ground CT Secondary x Ground CT Primary Ground CT Secondary 70 1639502 12 2006 Metering and Monitoring Functions Ground Current Characteristics The ground current function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Internal ground current 10Z External ground current 10 Unit A A Accuracy LTM R 08xxx Igr gt 0 3A 5 the greater of 5 or 0 01A 0 2A lt lgr lt 0 3A 10 0 1A lt lgr lt 0 2A 15 Igr lt 0 1A N A LTM R 27xxx Igr gt 0 5 A 5 0 3A lt lgr lt 0 5A 10 0 2A lt lgr lt 0 3A 15 Igr lt 0 2A N A LTM R 100xxx Igr gt 1 0A 5 0 5A lt lgr lt 1 0A 10 0 3A lt lgr lt 0 5A 15 Igr lt 0 3A N A1 Resolution 0 01A 0 01A Refresh interval 100 ms 100 ms 1 For currents of this magitude or lower the internal ground current function should not be used Instead use external ground current transformers Ground Current Ratio Ground
285. hase Imbalance Warning Enable Warn Level Voltage Phase Imbalance Warning Threshold Volt Ph Loss Fault Enable Voltage Phase Loss Fault Enable Fault Time Voltage Phase Loss Fault Timeout Warn Enable Voltage Phase Loss Warning Enable Volt Ph Rev Fault Enable Voltage Phase Reversal Fault Enable UnderVoltage Fault Enable Undervoltage Fault Enable Fault Level Undervoltage Fault Threshold Fault Time Undervoltage Fault Timeout Warn Enable Undervoltage Warning Enable Warn Level Undervoltage Warning Threshold Voltage continued OverVoltage Fault Enable Overvoltage Fault Enable Fault Level Overvoltage Fault Threshold Fault Time Overvoltage Fault Timeout Warn Enable Overvoltage Warning Enable Warn Level Overvoltage Warning Threshold 372 1639502 12 2006 Use Power LoadShed The Voltage and Load Shed sub menus contain the following editable parameters Diagnostics and Lock Outs Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Parameter name reference Power UnderPower Fault Enable Underpower Fault Enable Fault Level Underpower Fault Threshold Fault Time Underpower Fault Timeout Warn Enable Underpower Warning Enable Warn Level Underpower Warning Threshold OverPower Fault Enable Overpower Fault Enable Fault Level Overpower Fault Threshold Fault Time Overpower Fault Timeout Warn Enable Overpower Warning Enable Warn Level Overpower W
286. hase Loss Timeout 2 function outputs e Voltage Phase Loss Warning e Voltage Phase Loss Fault e 1 counting statistic e Voltage Phase Loss Faults Count e 3 indicators identifying the phase experiencing the voltage loss e L1 L2 Voltage loss e L2 L3 Voltage loss e L3 L1 Voltage loss 180 1639502 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Block Diagram Voltage phase loss fault and warning v V1 Vavg gt 0 4x Vavg V2 gt V2 Vavg l gt 0 4x Vavg V3 gt V3 Vavg l gt 0 4x Vavg Parameter Settings Function Characteristics Ready state 0 Voltage phase amp t T loss fault mMM AND Voltage phase OR loss warning SSS p AVmax Ln voltage phase loss V1 L1 L2 voltage V2 L2 L3 voltage V3 L3 L1 voltage Ln Line voltage number or numbers with the greatest deviation from Vavg Vavg 3 phase average voltage T Fault timeout The voltage phase loss function has the following configurable parameters Parameters Setting range Factory setting Fault enable Enable Disable Enable Fault timeout 0 1 30 s in 0 1 s increments 3 s Warning enable Enable Disable Enable The voltage phase loss function has the following characteristics Characteristics Value Hysteresis 45 of the 3 phase average voltage Trip time accuracy 0 1 s or 5 1639502 12 2006 181
287. he LTM R controller and the Parameter expansion module include Settings Parameter Setting Range Factory Default Auto reset attempts group 1 setting 0 manual 1 2 3 4 5 unlimited number 5 of reset attempts Auto reset group 1 timeout 0 65535 s 480s Auto reset attempts group 2 setting 0 manual 1 2 3 4 5 unlimited number 0 of reset attempts Auto reset group 2 timeout 0 65535 s 1200 s Auto reset attempts group 3 setting 0 manual 1 2 3 4 5 unlimited number 0 of reset attempts Auto reset group 3 timeout 0 65535 s 60 s Load Current Load current transformer configurable parameters for the LTM R controller and the Transformer expansion module include Parameter Settings Parameter Setting Range Factory Default Load CT multiple passes 1 100 1 Load CT primary 1 65535 1 Load CT secondary 1 500 1 Load CT ratio e None No Default e 10 1 e 15 1 e 30 1 e 50 1 e 100 1 e 200 1 e 400 1 e 300 1 e Other Ratio 1639502 12 2006 47 Introduction Ground Current Ground current transformer configurable parameters for the LTM R controller and Transformer the expansion module include Parameter Settings Parameter Setting Range Factory Default Ground current mode Internal Internal e External Ground current ratio e None No Default e 100 1 e 200 1 5 e 1000 1 e 2000 1 e Other Ratio Ground CT primary 1 65535 1 Ground
288. he factory PowerSuite software displays the following message Unconfigured IMPR The connected IMPR is not configured or this is the first time the device has been in use You should download the configuration to the device before using with the Motor This message indicates that the LTM R controller is in its initialized state You must download a configuration file containing all the settings before the LTM R controller can be used in operations For information on how to transfer a configuration file from your PC to the LTM R controller see p 438 322 1639502 12 2006 Commissioning Required Parameters Introduction The parameters listed below must be configured before the LTM R controller can be commissioned into service The LTM R controller remains locked in its initialized state until all of these required parameters are configured In the Magelis XBTN410 HMI the required parameters are located in either or both the e Sys Config menu or e Main menu For more information about the Sys Config menu see p 329 For information on the Main menu see p 367 For information on navigating the Magelis XBTN410 HMI menu structure see p 367 In PowerSuite software all required parameters are located in the Settings branch of the tree control For information about the PowerSuite software interface see p 440 For information about editing parameters using PowerSuite software see p 442 In ad
289. he lead resistance See p 59 and p 115 for more information on temperature sensors See p 289 for an example of a wiring diagram using a temperature sensor 300 1639502 12 2006 Installation Recommended Contactors Recommended You can use the following contactor types Contactors e Telemecanique IEC style contactors from the TeSys D or TeSys F ranges e Square D NEMA style contactors from the S range Interposing Depending on the coil voltage of the contactor used an interposing relay may be Relays required The tables on the following pages listing the references and character istics of contactors specify whether an interposing relay is required The following diagrams illustrate system wiring without and with the use of an interposing relay 3a Without interposing relay With interposing relay 1639502 12 2006 301 Installation TeSys D and TeSys F IEC Contactors Catalog references and characteristics for TeSys D IEC contactors are listed in the table below Coil voltages are grouped according to whether an interposing relay is required TeSys D catalog Control Circuit VA or W Coil voltages references Frequency maintained max interposing relay not interposing relay required Hz required LC1D09 LC1D38 7 5 AC 24 32 36 42 48 AC 277 380 400 415 60 100 127 200
290. he required hardware and that the application has been commissioned by setting all minimally required configuration parameters This example further assumes The motor must be present The controller parameters must be set to their factory default settings A PC running PowerSuite configuration software must be connected to the controller via an RS232 to RS485 converter with communication cable 1639502 12 2006 53 Application Example LTM R Controller Wiring Wiring Diagram The following schematic depicts both the main power circuit and the 3 wire impulse control circuit aie Gas Start Stop Reset E Ef e ermne er errernnre erenre Warning amp o 1 contactor 2 ground fault current transformer 3 PTC binary thermistor The wiring diagram above implements the control strategy inherent in the independent 3 wire predefined operating mode e Logic input 1 1 activates a start command and latches logic output O 1 e Logic input 1 4 is the Stop command A fault response e trips logic output 0 4 and e interrupts logic input 1 4 thereby disabling the latch and e opens logic output 1 1 This wiring diagram is intended for use with the example application For additional IEC format wiring diagrams see p 535 For NEMA format wiring diagrams see p 555 54 1639502 12 2006 Application Example C
291. he second Fault Time digit to the value 5 025 Sec 364 1639502 12 2006 Use Step Description Screen display 8 After you have entered the new value press the Fault Time button to save the setting The changes to a indicating the edited value is now this parameter s 025 Sec saved setting After displaying the new setting for 2 seconds the HMI returns to the previous higher level screen Long Start Fault Time 1639502 12 2006 365 Use Menu Structure 1 to 1 Overview Sys Config Menu Main Menu Saving Settings In a 1 to 1 configuration the Magelis XBTN410 HMI menu structure includes two configurable menus e Sys Config menu e Main menu Each menu consists of up to 7 levels of nested parameters When using the Magelis XBTN410 HMI to navigate to an editable setting or to a read only value you must be aware of the menu structure and the location of your destination parameter The Sys Config menu e opens on first power up of the LTM R controller e contains basic settings for operating the LTM R controller expansion module and equipment e closes after its settings are saved The Sys Config menu is configured as part of the commissioning process For information on the Sys Config menu see p 329 The Main menu e appears on power up of the LTM R controller after the Sys Config menu settings ha
292. iables 505 Command Variables 515 User Map Variables 516 Custom Logic Variables 517 Identification and Maintenance Functions IMF 518 1639502 12 2006 451 Use Profibus DP Protocol Principle and Main Features Overview Profibus DP Features Profibus DP is an open industrial standard for integrated communication It is a serial fieldbus which provides a decentralized connection between sensors actuators and I O modules produced by various manufacturers and connects them to the superset control level Profibus DP Distributed Periphery Master Slave Network is a Profibus communication profile which is optimized for performance It is optimized for speed efficiency and inexpensive hook up cost and is designed especially for communication between automation systems and distributed peripheral equipment The Profibus DP network supports multiple master systems with several slaves The Profibus DP protocol is a master slave protocol Master Slaves Hii rini The following table contains specifications of the Profibus DP Standard EN 501 70 DIN 19245 Transmission Equipment Physical Profile EIA RS 485 Transfer Procedure half duplex Bus Topology linear bus with active bus termination Bus Cable Type shielded twisted pair conductors Connector SUB D 9 pin open style Number of Nodes on the Bus maximum of 32 with no rep
293. iagram Visually confirm that the actual wiring matches the intended wiring as described in the wiring diagram The following load CT parameter Confirm that the Load CT Ratio parameter or the settings using PowerSuite software combination of Load CT Primary and Load e Load CT Ratio CT Secondary parameters accurately reflect the e Load CT Primary intended load CT ratio e Load CT Secondary Visually confirm that the Load CT Multiple Passes e Load CT Multiple Passes parameter accurately reflects the number of passes the wiring makes through the LTM R controller s embedded CT windows The following load motor parameter Visually confirm that the motor and LTM R controller setting using PowerSuite software are wired for the number of phases set in the e Motor Phases Motor Phases parameter The following load motor parameter If the motor is a 3 phase motor visually check that setting using either PowerSuite the phase wiring sequence matches the Motor software or the LCD display of the Phases Sequence parameter setting Magelis XBTN410 HMI e Motor Phases Sequence 336 1639502 12 2006 Commissioning Diagnostic Wiring Verify the wiring for any motor temperature sensing device or external ground current transformer if the application includes these devices by checking the following Look at Action The wiring diagram Visually confirm that the actual wiring matches the intended wiring as described in the wiring diagr
294. ich you can route motor leads to contactor load connections The CT windows enable you to wire the controller in four different ways depending on the voltage and controller model used e Internal CT wiring through the windows e Internal CT wiring using multiple passes e Internal CT wiring using the lug kit ref Class 9999 MLPL e External Load CT wiring This section describes each of these options Internal CT Typical wiring using the CT windows for either three phase or single phase motors Wiring through the Windows HHHH COOCOOCCOCOH IOCOeg as 1639502 12 2006 293 Installation Internal CT Wiring Using Multiple Passes The controller will physically support up to a maximum of 5 passes of 2 5 mm 14 AWG wire through the CT windows There are three looping windows located under the CT windows that physically support up to a maximum of 4 wire loops You can set the parameter Load CT Multiple Passes to account for the number of times the motor wires pass through the CT window in order to display the correct current readings For more information see p 47 Typical wiring using 2 passes 1 wire loop 30 ET L1 L2 L3 AVEO WT S S
295. ide the LTM R controller with a means of interrupting current to the contactor coil for example a push button station wired in series with the LTM R controller outputs e the controls engineer should assign a terminal input to disable the Run command using Custom Configuration Mode assignments The LTM R controller enters a fallback state when communication with the control source is lost and exits the fallback state when communication is restored The transition into and out of the fallback state is as follows Transition Control source transfer Entering the fallback state bumpless when the Control Direct Transition bit is on Exiting the fallback state determined by the settings for Bumpless Transfer Mode bump or bumpless and Control Direct Transition on or off For a information on how to configure communications fallback parameters see p 106 1639502 12 2006 213 Motor Control Functions Operating States Introduction The LTM R controller responds to the state of the motor and provides control monitoring and protection functions appropriate to each of the motor s operating states A motor can have many operating states Some operating states are persistent while others are transitional A motor s primary operating states are Operating state Description Ready e The motor is stopped and is not drawing current e The LTM R controller e detects no fault
296. ifying the state of the contacts in the least favorable direction 3 NOTICE This product has been designed for use in environment A Use of this product in environment B may cause unwanted electromagnetic disturbance which may require the implementation of adequate mitigation measures Control Voltage Characteristics The LTM R controller has the following control voltage characteristics Control Voltage 24 Vdc 100 240 Vac Power consumption According to IEC EN 60947 1 56 127 mA 8 62 8 mA Control voltage range According to IEC EN 60947 1 20 4 26 4 Vdc 93 5 264 Vac Overcurrent protection 24 V fuse 0 5 A gG 100 240 V fuse 0 5 A gG Resistance to Microbreaks 3 ms 3 ms Resistance to voltage dips According to IEC EN 61000 4 11 70 of UC min for 500 ms 70 of UC min for 500 ms 1639502 12 2006 39 Introduction Logic Inputs Characteristics The LTM R controller logic inputs 1 1 to 1 6 are internally powered by the control voltage of the LTM R controller LTM R controller inputs are isolated from the inputs of the expansion module LTM R controller logic inputs have the following characteristics Nominal input values Voltage 24 Vdc 100 240 Vac Current 7 mA e 3 1 mA at 100Vac e 7 5 mA at 240 Vac Input limit values At state 1 Voltage 15 V maximum 79 V lt V lt 264 V Current 2 mA min to 15 mA max 2 mA
297. including motor operation faults and counters For a list of Statistics sub menu parameters see p 375 Services Executable operating commands including self test clear statistics and password For a description of the Services commands see p 387 Product ID A read only description of the LTM R controller expansion module and network module For a list of Product ID sub menu parameters see p 382 1639502 12 2006 367 Use Main Menu Settings 1 to 1 Settings menu Language and The Settings sub menu is the first selection in Level 2 of the Main menu The Settings menu contains the following Level 3 sub menus Language Date Time Motor Local Control Transfer Mode Reset Current Voltage Power Load Shed Diagnostics Lock Outs Network Port HMI Port HMI Display All of the settings sub menus are described below except for the HMI Display For information on the use and contents of the HMI Display sub menu see p 383 The Language and Date Time sub menus contain the following editable parameters Date Time Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Parameter name reference Language HMI Language Setting Date Time Year Date And Time Setting Month Day Hour Minutes Seconds 368 1639502 12 2006 Use Motor The Motor sub menu contains the following editable parameter
298. ing OR m Vmax lt Vsi _ gt Vmax AND Vmax lt Vs2 T 0 Undervoltage fault amp g Ready state gt Run state _ OR AND V1 L1 L2 voltage V2 L2 L3 voltage V3 L3 L1 voltage Vs1 Warning threshold Vs2 Fault threshold T Fault timeout The undervoltage function has the following parameters Parameters Setting range Factory setting Fault enable Enable Disable Disable Fault timeout 0 2 25 s in 0 1 s increments 3s Fault threshold 70 99 of Motor nominal voltage in 85 1 increments Warning enable Enable Disable Disable Warning threshold 70 99 of Motor nominal voltage in 85 1 increments 1639502 12 2006 185 Motor Protection Functions Function The undervoltage function has the following characteristics Characteristics Characteristics Value Hysteresis 105 of Fault threshold or Warning threshold Trip time accuracy 0 1 s or 5 Example The following diagram describes the occurrence of a undervoltage fault V A Fault timeout Vs2 Vs2 Undervoltage fault threshold 186 1639502 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Overvoltage Description Functional Characteristics The overvoltage function signals e a warning when voltage in a phase exceeds a set threshold e a fault when voltage in a phase continuously exceeds a separately set threshold for a specified period of time This function has
299. ingle phase voltage is measured from L1 and L3 The line to line voltages function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Unit Vac Accuracy 1 Resolution 1 Vac Refresh interval 100 ms 1639502 12 2006 79 Metering and Monitoring Functions Line Voltage Imbalance Description The line voltage imbalance function displays the maximum percentage of deviation between the average voltage and the individual line voltages Formulas The line voltage imbalance calculated measurement is based on the following formulas Calculated measurement Formula Imbalance ratio of voltage in phase 1 in Vii 100 x V1 Vavg Vavg Imbalance ratio of voltage in phase 2 in Vi2 100 x V2 Vavg Vavg Imbalance ratio of voltage in phase 3 in Vi3 100 x V3 Vavg Vavg Voltage imbalance ratio for three phase in Vimb Max Vi1 Vi2 Vi3 Where e V1 L1 L2 voltage phase 1 to phase 2 voltage e V2 L2 L3 voltage phase 2 to phase 3 voltage e V3 L3 L1 voltage phase 3 to phase 1 voltage e Vavg average voltage Characteristics The line voltage imbalance function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Unit Accuracy 1 5 Resolution 1 Refresh interval 100 ms 80 1639502 12 2006 Metering and Monitoring Functions Average Voltage Description The LTM R controller calculates avera
300. ion Value A Cancel 32 682 Fallback strategy Ignored cro 35 683 34 683 682 Fallback strategy E T 34 683 34 683 Common 37 650 Control unit language 39 651 Display average current __ Cancel Module 39 651 Display thermal level Force forward 39 651 Display L1 current Force reverse 39 651 Display L2 current 39 651 Display L3 current 39 651 Display ground current 39 651 Display last trio Click OK 10 Click the OK button of each open dialog window to confirm the selected parameter values Save and export the configuration for importation into the PLC configuration PL7 Concept or Unity Pro Step Action Select File Save As to open the Save as window Choose the Project path and a File name and click Save Select File Export gt ASCII to export the configuration as an ASCII file Blow n Import the Profibus DP configuration into the PLC configuration PL7 Concept or Unity Pro 458 1639502 12 2006 Use Functions of Profibus DP Profiles Overview The operation modes depend on the Profibus DP application profile used According to the Profibus DP Low Voltage Switch Gear profile the following device class is supported Motor Management Starter For cyclic data the Motor Management Starter uses edge triggered signals 1639502 12 2006 459 Use Operational Example of operational states of a Motor Management Starter normal oper
301. ion includes the following parameters e 1 time delay e Rapid Cycle Lockout Timeout e 1 status bit e Rapid Cycle Lockout In addition the Rapid Cycle Lockout function e disables motor outputs e causes the LTM R Alarm LED to flash 5 times per second 1639502 12 2006 173 Motor Protection Functions Parameter Settings Function Characteristics Example The rapid cycle lockout function has the following parameters Parameters Setting range Factory setting Rapid cycle lockout timeout 0 999 9 s in increments of 0 1 s Os The rapid cycle lockout function has the following characteristics Characteristics Value Trip time accuracy 0 1 s or 5 A 1 Rapid cycle lockout timeout i q al j lt i 4 gt Run commands Run commands 1 ignored acknowledged 10 FLC i i ae 174 1639502 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions 4 3 Voltage Motor Protection Functions At a Glance Summary This section describes the voltage motor protection functions provided by the LTM R controller What s in this This section contains the following topics Section i Topic Page Voltage Phase Imbalance 176 Voltage Phase Loss 180 Voltage Phase Reversal 183 Undervoltage 184 Overvoltage 187 Voltage Load Shedding 190 1639502 12 2006 175 Motor Protection Functions Voltag
302. ion link What s in this This section contains the following topics Section Topic Page Motor State 113 Minimum Wait Time 113 112 1639502 12 2006 Metering and Monitoring Functions Motor State Description The LTM R controller tracks the motor state and reports the following states by setting the corresponding Boolean parameters State Parameter Motor running Motor Running On System On Ready System Ready Fault System Fault Warning System Warning Minimum Wait Time Description Characteristics The LTM R controller tracks the time remaining to restart the motor according to one of the following events auto reset thermal overload rapid cycle e load shedding Faults can be assigned to auto reset groups which have characteristics that control the time to reset the motor For more details on the automatic fault reset mode see p 260 Faults associated with thermal capacity are controlled by the motor characteristics that affect the time to reset the motor For more details see p 76 Rapid cycle protects against harm caused by repetitive successive inrush currents resulting from too little time between starts See p 173 for more details Voltage load shedding controls the time to restart the motor following return of voltage after a load shed event For more details see p 190 The Minimum Wait Time function has the following characteris
303. ion via Profibus DP general information 453 internal clock 528 internal ground current 159 fault threshold 121 161 421 508 586 1639502 12 2006 Index fault timeout 121 161 421 508 warning threshold 121 161 421 508 internal port faults count 92 376 introduction 15 J jam 151 fault enable 121 152 371 420 fault threshold 121 152 371 420 508 fault timeout 121 152 371 420 508 faults count 90 375 warning enable 121 152 371 420 warning threshold 121 152 371 420 508 L L1 current n 0 377 496 n 1 378 496 n 2 379 496 n 3 380 497 n 4 381 497 L1 current highest imbalance 142 L1 current ratio 93 417 n 0 377 426 491 n 1 378 427 492 n 2 379 493 n 3 380 494 n 4 381 495 L1 L2 highest imbalance 177 L1 L2 voltage 93 n 0 377 426 491 n 1 378 427 492 n 2 379 493 n 3 380 494 n 4 381 495 L2 current n 0 377 496 n 1 378 496 n 2 379 496 n 3 380 497 n 4 381 497 L2 current highest imbalance 142 L2 current ratio 93 417 n 0 377 426 491 n 1 378 427 492 n 2 379 493 n 3 380 494 n 4 381 495 L2 L3 highest imbalance 177 L2 L3 voltage 93 n 0 377 426 491 n 1 378 427 492 n 2 379 493 n 3 380 494 n 4 381 495 L3 current n 0 377 496 n 1 378 496 n 2 379 496 n 3 380 497 n 4 381 497 L3 current highest imbalance 142 L3 current ratio 93 417 n 0 377 426 491 n 1 378 427 492 n 2 379 493 n 3
304. ire maintained local control with network control selectable 1639502 12 2006 535 IEC Format Wiring Diagrams What s in this This chapter contains the following topics Chapter Topic Page Overload Mode Wiring Diagrams 537 Independent Mode Wiring Diagrams 541 Reverser Mode Wiring Diagrams 543 Two Step Wye Delta Mode Wiring Diagrams 545 Two Step Primary Resistor Mode Wiring Diagrams 547 Two Step Autotransformer Mode Wiring Diagrams 549 Two Speed Dahlander Mode Wiring Diagrams 551 Two Speed Pole Changing Mode Wiring Diagrams 553 536 1639502 12 2006 IEC Format Wiring Diagrams Overload Mode Wiring Diagrams Application The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse local control wiring diagram Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Local Control 3a StartE KM1 1639502 12 2006 537 IEC Format Wiring Diagrams Application The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained local control wiring diagram Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Local Control 3a e O KM1 Stop Start FV KM1 538 1639502 12 2006 IEC Format Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Local Control with Network Control Selectable 3a a eee KM1 The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse local control with n
305. irmware interlocks O 1 and O 2 For additional examples of two speed Dahlander IEC diagrams see p 551 For examples of two speed Dahlander NEMA diagrams see p 577 1639502 12 2006 249 Motor Control Functions 2 Speed Pole The following wiring diagram represents a simplified example of the LTM R controller Changing in a two speed pole changing local control 3 wire impulse application Application Diagram 30 Low High Speed Speed E E E OTT OTOOTO TOT e TomT Oo mT oe Toe To Q Stop 1 A pole changing application requires two sets of wires passing through the CT windows The LTM R controller can also be placed upstream of the contactors If this is the case all the wires downstream of the contactors must be the same size 2 The N C interlock contacts KM1 and KM2 are not mandatory because the LTM R controller firmware interlocks O 1 and O 2 For additional examples of pole changing IEC diagrams see p 553 For examples of pole changing NEMA diagrams see p 573 250 1639502 12 2006 Motor Control Functions VO Assignment Two Speed operating mode provides the following logic inputs Logic inputs 2 wire maintained assignment 3 wire impulse assignment 1 1 Low speed command Low speed start 1 2 High speed command High speed start 1 3 Free Free 1 4 Free Stop 1 5 Reset Reset 1 6 Loca
306. irst configured and every subsequent time any configuration settings are changed use PowerSuite software to save the parameter settings to a file Using PowerSuite software e To save a configuration file 1 Select File Print gt To File e Torestore the saved configuration file 1 Open the saved file Select File Open then navigate to and open the file 2 Download the configuration to the new controller Select Link gt Transfer Device to PC 526 1639502 12 2006 Maintenance Environment Self Test Like any other electronic device the LTM R controller is affected by its physical environment Provide a friendly environment by taking common sense preventive measures including e Scheduling periodic examinations of battery packs fuses power strips batteries surge suppressors and power supplies e Keeping the LTM R controller the panel and all devices clean An unobstructed flow of air will prevent dust build up which can lead to a short circuit condition e Remaining alert to the possibility of other equipment producing electromagnetic radiation Be sure no other devices cause electromagnetic interference with the LTM R controller Perform a self test by either e holding down the Test Reset button on the face of the LTM R controller for more than 3 seconds and up to 15 seconds or e setting the Self Test Command parameter A self test can be performed only if e motor is off e no faul
307. is provides centralized monitoring and control of equipment installations The Control Mode parameter selection determines the available reset methods Both manual reset methods and remote reset methods reset a fault Remote Reset The LTM R controller provides the following remote reset methods Methods Protection Monitored fault Control mode Category Local terminal strip Local HMI Network Diagnostic Run Command Check RB PC 1 5 NC RB PC 1 5 NC RB PC 1 5 NC Stop Command Check RB PC 1 5 NC RB PC 1 5 NC RB PC 1 5 NC Run Check Back RB PC 1 5 NC RB PC 1 5 NC RB PC 1 5 NC Stop Check Back RB PC 1 5 NC RB PC 1 5 NC RB PC 1 5 NC Wiring PTC connection RB PC 1 5 NC RB PC 1 5 NC RB PC 1 5 NC configuration CT Reversal RB PC 1 5 NC RB PC 1 5 NC RB PC 1 5 NC one Voltage Phase Reversal RB PC I 5 NC RB PC 1 5 NC RB PC 1 5 NC Current Phase Reversal RB PC 1 5 NC RB PC 1 5 NC RB PC I 5 NC Voltage Phase Loss RB PC 1 5 NC RB PC 1 5 NC RB PC 1 5 NC Phase Configuration RB PC 1 5 NC RB PC 1 5 NC RB PC 1 5 NC Internal Stack Overflow PC PC PC Watchdog PC PC PC ROM Checksum PC PC PC EEROM PC PC PC CPU PC PC PC Internal Temperature PC PC PC Motor temp PTC Binary RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC SENSON PTC Analog RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC NTC Analog RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 N
308. isplay Contrast Setting Language Fault Level HMI Language Setting Display All Selects all HMI display items Status Display All Selects all Status items Date HMI Display Date Enable Time HMI Display Time Enable Frequency HMI Display Frequency Enable Start Per Hour HMI Display Starts Per Hour Enable Last Fault HMI Display Last Fault Enable I O Status HMI Display IO Status Enable Th Overload Display All Selects all Thermal Overload items Th Capacity HMI Display Thermal Capacity Level Enable Time To Trip HMI Display Time To Trip Enable Definite OC HMI Display Definit Overcurrent Enable 1639502 12 2006 383 Use Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Parameter name reference HMI Display Current Display All Selects all Current items continued Avg Current HMI Display Average Current Enable L1 Current HMI Display L1 Current Enable L2 Current HMI Display L2 Current Enable L3 Current HMI Display L3 Current Enable AvgCurrRatio HMI Display Average Current Ratio Enable L1CurrRatio HMI Display L1 Current Ratio Enable L2CurrRatio HMI Display L2 Current Ratio Enable L3CurrRatio HMI Display L3 Current Ratio Enable Curr Ph Imb HMI Display Current Imbalance Enable Max Curr Phase HMI Display Max Current Phase Enable Ground Curr HMI Display Ground Current Enable HMI Display Voltage Display All Selects all Voltage items continued Avg Voltage HMI Display Average Vo
309. it Thermal Overload Faults Count Th Ovid Warn Thermal Overload Warnings Count TempsSens FIt Motor Temp Sensor Faults Count Curr Imb Fit Current Phase Imbalance Faults Count C PhLossFIt Current Phase Loss Faults Count LongStartFit Long Start Faults Count Jam Fault Jam Faults Count UnderCurrFlt Undercurrent Faults Count OverCurrFIt Overcurrent Faults Count GroundFault Ground Current Faults Count VoltPhImbFIt Voltage Phase Imbalance Faults Count 1639502 12 2006 375 Use Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Parameter name reference Counters Protection V PhLossFit Voltage Phase Loss Faults Count continued continued UnderVoltFit Undervoltage Faults Count OverVoltFlt Overvoltage Faults Count UnderPowFlt Underpower Faults Count OverPowFIlt Overpower Faults Count Under PF Fit Under Power Factor Faults Count Over PF FIt Over Power Factor Faults Count Diagnostic Diag Flts Diag Faults Count Wiring WiringFit Wiring Faults Count LoadShedding Load Sheds Load Sheddings Count Comm HMI Loss FIt HMI Port Faults Count Ntwk Int Fit Network Port Internal Faults Count NtwkCnfg FIt Network Port Config Faults Count NtwkPort Flt Network Port Faults Count Internal Cntrir IntFit Controller Internal Faults Count InterPortFlt Internal Port Faults Count 376 1639502 12 2006 Use Fault Statistics The LTM R controller retains
310. l 0 or network 1 Local 0 or network 1 Two Speed operating mode provides the following logic outputs Logic outputs Assignment 0 1 13 and 14 Low speed control 0 2 23 and 24 High speed control 0 3 33 and 34 Warning signal O 4 95 96 97 and 98 Fault signal Two speed operating mode uses the following HMI keys HMI keys 2 wire maintained assignment 3 wire impulse assignment Aux 1 Low speed control Low speed start Aux 2 High speed control High speed start Stop Stop the motor Stop the motor 1639502 12 2006 251 Motor Control Functions Timing The following diagram is an example of the timing sequence for the two speed Sequence operating mode that shows the inputs and outputs for a 3 wire impulse configuration when the Control Direct Transition bit is On E 1 1 Low speed start 1 2 High speed start 1 4 Stop 0 1 KM1 Low speed O 2 KM2 amp KM3 high speed Y Motor On bit Motor transition timeout 1 Normal operation with stop command 2 Normal operation without stop command 3 Low speed start command ignored motor transition timeout active 4 Low speed start command ignored stop command active Parameters The
311. l protection by selecting one of the following settings e Inverse Thermal default e Definite Time Each setting represents a Trip Curve Characteristic The LTM R controller stores the selected setting in its Thermal Overload Mode parameter Only one setting can be activated at a time See the topics that immediately follow for information on the operation and configuration of each setting This function applies to both single phase and 3 phase motors The Thermal Overload function has the following configurable parameter settings which apply to every trip current characteristic Parameters Setting range Factory setting Mode e Inverse thermal Inverse thermal e Definite time Fault enable Enable Disable Enable Warning enable Enable Disable Enable Motor auxiliary fan cooled Enable Disable Disable 130 1639502 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Thermal Overload Inverse Thermal Description When you set the Thermal Overload Mode parameter to Inverse Thermal and select a motor trip class the LTM R controller monitors the motor s utilized thermal capacity and signals e a warning when utilized thermal capacity exceeds a configured warning threshold e a fault when utilized thermal capacity continuously exceeds a calculated fault threshold based on the Motor Trip Class setting A CAUTION RISK OF MOTOR OVERHEATING The Motor Trip Class parameter must be set to the therm
312. le name e accept the default file location Configurations or navigate to a new location e click Save Your configuration settings have been made and saved with a new filename on your PC Next you must transfer this configuration file to the LTM R controller 1639502 12 2006 57 Application Example Transfer Configuration File Transferring your configuration to the LTM R controller is a 2 step process e connect your PC to the LTM R controller e transfer the configuration file To do this Step Description 1 Be sure your configurations are displayed in the PowerSuite software Check the task bar to see whether your PC is connected to the LTM R controller If the task bar reads Disconnected select Connect in either the Link menu or the icon bar A progress bar briefly appears as your PC connects to the LTM R controller and the word Connected appears in the task bar when the connection process successfully completes Select PC to Device in either the Link File Transfer sub menu or the icon bar The Upload Configuration dialog opens asking if you want to continue In the Upload Configuration dialog click Continue A progress bar briefly appears To confirm that the transfer succeeded check the results in the Output window which opens automatically at the bottom of the Main window 58 1639502 12 2006 Metering and Monitoring Functions
313. ler or expansion module to e upload configuration files from the LTM R controller to the PowerSuite software for editing e download edited configuration files from the PowerSuite software to the LTM R controller e monitor the operation of the LTM R controller expansion module and equipment e maintain the LTM R controller e control the motor 434 1639502 12 2006 Use Example PowerSuite software presents the following user interface PowerSuite Default File Edit Services Link Settings Tools View Help BHA S Ss SSeS Telemecanique Tesys T f Current Readings f5 Device Information Hf Settings gt Statistics 3 f Monitoring F3 Voltage Current H Power f5 Motor Temperature FS 10 Port Status gt Active Faults 4f Parameters r2 Logic Functions 12 13 IGF Current phase imbalance PowerSuite Connected Menu bar Icon bar Tree control Main window AON Expand the tree control then select an item to display configuration monitoring and control data in the main window Use the menu bar and icon bar to perform configuration monitoring and control functions For information on how to use each screen in the configuration software refer to the Help menu s help file commands 1639502 12 2006 435 Use File Management Overview The LTM R controller s configuration settings are contained in an electronic configuration file Use PowerSuite s
314. lication diagram features a 3 wire impulse local control with network control selectable wiring diagram H OTA Stop Ath op A2 l A3 l H Hand Local Control O Off A Automatic Network Control The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained local control with network control selectable wiring diagram H Hand Local Control O Off All HOA A Automatic Network Control A2 ahs Ai 0 0 A2 570 1639502 12 2006 NEMA Format Wiring Diagrams Two Speed Mode Wiring Diagrams Single Winding Consequent Pole Application The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse local control wiring diagram Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Local Control 3a pA L1 L2 L3 I LOW ety Stop o o Q10 HIGH pads e 0 oF 1639502 12 2006 571 NEMA Format Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Local Control Application Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Local Control with Network Control Selectable Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Local Control with Network Control Selectable The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained local control wiring diagram L Low Speed O Off DJO H High Speed Cava all
315. lies only to 3 phase motors e has no warning and no timer This function can be enabled or disabled Controller Configuration Checksum Description To verify that the software configuration has not been accidentally modified the LTM R controller re calculates checksums for the EEROM and FLASH memories This check occurs at power up and periodically thereafter If the LTM R controller detects any variation it reports a Controller Internal Fault 1639502 12 2006 103 Metering and Monitoring Functions Communication Loss Description Network Port Parameter Settings The LTM R controller monitors communication through the network port expansion module HMI and local terminal connection The LTM R controller monitors network communications and can report both a fault and a warning when network communications is lost Both fault and warning monitoring are enabled by default The network port communications has the following configurable settings Parameter Setting Range Factory Default Network port fault enable Enable Disable Enable Network port warning enable Enable Disable Enable Network port fallback setting 1 Hold Run 0 1 O 2 off 0 1 0 2 on 0 1 off O 2 off 0 1 0 2 off settings 1 The operating mode affects the configurable parameters for the network port fallback 104 1639502 12 2006 Metering and Monitoring Fun
316. ling the LTM R controller and expansion module e commissioning the LTM R controller by setting essential parameter values e using the LTM R controller and expansion module both with and without additional human machine interface devices e maintaining the LTM R controller and expansion module This manual is intended for design engineers system integrators system operators maintenance engineers The data and illustrations found in this book are not binding We reserve the right to modify our products in line with our policy of continuous product development The information in this document is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by Schneider Electric 1639502 12 2006 13 About the Book Related Documents Product Related Warnings User Comments Title of Documentation Reference Number TeSys T LTM R CANopen Motor Management Controller User s Manual 1639503 TeSys T LTM R DeviceNet Motor Management Controller User s Manual 1639504 TeSys T LTM R Modbus Motor Management Controller User s Manual 1639501 You can download these technical publications and other technical information from our website at www telemecanique com Schneider Electric assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document If you have any suggestions for improvements or amendments or have found errors in this publication please noti
317. lizers paint Transportation industry e automotive transfer lines e airports Other industry tunnel machines cranes Complex machine segments Includes highly automated or coordinated machines used in pumping systems paper conversion printing lines e HVAC 1639502 12 2006 17 Introduction Supported The motor management system supports the following industries and associated Industries business sectors Industry Sectors Application Building e office buildings Control and manage the building facilities e shopping centers critical HVAC systems e industrial buildings e water e ships e air e hospitals gas e cultural facilities e electricity e airports steam Industry e metal mineral and mining cement control and monitor pump motors glass steel ore extraction e control ventilation microelectronic e control load traction and movements e petrochemical e view status and communicate with machines e ethanol process and communicate the data captured e chemical pulp and paper industry remotely manage data for one or several pharmaceutical sites via Internet e food and beverage Energy and Infrastructure water treatment and transportation control and monitor pump motors e transportation infrastructure for control ventilation people and freight airports road remotely control wind turbine tunnels subways and tramways remotely manage data for on
318. llback condition and turns off logic outputs O 1 and O 2 while the stop command is active After the stop command is no longer active logic outputs O 1 and O 2 return to their programmed fallback state 3 wire impulse A stop command overrides the fallback condition and turns off logic outputs O 1 and O 2 The outputs remain off after the stop command is removed and do not return to their programmed fallback state For information on configuring falloack related parameters see p 106 1639502 12 2006 227 Motor Control Functions In all operating mode types the following logic outputs behave as described below Logic Output Behavior 0 3 Activated by any enabled protection warning e Terminals NO 33 34 0 4 Activated by any enabled protection fault e Terminals NC 95 96 e Terminals NO 97 98 Note When control voltage is too low or off e NC 95 96 open e NO 97 98 close 228 1639502 12 2006 Motor Control Functions Control Wiring and Fault Management Overview When Overload predefined operating mode is selected the LTM R controller does not latch logic output commands unless directed by either a PLC master control program or the LTM R controller s custom logic program For all other predefined operating modes Independent Reverser 2 Step and 2 Speed the predefined control logic in the LTM R controller is designed to meet the the objectives o
319. logic output O 1 and logic input 1 2 controls logic output O 2 e In network or local HMI control modes the Motor Run Forward Command parameter controls logic output O 1 and the Motor Run Reverse Command controls logic output O 2 e Logic input 1 3 is not used in the control circuit but can be configured to set a bit in memory e Logic outputs O 1 and O 2 deactivate and the motor stops when control voltage becomes too low e Logic outputs 0 1 O 2 and 0 4 deactivate and the motor stops in response to a diagnostic error Note See Control Wiring and Fault Management p 229 for information about the interaction between e the LTM R controller s predefined control logic and e the control wiring an example of which appears in the following diagram 238 1639502 12 2006 Motor Control Functions Reverser The following wiring diagram represents a simplified example of the LTM R Application controller in a Reverser local control 3 wire impulse application Diagram 1 The N C interlock contacts KM1 and KM2 are not mandatory because the LTM R controller firmware interlocks O 1 and O 2 For additional examples of reverser operating mode IEC diagrams see p 543 For examples of reverser operating mode NEMA diagrams see p 563 1639502 12 2006 239 Motor Control Functions 1 0 Assignment Reverser operating mode provides the following logic inputs
320. lt bit 5 Current phase reversal fault bit 6 Motor temperature sensor fault bit 7 Voltage phase imbalance fault bit 8 Voltage phase loss fault bit 9 Voltage phase reversal fault bit 10 Undervoltage fault bit 11 Overvoltage fault bit 12 Underpower fault bit 13 Overpower fault bit 14 Under power factor fault bit 15 Over power factor fault 454 Reserved 455 Word System status register 1 bit 0 System ready bit 1 System on bit 2 System fault bit 3 System warning bit 4 System tripped bit 5 Fault reset authorized bit 6 Controller power bit 7 Motor running with detection of a current if greater than 10 FLC bits 8 13 Motor average current ratio 32 100 FLC 63 200 FLC bit 14 Control via HMI bit 15 Motor starting start in progress 1 ascending current is greater than 10 FLC 0 descending current is less than 150 FLC 1639502 12 2006 499 Use Register Variable type Read only variables Note p 478 456 Word System status register 2 bit 0 Auto reset active bit 1 Not significant bit 2 Fault power cycle requested bit 3 Motor restart time undefined bit 4 Rapid cycle lockout bit 5 Load shedding bit 6 Motor speed bit 7 HMI port comm loss bit 8 Network port comm loss bit 9 Motor transition lockout bits 1
321. ltage Enable L1 L2 Volts HMI Display L1 L2 Voltage Enable L2 L3 Volts HMI Display L2 L3 Voltage Enable L3 L1 Volts HMI Display L3 L1 Voltage Enable Volt Ph Imb HMI Display Voltage Phase Imbalance Enable Power Display All Selects all Power items Power Factor HMI Display Power Factor Enable Active Power HMI Display Active Power Enable React Power HMI Display Rective Power Enable PowerConsump HMI Display Power Consumption Enable Temp Sensor HMI Motor Temp Sensor Enable 384 1639502 12 2006 Use Scrolling Parameter List The LCD display automatically presents a scrolling list of parameters and their dynamically changing values if e there is no fault or warning and e parameters have been selected in the HMI Display sub menu The scrolling parameter list e presents parameters in the same order they appear in the HMI Display sub menu e displays each parameter for 2 seconds then moves to the next parameter e returns to the first selected parameter in the list after reaching the end of the list When a fault or warning occurs the LCD display presents fault or warning information and suspends the scrolling parameter list The scrolling parameter list resumes e after the warning condition ceases to exist or the fault is cleared or e by pressing the ESC button For information on the content of each section of the LCD when displaying the scrolling list of parameters see
322. m in kbps 9 6 19 2 45 45 93 75 187 5 500 1 500 up to in Mbps e 3 e6 e 12 Possible Transmission Media Fiber optic link Twisted pair line standard version type RS 485 Connector SUB D 9 Open style Maximum Bus The bus cable lengths and corresponding baud rates are as follows Cable Length Maximum bus cable length Maximum bus cable length Baud rates per segment with 3 repeaters 1 200 m 3 936 ft 4 800 m 15 748 ft 9 6 19 2 45 45 93 75 kbps 1 000 m 3 280 ft 4 000 m 13 123 ft 187 5 kbps 500 m 1 640 ft 2 000 m 6 561 ft 500 kbps 200 m 656 ft 800 m 2 624 ft 1 5 Mbps 100 m 328 ft 400 m 1 312 ft 3 6 12 Mbps 312 1639502 12 2006 Installation Profibus DP Accessory and Cable References List of Profibus DP connection accessories Description Reference Remote I Os on Profibus DP bus Interface module to Advantys STB network STB NDP 2112 Momentum communication module 170 DTN 110 00 Connectors for remote I O Connector with terminator 490 NAD 911 03 communication module In line connector 490 NAD 911 04 In line connector with programming port 490 NAD 911 05 List of Profibus DP connection cables Description Reference 100m cable TSX PBS CA 100 400m cable TSX PBS CA 400 1639502 12 2006 313 Installation 314 1639
323. m is an example of the timing sequence for the Independent Sequence operating mode that shows the inputs and outputs for a 3 wire impulse configuration 1 1 Start 1 2 optional 1 4 Stop l Y y ya iv 0 1 KM1 Y Y y O 2 optional 4 z 1 Normal operation 2 Start command ignored stop command active Parameters Independent operating mode requires no associated parameters 1639502 12 2006 237 Motor Control Functions Reverser Operating Mode Description Use Reverser operating mode in direct on line across the line full voltage reversing motor starting applications Functional This function includes the following features Characteristics Accessible in 3 control modes Local Terminal Strip Local HMI and Network e Firmware interlocking prevents simultaneous activation of the O 1 forward and O 2 reverse logic outputs e The LTM R controller can change direction from forward to reverse and reverse to forward in 1 of 2 modes e Standard Transition mode The Control Direct Transition bit is Off This mode requires a Stop command followed by count down of the adjustable Motor Transition Timeout anti backspin timer e Direct Transition mode The Control Direct Transition bit is On This mode automatically transitions after the count down of the adjustable Motor Transition Timeout anti backspin timer e In local terminal strip control mode logic input 1 1 controls
324. m that the LTM R controller and the configuration file both use the same e current range and e network protocol If there is a mismatch the software asks if you wish to proceed If you elect to proceed the software transfers all matching parameters excluding parameters that fail a range check When the transfer is complete the software displays the names and addresses of parameters that failed the range check and were not transferred To transfer a configuration file from the PC to the LTM R controller Step Action 1 Be sure the configuration software is communicating with the LTM R controller If the task bar indicates Disconnected select Connect in either the icon bar or in the Link menu 2 Be sure the file to be transferred is in the Main window To open a file e select the Open Configuration command in either the icon bar or the File menu The Open dialog opens then e inthe Open dialog navigate to the desired location and click Open 3 Transfer the configuration from your PC to the LTM R controller Select PC to Device in either the icon bar or the Link to File Transfer sub menu 438 1639502 12 2006 Use Export Settings The configuration software can also export a list of all configured parameters This list can be exported in the following electronic file formats spreadsheet csv HTML text XML The exported list indicates each parameter s read or write
325. maximum Response time Change to state 1 15 ms input only 25 ms input only Change to state 0 5 ms input only 25 ms input only IEC 1131 1 conformity Type 1 Type 1 Type of Input Resistive Capacitive Altitude Derating The following table provides the deratings to apply for dielectric strengths and maximum operating temperature according to altitude Corrective factors for altitude 2000 m 3000 m 3500 m 4000 m 4500 m 6561 68 ft 9842 52 ft 11482 94 ft 13123 36 ft 14763 78 ft Dielectric Strength Ui 1 0 93 0 87 0 8 0 7 Max Operating Temperature 1 0 93 0 92 0 9 0 88 44 1639502 12 2006 Introduction Configurable Parameters General Parameter Settings General configurable parameters for the LTM R controller and the expansion module are described below Note The order of parameter configuration depends on the parameter configuration tool utilized For information on the sequence of parameter configuration refer to instructions on using the following parameter configuration tools ea Magelis XBT HMI in a 1 to 1 configuration see p 366 a Magelis XBT HMI in a 1 to many configuration see p 397 PowerSuite software see p 442 the PLC see p 505 General configurable parameters for the LTM R controller and the expansion module include Parameter Setting Range Factory Defa
326. mbalance faults count 107 Ulnt Undercurrent faults count 109 Ulnt HMI port faults count 110 Ulnt Controller internal faults count 111 Ulnt Internal port faults count 112 Ulnt Network port internal faults count 113 Ulnt Network port config faults count 114 Ulnt Network port faults count 115 Ulnt Auto reset count 116 Ulnt Thermal overload warnings count 117 118 UDint Motor starts count 119 120 UDint Operating time s 121 Int Controller internal temperature max C 1639502 12 2006 489 Use LTM Monitoring The LTM monitoring statistics are described below Statistics Register Variable type Read only variables Note p 478 122 Ulnt Faults count 123 Ulnt Warnings count 124 125 UDint Motor LO1 starts count 126 127 UDint Motor LO2 starts count 128 Ulnt Diagnostic faults count 129 Ulnt Reserved 130 Ulnt Overcurrent faults count 131 Ulnt Current phase loss faults count 132 Ulnt Motor temperature sensor faults count 133 Ulnt Voltage phase imbalance faults count 1 134 Ulnt Voltage phase loss faults count 1 135 Ulnt Wiring faults count 1 136 Ulnt Undervoltage faults count 1 137 Ulnt Overvoltage faults count 1 138 Ulnt Underpower faults count 1 139 Ulnt Overpower faults count 1 140 Ulnt Under power factor faults count 1 141 Ulnt Over power factor faults count 1 142 Ulnt Load sheddings count 1 143 144 UDint Active power consumption kWh 1 145
327. me FLC Ratio Motor Full Load Current Ratio n 1 FLC Max Motor Full Load Current Max n 1 Avg Current Average Current n 1 L1 Current L1 Current n 1 L2 Current L2 Current n 1 L3 Current L3 Current n 1 Gr Current Ground Current n 1 AvgCurrRatio Average Current Ratio n 1 L1CurrRatio L1 Current Ratio n 1 L2CurrRatio L2 Current Ratio n 1 L3CurrRatio L3 Current Ratio n 1 GrCurrRatio Ground Current Ratio n 1 Curr Ph Imb Current Phase Imbalance n 1 Th Capacity Thermal Capacity Level n 1 Avg Volts Average Voltage n 1 L3 L1 Volts L3 L1 Voltage n 1 L1 L2 Volts L1 L2 Voltage n 1 L2 L3 Volts L2 L3 Voltage n 1 Volt Ph Imb Voltage Phase Imbalance n 1 Frequency Frequency n 1 Active Power Active Power n 1 Power Factor Power Factor n 1 Temp Sensor Motor Temp Sensor n 1 378 1639502 12 2006 Use Fault n 2 records information in the following parameters Level 3 Level 4 Parameter name reference Fault n 2 Fault Code Fault Code n 2 Date Date And Time n 2 Time FLC Ratio Motor Full Load Current Ratio n 2 FLC Max Motor Full Load Current Max n 2 Avg Current Average Current n 2 L1 Current L1 Current n 2 L2 Current L2 Current n 2 L3 Current L3 Current n 2 Gr Current Ground Current n 2 AvgCurrRatio Average Current Ratio n 2 L1CurrRatio L1 Current Ratio n 2 L2CurrRatio L2 Current Ratio n 2 L3CurrRatio L3 Current Ratio n 2 GrCurrRatio Ground Curren
328. me type the setting values are retained This function applies to both single phase and 3 phase motors The motor temperature sensor function has the following configurable parameter settings which apply to the selected motor temp sensor type Parameters Setting range Factory setting Sensor type e None None e PTC Binary e PTC Analog e NTC Analog Fault enable Enable Disable Disable Warning enable Enable Disable Disable 1639502 12 2006 165 Motor Protection Functions Motor Temperature Sensor PTC Binary Description Functional Characteristics Block Diagram Parameter Settings The PTC Binary motor temperature sensing function is enabled when the Motor Temp Sensor Type parameter is set to PTC Binary and the LTM R controller is connected to a binary positive temperature coefficient thermistor embedded in the motor The LTM R controller monitors the state of the temperature sensing element and signals e a motor temperature sensor warning when the measured resistance exceeds a fixed threshold e a motor temperature sensor fault when the measured resistance exceeds the same fixed threshold The fault and warning conditions continue until measured resistance falls below a separate fixed motor temperature sensor re closing threshold Motor temperature sensing fault thresholds are factory pre set and are not configurable There is no fault time delay Fault monitoring can be en
329. minators VW3 A8 306 R LTM R controller Expansion module NO ROD 1639502 12 2006 287 Installation Connection Accessories The following table lists connection accessories for the Magelis XBT and other HMI devices Designation Description Reference With 0 3 m 1 ft integrated cable VW3 A8 306 TF03 T junction boxes With 1 m 3 2 ft integrated cable VW3 A8 306 TF10 Line terminators for R 150 Q VW3 A8 306 R RJ45 connector Magelis connecting cable Length 2 5 m 8 2 ft XBTZ938 Magelis XBTN410 only 25 pts SubD connector to connect to Magelis XBT Power cable Length 1 m 3 2 ft VW3A8106 PC only RS 232 to RS 485 converter Communication cables Length 0 3 m 1 ft VW3 A8 306 R03 Length 1 m 3 2 ft VW3 A8 306 R10 288 1639502 12 2006 Installation Wiring General Principles At a Glance Inputs Wiring There are six stages in wiring the Controller Wiring the current transformers see p 293 Wiring the ground fault current transformers see p 298 Wiring the temperature sensors see p 300 Wiring the power supply and I O see Inputs Wiring and p 15 Wiring the voltage transformers and I O on the Expansion Module see Inputs Wiring and p 15 e Wiring the communication port see p 306 The controller has 6 digital inputs available via field wiring terminals 1 1 1 6 The input voltage is the same voltage
330. mum load for these outputs is a K Line contactor with a low consumption coil The N C 95 96 relay can control 2 contactors of the specified size in parallel 1639502 12 2006 305 Installation 6 2 Wiring the Profibus DP Communication Network Profibus DP Communication Network Introduction This section describes how to connect a controller to an RS 485 Profibus DP network with a SUB D 9 or an open style connector What s in this This section contains the following topics Section Topic Page Profibus DP Communication Port Wiring Terminal Characteristics 307 Connection to Profibus DP 310 306 1639502 12 2006 Installation Profibus DP Communication Port Wiring Terminal Characteristics General The main physical characteristics of a Profibus DP port are Physical interface Multipoint 2 wire RS 485 electrical networking Connector Terminal block and SUB D 9 Physical The LTM R controller is equipped with 2 connector types on the front face Interface and 1 a female shielded SUB D 9 connector Connectors 2 an open style pull apart terminal block The figure shows the LTM R front face with the Profibus DP connectors LTMROSPBD HMI Comm _ 2T05334 Fallback No44 23 24 33 34 S555955 Both connectors are electrically identical They follow the Schneider Electric interope
331. n Error Motor Temperature Sensor Wiring Error Voltage Phase Reversal Error Current Phase Reversal Error Wiring diagnostics are enabled using the following parameters Detection Protection Enabling parameters Setting range Factory setting Fault reported CT Reversal Wiring Fault Enable e Yes No Wiring Fault e No Phase Configuration e Motor Phases if set to single phase e single phase 3 phase Wiring Fault e 3 phase Motor Temperature Motor Temp Sensor Type if set to None None Wiring Fault Sensor Wiring a sensor type and not to None e PTC binary e PTC analog e NTC analog Voltage Phase Voltage Phase Reversal Fault Enable e Yes No Voltage Phase Reversal e No Reversal Fault Current Phase Current Phase Reversal Fault Enable Yes No Current Phase Reversal e No Reversal Fault CT Reversal When individual external load CTs are used they must all be installed in the same Error direction The LTM R controller checks the CT wiring and reports an error if it detects one of the current transformers is wired backwards when compared to the others This function can be enabled and disabled Phase The LTM R controller checks all 3 motor phases for On Level current then checks Configuration Error the Motor Phases parameter setting The LTM R controller reports an error if it detects current in phase 2 if the LTM R controller is configured for single phase operation This function is en
332. n diagram features a 3 wire impulse local control with network control selectable wiring diagram H OJA Stop Aili EF A2 A3 H Hand Local Control O Off A Automatic Network Control The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained local control with network control selectable wiring diagram H Hand Local Control L O Off A1 A Automatic Network Control A2 562 1639502 12 2006 NEMA Format Wiring Diagrams Reverser Mode Wiring Diagrams Application The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse local control wiring diagram Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Local Control 3a L1 1639502 12 2006 563 NEMA Format Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Local Control Application Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Local Control with Network control selectable Application Diagram with 2 Wire The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained local control wiring diagram F Forward O Off FIO R Reverse ale LA ofo A2 iby Xen e E e TEE TES The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse local control with network control selectable wiring diagram H Hand Lo
333. n module to an HMI device of Generic HMI your choice using a customized cable Device The customized cable requires the following RJ45 port pinouts to connect to the LTM R controller or LTM E expansion module Front view D1 DO _P Common The RJ45 wiring layout is Pin no Signal Description 1 Do not connect LMT R or LMT E transceiver 2 Do not connect LMT R or LMT E transceiver 4 D1 or B Communication between HMI and LTM R controller 5 DO or A Communication between HMI and LTM R controller 6 Do not connect LMT R or LMT E voltage zero crossing 7 VP Positive 7 Vdc power supply 8 Common Signal and power supply common 286 1639502 12 2006 Installation Connecting to a PC running PowerSuite Software in 1 to 1 Mode Connecting toa PC running PowerSuite Software in 1 to Many Mode The diagrams below show a 1 to 1 connection from a PC running PowerSuite to the LTM R controller with and without the expansion module PC running PowerSuite software Power cable VW3 A8 106 LTM R controller Expansion module kOoOnND The diagram below shows a 1 to many connection from a PC running PowerSuite software to up to 8 controllers with or without the expansion module PC running PowerSuite software Power cable VW3 A8 106 T junction boxes VW3 A8 306 TFe Communication cable VW3 A83 06Ree line ter
334. n the Fault Reset Mode parameter is set to Manual the LTM R controller allows resets usually performed by a person via a power cycle of the control power or by using a local reset means including e Local Terminal Strip logic input 1 5 e Reset button on the LTM R controller e Reset commands from the local HMI A manual reset provides on site personnel the opportunity to inspect the equipment and wiring before performing the reset Note A manual reset blocks all reset commands from the LTM R controller s network port even when the Control Mode is set to Network The LTM R controller provides the following manual reset methods Methods Protection Category Monitored fault Control mode Local terminal strip Local HMI Network 4 Diagnostic Run Command Check RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 Stop Command Check RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 Run Check Back RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 Stop Check Back RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 Wiring configuration PTC connection RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 errors CT Reversal RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 Voltage Phase Reversal RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 Current Phase Reversal RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 RB PC I 5 Voltage Phase Loss RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 RB PC I 5 Phase Configuration RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 RB Test Reset button on the LTM R controller front face or a local
335. n the HMI using an XBT Z915 programming cable The HMI LCD reads FIRMWARE VX X WAITING FOR TRANSFER Start up the Magelis XBT_L1000 programming software Close all child windows in the programming software In the File menu select Open The Open dialog is displayed OJJA w In the Open dialog navigate to the 1 to 1 or 1 to many software application file with a dop extension and click Open The programming software displays the selected file In the Transfers menu select Export 8 When notified that the Export command will destroy the existing application click OK to continue the export The HMI LCD indicates DOWNLOAD IN PROGRESS and then DOWNLOAD COMPLETED 9 Click OK when the programming software reports Transfer accomplished successfully 1639502 12 2006 351 Use 8 4 Using the Magelis XBTN410 HMI 1 to 1 At a Glance Summary This section shows you how to use the Magelis XBTN410 HMI to operate a single LTM R controller in a 1 HMI to 1 LTM R controller 1 to 1 configuration See p 397 for instructions on how to use a single Magelis XBTN410 HMI to operate up to 8 LTM R controllers in a 1 to many configuration The 1 to 1 and the 1 to many configurations each present a unique e user interface LCD display and keypad e menu structure What s in this This section contains the following topics Section Topic Page Physi
336. n uses one of the following selected trip current characteristics TCCs e definite time e inverse thermal default Both copper and iron models use the maximum measured phase current and the Motor trip class parameter value to generate a non scaled thermal image The reported thermal capacity level is calculated by scaling the thermal image to FLC 76 1639502 12 2006 Metering and Monitoring Functions Formulas The thermal capacity level calculated measurement is based on the following formulas Calculated Model Formula measurement Thermal capacity model copper thermal Image non scaled gcu Imax x 1 e TC x 17 79 iron thermal Image non scaled fe Imax x 1 e t TC x 58 71 Reported Thermal copper thermal Image scaled cu Ocu FLC x 1 414 capacity level iron thermal Image scaled ofe Ofe FLC x 1 125 Where cu Non scaled copper thermal image Imax Maximum phase current e Euler s constant 2 71828 t Time TC Motor trip class value 17 79 Copper trip class constant 6fe Non scaled iron thermal image 58 71 Iron trip class constant Ocu Scaled copper thermal image FLC Full load current parameter value FLC1 or FLC2 Ofe Scaled iron thermal image Characteristics The thermal capacity function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Unit Accuracy 1 Resolution 1 Refresh interval
337. national safety codes and standards Failure to follow this instruction can result in death serious injury or equipment damage This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Detecting Problems 522 Troubleshooting 523 Preventive Maintenance 526 Replacing an LTM R Controller and LTM E Expansion Module 529 Communication Warnings and Faults 530 1639502 12 2006 521 Maintenance Detecting Problems Overview Device LEDs HMI LCD PowerSuite The LTM R controller and the expansion module perform self diagnostic checks at power up and during operation Problems with either the LTM R controller or expansion module can be detected using e Power and Alarm LEDs on the LTM R controller e Power and Input LEDs on the expansion module e LCD Display ona Magelis XBTN41 0 HMI device connected to the LTM R controller s Local HMI port e PowerSuite software running on a PC connected to the LTM R controller s Local HMI port The LEDs on the LTM R controller and expansion module will indicate the following problems LTM R LED LTM E LED Problem Power Alarm PLC Alarm Power Off Solid red Internal fault On Solid red Protection fault On Flashing red Protection warning 2x per second On Flashing red Load shed or rapid cycle 5x per second On Solid red Internal fault The Magelis XBTN
338. nce 148 motor predefined operating mode independent 234 overload 231 reverser 238 two speed 248 two step 242 motor protection functions 126 characteristics 125 current phase imbalance 141 current phase loss 145 current phase reversal 148 external ground current 162 ground current 158 internal ground current 159 jam 151 long start 149 motor temperature sensor 165 motor temperature sensor NTC analog 170 motor temperature sensor PTC analog 168 motor temperature sensor PTC binary 166 operation 125 over power factor 203 1639502 12 2006 589 Index overcurrent 155 overpower 197 overvoltage 187 thermal overload 130 thermal overload definite time 138 thermal overload inverse thermal 131 under power factor 200 undercurrent 153 underpower 194 undervoltage 184 voltage phase imbalance 176 voltage phase loss 180 voltage phase reversal 183 motor starts count 489 motor step 1 to 2 threshold 511 timeout 511 motor temperature sensor 93 165 503 fault enable 122 165 369 419 fault threshold 122 169 171 369 419 faults count 90 375 n 0 377 426 491 n 1 378 427 492 n 2 379 493 n 3 380 494 n 4 381 495 type 101 122 165 166 168 170 330 369 warning 165 warning enable 122 369 419 warning threshold 122 169 171 369 419 network port address 49 address setting 330 374 514 bad config 503 baud rate 49 baud rate
339. nd temperature sensor input Plug in terminal PLC network OOANOaARWN The Test Reset button performs a reset self test or will place the LTM R controller in an internal fault state For a detail description of the test rest button functions see p 346 This port connects the LTM R controller to the following devices using an RJ45 port e an expansion module e a PC running PowerSuite PLC programming software e aMagelis XBT410 This port provides communication between the LTM R controller and a network PLC via a 9 pin sub D female connector 32 1639502 12 2006 Introduction LEDs LTM R controller LED descriptions LED name Describes Appearance Status HMI Comm Communication between LTM R flashing yellow communication controller and HMI device PC or off no communication expansion module Power LTM R controller power or internal fault solid green power on motor off no internal faults condition flashing green power on motor on no internal faults off power off or internal faults exist Alarm Protection warning or fault or internal fault solid red internal or protection fault flashing red warning 2 X per second flashing red load shed or rapid cycle 5 X per second off no faults warnings load shed or rapid cycle when power is on Fallback Indicates communications loss between soli
340. ndercurrent gt a24 st 26 etek Se a se fie sn cad Fae td el oe tok 153 ONIKE iare a 3 45 cetee A E AO bok hash po spayed de do on AA 155 Ground Current oso occ esa tak os ited ea ieee ce eae Db ears ear See s 158 Internal Ground Current 0 0 0 0 0 ccc eee eee 159 External Ground Current 0 0 0 0 0 ee eee es 162 Motor Temperature Sensor 1 2 00 cece eee 165 Motor Temperature Sensor PTC Binary 0 0 cee eee eee 166 Motor Temperature Sensor PTC Analog 0 00 c eee eee eee 168 Motor Temperature Sensor NTC Analog 00 eee eee eee 170 Rapid Cycle Lockout 2 13223 os ais OS tae See Eee ee eee 173 Voltage Motor Protection Functions 0 22 0002 cece eee eee 175 Voltage Phase Imbalance 00 00 eee 176 Voltage Phase LOSS acceca cerei poren cei Ve eet we eea be ee eee teed 180 Voltage Phase Reversal 0 00 ete eee 183 Undervoltage ao 2s ie ad ee eres eae Ea Mee ee po ee pe 184 Overvoltage s 2 peek bik ca cheek ebb ee hia teed bag eb oe eae 187 Voltage Load Shedding 0 0 cece tenes 190 Power Motor Protection Functions 0 00000 cece ee eee eee eee 193 UNdGrPOWE i seine noite arte erate eet nee ee neta ee petites at 194 OVEIPOWE ee eee et eee RA Ee Re Ee eee Fed 197 Under Power Factor 0 ccc ee eee eens 200 Over POWER FAClON vse tee eS oii ba ie ede eds aba Ee ae ede de Oe Rees 203 Motor Control Functions 0
341. ndicularly to the controller or expansion module face To replace the standard strips with alternative strips Step Action 1 Remove the 6 standard terminal strips using a screwdriver to leverage the strips away from the unit 282 1639502 12 2006 Installation Note There are two 4 pin terminal strips These strips are not interchangeable It is important therefore that you read the markings on the terminal strips and follow the diagram below when positioning them 283 1639502 12 2006 Installation Connecting the The controller connects to the expansion module using an RJ45 network connection LTM RController cable as shown in the diagram below and the LTM E Expansion Module 1 m max 2705334 SIS H S 2705334 Va LTMRO8PBD PROFIBUS B O HMI Comm E Power Alarm J Fallback i BF E Test Reset Z1 Z2 T1 T2 s A B DGNDVP I 7 C7 18 C8 1 9 C9 1 10 C10 COVOOVVPY Three lengths of cable are available to connect the controller and the expansion module depending on their relative positions These cables which are terminated at each end with an RJ45 connector are described in the table below Cable Reference Length LTMCC004 40 mm 1 57 in 2 LU9RO3 0 3 m 11
342. ng 0 0 lt 0s1 Motor temperature sensor fault 0 0 lt 0s2 6 Temperature sensing element resistance 0s1 Motor temperature sensor warning threshold 0s2 Motor temperature sensor fault threshold ______ys Motor temperature sensor warning NTC Analog L Motor temperature sensor fault NTC Analog The NTC analog motor temperature sensor function has the following configurable parameter settings Parameters Setting range Factory setting Fault threshold 20 6500 Q in 0 1 Q increments 200 Q Warning threshold 20 6500 Q in 0 1 Q increments 200 Q The NTC analog motor temperature sensor function has the following characteristics Characteristics Value Hysteresis 105 of Warning threshold and Fault thresholds Tripping time 0 5 0 6 s Trip time accuracy 0 1 s 1639502 12 2006 171 Motor Protection Functions Example The following diagram describes a Motor temperature sensor NTC analog fault with automatic reset 9 A Run state Fault condition Run state resume t gt i gt ix w 0s3 i s2 Reset 6r2 Fault threshold 6r3 Fault re closing threshold 105 of fault threshold 172 1639502 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Rapid Cycle Lockout Description Functional Characteristics The rapid cycle lockout function prevents potential harm to the motor caused by repetitive s
343. ng Application Software Files to Magelis XBTN410 HMI 351 1639502 12 2006 347 Use Installing Magelis XBT L1000 Programming Software Overview The LTM R controller comes with a copy of Magelis XBT L1000 programming software You need to e install the Magelis XBT L1000 programming software on your PC and e use it to transfer either a 1 to 1 or 1 to many software application to the Magelis XBTN410 HMI Note Magelis XBT L1000 programming software is a powerful programming tool This document describes only its utility in opening and transferring pre programmed software applications to the Magelis XBTN410 HMI For more information about the Magelis XBT L1000 programming software consult its help file and printed documentation For instructions on how to download 1 to 1 and 1 to many software applications see p 350 For instructions on how to transfer 1 to 1 and 1 to many software applications from your PC to the Magelis XBTN410 HM see p 357 348 1639502 12 2006 Use Installation Steps To install the Magelis XBT L1000 programming software on your PC Step Action 1 Place the installation disk into your PC s disk drive The installation program should begin 2 If the installation program does not begin use Microsoft Windows Explorer to navigate to and click on the file Setup exe If any screens appear that do not require action cli
344. ng Network Port Warning Enable HMI Port Address HMI Port Address Setting Baud Rate HMI Port Baud Rate Setting Parity HMI Port Parity Setting Config Ctrl HMI Keypad Config Via HMI Keypad Enable HMI Eng Tool Config Via HMI Engineering Tool Enable Comm Loss Fault HMI Port Fault Enable Fault Time Network Port Comm Loss Timeout Fallback HMI Port Fallback Setting Warning HMI Port Warning Enable HMI Display Use the HMI Display sub menu to add items to the scrolling display of dynamically changing parameter values For information about using this feature see p 383 374 1639502 12 2006 Use Main Menu Statistics 1 to 1 Statistics Menu The Statistics sub menu is the second selection in Level 2 of the Main menu The Statistics menu contains the following Level 3 sub menus History Counters Fault n 0 Fault n 1 Fault n 2 Fault n 3 Fault n 4 History and The History and Counters sub menus contain the following read only parameters Counters Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Parameter name reference History CntlrTempMax Controller Internal Temperature Max Oper Time Operating Time Motor Starts Motor Starts Count LO1 Starts Motor LO1 Starts Count LO2 Starts Motor LO2 Starts Count LastStartDur Motor Last Start Duration LastStrtCurr Motor Last Start Current Ratio Counters All Faults Faults Count All Warnings Warnings Count Auto Resets Auto Reset Count Protection Th Ovid F
345. ng Threshold e Thermal Overload Fault Reset Threshold e 2 function outputs e Thermal Overload Warning e Thermal Overload Fault e 2 counting statistics e Thermal Overload Faults Count e Thermal Overload Warnings Count 1 setting for an external auxiliary motor cooling fan e Motor Aux Fan Cooled e 1 measure of utilized thermal capacity e Thermal Capacity Level Note For LTM R controllers configured for 2 speed predefined operating mode two fault thresholds are used FLC1 and FLC2 1639502 12 2006 135 Motor Protection Functions Block Diagram 11 e Copper temperature Ocu 12 e e Imax p K iara Imax x 1 az t TC x 1 13 L aan Scaled Oyv 8cu eal 2 bo Ocu Ocu FLC x 1 414 Omax Scaled Ode Ofe gt 2 Ofe Ofe FLC x 1 125 Fast Motor Aux Fan Cooled cooling lavg gt 0 1 x FLC gt gt OR Imax e gt Iron temperature fe Ls i afe Imax x 1 _ WTCfe x 98 71 Motor Trip Class TC Iron Trip Class TCfe x4 4 17 79 copper trip class constant 58 71 iron trip class constant e Euler s constant 2 71828 FLC Full load current parameter value FLC1 or FLC2 Imax Maximum phase current t time TC Motor Trip Class value TCfe Iron Trip Class value cu Copper temperature cu Scaled copper tempe
346. ng the value stored in the Date And Time Setting parameter Internal clock accuracy is 1 second per hour If power is continuously applied for 1 year the internal clock accuracy is 30 minutes per year If power is turned Off for 30 minutes or less the LTM R controller retains its internal clock settings with accuracy of 2 minutes If power is turned Off for more than 30 minutes the LTM R controller resets its internal clock to the time when power was turned Off 528 1639502 12 2006 Maintenance Replacing an LTM R Controller and LTM E Expansion Module Overview Replacing the LTM R Controller Replacing the Expansion Module Retiring Devices Questions to consider in advance of replacing either an LTM R controller or an LTM E expansion module are e is the replacement device the same model as the original e have the configuration settings of the LTM R controller been saved and are they available to be transferred to its replacement Be sure the motor is turned off before replacing either the LTM R controller or the LTM E expansion module The time to plan for the replacement of an LTM R controller is e when the LTM R controller settings are initially configured and e any time that one or more of its settings are subsequently re configured Because setting values may not be accessible when the LTM R controller is replaced for example in case of device failure you should create a record o
347. nge of the controller For more information about controller types see p 15 1639502 12 2006 295 For more information on the lug lug kit refer to instruction bulletin 30072 013 101 supplied with the kit or available from www us SquareD com under Technical Library The controller accepts the Class 9999 Type MLPL lug lug kit Typical wiring using the lug lug kit Note The lug lug kit is IPO Installation Internal CT Wiring using a Lug Lug kit 1639502 12 2006 296 Installation External Load CT Wiring The controller can accept 5A and 1A secondary signals from external current transformers The recommended controller model for these currents is the 0 4 8A model You can also use multiple passes through the controller CT windows if required External CTs are specified with a transformation ratio The ratio of the external CT is the ratio of the motor input current to the CT output current Set the parameters Load CT Primary the first number of the CT ratio Load CT Secondary the second number of the CT ratio and Load CT Multiple Passes the number of times the CT output wires pass through the controller s internal CT windows to enable the controller to adjust the FLC range and display the actual line current For more information see p 47 Typical wiring using external CTs
348. ngle phase and 3 phase motors The under power factor function includes the following features e 2 thresholds e Under Power Factor Warning Threshold e Under Power Factor Fault Threshold e 1 fault time delay e Under Power Factor Fault Timeout e 2 function outputs e Under Power Factor Warning e Under Power Factor Fault e 1 counting statistic e Under Power Factor Faults Count 200 1639502 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Block Diagram Parameter Settings Function Characteristics Under power factor warning Run state ___ I Power Factor PF lt PFs1 gt Under power factor fault Power Factor PF lt PFs2 ___p 0 k Run state p AND PFs1 Under power factor warning threshold PFs2 Under power factor fault threshold T Under power factor fault timeout amp Under power factor warning Under power factor fault The under power factor function has the following parameters Parameters Setting range Factory setting Fault enable Enable Disable Disable Fault timeout 1 25 s in 0 1 s increments 10s Fault threshold 0 1 x Power factor in 0 01 0 60 increments Warning enable Enable Disable Disable Warning threshold 0 1 x Power factor in 0 01 0 60 increments The under power factor function has the following characteristics Characteristics Value Hysteresis 105
349. ning Enable Warn Level Voltage Phase Imbalance Warning Threshold VOLT PH LOSS Fault Voltage Phase Loss Fault Enable Fault Time Voltage Phase Loss Fault Timeout Warn Voltage Phase Loss Warning Enable Volt Ph Reversal Fault Voltage Phase Reversal Fault Enable Voltage Over Under Voltage OVER VOLTAGE continued Fault Overvoltage Fault Enable Fault Level Overvoltage Fault Threshold Fault Time Overvoltage Fault Timeout Warn Overvoltage Warning Enable Warn Level Overvoltage Warning Threshold UNDER VOLTAGE Fault Undervoltage Fault Enable Fault Level Undervoltage Fault Threshold Fault Time Undervoltage Fault Timeout Warn Undervoltage Warning Enable Warn Level Undervoltage Warning Threshold 422 1639502 12 2006 Use Power Settings From the settings page you can navigate to and edit the following power settings Level 4 Level 5 Parameter name Settings Addr 1 8 Power OVER POWER Fault Overpower Fault Enable Fault Level Overpower Fault Threshold Fault Time Overpower Fault Timeout Starting Warn Overpower Warning Enable Warn Level Overpower Warning Threshold UNDER POWER Fault Underpower Fault Enable Fault Level Underpower Fault Threshold Fault Time Underpower Fault Timeout Warn Underpower Warning Enable Warn Level Underpower Fault Enable Power OVER POWER FACTOR continued Fault Over Power Factor Fault Enable
350. ning light e Full voltage non reversing starter Direct over the line starter e 24 Vdc power supply in the motor control center or control station for future use with expansion module inputs 52 1639502 12 2006 Application Example Components The application example includes the following components Deed Item Component description Reference number 1 LTM R 100 240VAC Profibus Motor Management Controller LTMR27PFM 1 35 27 A FLC 2 LTM E 24VDC Expansion Module LTMEV40BD 3 RJ45 to RJ45 connector LU9R10 4 Connection kit to PC serial port VW3A8106 5 PowerSuite software on CD ROM with LTM R upgrade LTM CONF 6 External ground fault CT TA30 7 External PTC binary motor temperature sensor User supplied Functions e Motor status indicated Performed e Motor state monitored by controller LEDs On Off Warning Fault e Thermal overload protection of the windings e Motor temp sensor protection e Voltage protection required because undervoltage conditions are known to cause motor winding damage e External ground fault protection e Initial system configuration performed during commissioning using PC and configuration software External HMI device or PLC not required However an HMI is optional for later use to fine tune parameter settings after an initial period of operation Prerequisites This application example assumes that the application designer has selected and properly installed t
351. nt Controller firmware version See DT_Firmware Version p 485 77 Ulnt Controller compatibility code 78 Ulnt Current scale ratio 0 1 79 Ulnt Current sensor max 80 Word Not significant 1 81 Ulnt Current range max x 0 1 A 82 94 Not significant 95 Ulnt Load CT ratio x 0 1 A 96 Ulnt Full load current max maximum FLC range FLC Full Load Current x 0 1 A 97 99 Forbidden 1639502 12 2006 487 Use Statistics Variables Statistics Overview Statistics variables are grouped according to the following criteria Trip statistics are contained into a main table and an extension table Statistics variable groups Registers Global statistics 100 to 121 LTM monitoring statistics 122 to 149 Last trip statistics 150 to 179 and extension 300 to 309 Trip n 1 statistics 180 to 209 and extension 330 to 339 Trip n 2 statistics 210 to 239 and extension 360 to 369 Trip n 3 statistics 240 to 269 and extension 390 to 399 Trip n 4 statistics 270 to 299 and extension 420 to 429 488 1639502 12 2006 Use Global Statistics The global statistics are described below Register Variable type Read only variables Note p 478 100 101 Not significant 102 Ulnt Ground current faults count 103 Ulnt Thermal overload faults count 104 Ulnt Long start faults count 105 Ulnt Jam faults count 106 Ulnt Current phase i
352. number or numbers with greatest deviation from Vavg Vs1 Warning threshold Vs2 Fault threshold Vavg 3 phase voltage average T1 Fault timeout starting T2 Fault timeout running T2 0 Voltage phase imbalance fault motor running c H AV max Ln voltage imbalance 178 1639502 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Parameter The voltage phase imbalance function has the following parameters Settings Parameters Setting range Factory setting Fault enable Enable Disable Disable Fault timeout starting 0 2 20 s in 0 1 s increments 0 7 s Fault timeout running 0 2 20 s in 0 1 s increments 2 s Fault threshold 3 15 of the calculated 10 imbalance in 1 increments Warning enable Enable Disable Disable Warning threshold 3 15 of the calculated 10 imbalance in 1 increments Function The voltage phase imbalance function has the following characteristics haracteristi ER Characteristics Characteristics Value Hysteresis 95 of Fault threshold or Warning threshold Trip time accuracy 0 1 s or 5 Example v a Vs2 Fault timeout starting The following diagram describes the occurrence of a voltage phase imbalance Fault timeout running gt Start state a lt Run state V A Percentage difference between voltage in any phase and the 3 phase average voltage Vs2 Fault threshold
353. o 2 timeout 644 UInt Motor step 1 to 2 threshold 645 UInt HMI port fallback setting 646 649 Reserved 650 Word HMI language setting bitO 1 English default bit1 2 Fran ais bit2 4 Espa ol bit3 8 Deutsch bit4 16 Italiano bits 5 15 Not significant 1639502 12 2006 511 Use Register Variable type Read Write variables Note p 478 651 Word HMI display items register 1 bit O HMI display average current enable bit 1 HMI display thermal capacity level enable bit 2 HMI display L1 current enable bit 3 HMI display L2 current enable bit 4 HMI display L3 current enable bit 5 HMI display ground current enable bit 6 HMI display last fault enable bit 7 HMI display current phase imbalance enable bit 8 Not significant bit 9 HMI display I O status enable bit 10 HMI display reactive power enable bit 11 HMI display frequency enable bit 12 HMI display starts per hour enable bit 13 HMI display definite overcurrent ratio enable bit 14 HMI display max current phase enable bit 15 HMI motor temperature sensor enable 652 Ulnt Motor full load current ratio 653 Ulnt Motor high speed full load current ratio 512 1639502 12 2006 Use Register Variable type Read Write variables Note p 478 654 Word HMI display items register 2 bit 0 HMI displa
354. o many configuration to monitor e operating status and average current for multiple LTM R controllers or e current voltage and power parameters for a selected LTM R controller Navigate to the following pages to simultaneously monitor these dynamically changing values for all LTM R controllers Navigate to this page To simultaneously monitor every LTM R controller s Starters currents page Average current ratio Starters status page Operating status On Off Fault For more information on both the starters currents page and the starters status page see p 413 Navigate to the motor starter page for a selected LTM R controller to monitor the dynamically changing values of the following parameters e Current L1 Current Ratio L2 Current Ratio L3 Current Ratio e Thermal e Thermal Capacity Level e Time To Trip e Motor Temp Sensor e Voltage e Average Voltage e L1 L2 Voltage e L2 L3 Voltage e L3 L1 Voltage e Average Current Ratio Ground Current Ratio Current Phase Imbalance Voltage Phase Imbalance e Power e Power Factor e Active Power e Reactive Power For more information on the motor starters page see p 416 1639502 12 2006 429 Use Fault Management 1 to many Overview Fault Display Pages Opening Closing the Fault Display When a fault occurs the Magelis XBTN410 HMI automatically opens a fault display consisting
355. o the Controller Input number 1 to 6 parameter for monitoring by the PLC e Remote network start commands and local terminal start commands are ignored Network In Network control mode a remote PLC sends commands to the LTM R controller through the network communication port The following conditions apply to Network control mode e Any network start and stop commands control the outputs according to the motor operating mode e The HMI unit can read but not write the LTM R controller parameters e Allinputs when active place bits into the Logic Input number 1 to 6 parameter for monitoring by the PLC 1639502 12 2006 211 Motor Control Functions Bump and Bumpless Control Transfers and O 2 as follows Set the Bumpless Transfer Mode parameter to enable bumpless transfer when changing the control mode clear this parameter to enable bump transfer The configuration setting for this parameter determines the behavior of logic outputs O 1 Bumpless Transfer Mode setting LTM R controller behavior when changing control mode Bump Logic outputs O 1 and O 2 open if closed or remain open if already open until the next valid signal occurs The motor stops Note In overload predefined operating mode logic outputs O 1 and O 2 are user defined The control and power circuit combine to determine if bumping the outputs OFF will not stop the motor Bumpless Logic outputs O 1 and O 2 are not af
356. of how to configure the LTM R controller to start and protect a pump What s in this This chapter contains the following topics hapter Chapter Topic Page Purpose 52 LTM R Controller Wiring 54 Configuring Parameters 55 1639502 12 2006 51 Application Example Purpose Overview Basic controller configuration Operating conditions The following application example uses the LTM R controller to protect and control a motor and its driven load in this example a pump This application example is intended to show you how to confige the LTM R controller in a few simple steps provide an example you can modify to develop your own configuration serve as a Starting point for the development of more complex configurations incorporating such additional features as HMI or network control Configuring the LTM R controller includes 2 important steps e proper external controller wiring to support the monitoring protection and control of the motor and controller e configuring parameters that enable and set the controller s monitoring protection and control functions using a configuration tool in this example PowerSuite configuration software e Power 4 kW 400 Vac e Current 9A e Control circuit voltage 230 Vac e 3 wire control e trip class 10 motor e start button e stop button e external reset button in the door of the motor control center or control station e fault light e war
357. oftware to manage the LTM R controller s configuration files by e creating a new configuration file for editing e transfer configuration settings from the LTM R controller to the configuration software running on your PC e opening configuration settings for editing saving edited configuration settings to a file on your PC s hard disk or to other media e transferring saved or edited configuration files from your PC to the LTM R controller Power up Every time you open the configuration software it presents the Load Configuration dialog Use this dialog to select the configuration settings that will be displayed when the configuration software opens You can select e the factory default configuration settings or e any previously saved configuration settings file Creating Files The recommended way to create a configuration file is to transfer a configuration from the LTM R controller and save it When you do this all of the descriptive information about the LTM R controller and expansion module is automatically retrieved and copied to your PC When you create a new file using the File menu s New Configuration command you must manually input this information which is internally stored by the devices but may not otherwise be readily available Note When you edit the network protocol for either a new configuration file or for a configuration file transferred from the LTM R controller the configuration software automatic
358. ogic inputs are wired for Behavior either 2 wire maintained or 3 wire impulse control Your selection determines the valid start and stop commands from the various control sources and sets the behavior of the input command following the return of power after an outage Control Circuit Type Behavior of logic inputs 1 1 and I 2 2 wire maintained The LTM R controller after detecting the rising edge on the input assigned to start the motor issues a run command The run command remains active only while the input is active The signal is not latched 3 wire impulse The LTM R controller e after detecting the rising edge on the input assigned to start the motor latches the run command and e after a stop command disables the run command to disable the output relay wired in series with the coil of the contactor that turns the motor on or off e following a stop must detect a rising edge on the input to latch the run command Control logic assignments for logic inputs 1 1 1 2 1 3 and 1 4 are described in each of the predefined motor operating modes Note In Network control mode network commands behave as 2 wire control commands regardless of the control circuit type of the selected operating mode For information on Control Modes see p 210 226 1639502 12 2006 Motor Control Functions In each pre defined operating mode logic inputs 1 3 1 4 1 5 and 1 6 behave as follows Logi
359. old Fault Time Jam Fault Timeout Warn Enable Jam Warning Enable Warn Level Jam Warning Threshold UnderCurrent Fault Enable Undercurrent Fault Enable Fault Level Undercurrent Fault Threshold Fault Time Undercurrent Fault Timeout Warn Enable Undercurrent Warning Enable Warn Level Undercurrent Warning Threshold Current continued OverCurrent Fault Enable Overcurrent Fault Enable Fault Level Overcurrent Fault Threshold Fault Time Overcurrent Fault Timeout Warn Enable Overcurrent Warning Enable Warn Level Overcurrent Warning Threshold Ground Curr Fault Enable Ground Current Fault Enable Gr CT Mode Ground Current Mode Fault Level External Ground Current Fault Threshold Fault Time External Ground Current Fault Timeout Fit AftStart Ground Current Fault After Starting Warn Enable Ground Current Warning Enable Warn Level External Ground Current Warning Threshold WarnAftStart Ground Current Warning After Starting 1639502 12 2006 371 Use Voltage The Voltage sub menu contains the following editable parameters Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Parameter name reference Voltage Volt Ph Imb Fault Enable Voltage Phase Imbalance Fault Enable Fault Level Voltage Phase Imbalance Fault Threshold FitTimeStart Voltage Phase Imbalance Fault Timeout Starting FitTimeRun Voltage Phase Imbalance Fault Timeout Running Warn Enable Voltage P
360. on A lt _ 4 ES OG y f 0 ee ee timeout D time Long start fault timeout OC Fault threshold OC1 or OC2 140 1639502 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Current Phase Imbalance Description The current phase imbalance function signals e a warning when the current in any phase differs by more than a set percentage from the average current in all 3 phases e a fault when the current in any phase differs by more than a separately set percentage from the average current in all 3 phases for a set period of time A CAUTION RISK OF MOTOR OVERHEATING The Current Phase Imbalance Fault Threshold must be properly set to protect the wiring and motor equipment from harm caused by motor overheating e The setting you input must conform to national and local safety regulations and codes e Refer to the motor manufacturer s instructions before setting this parameter Failure to follow this instruction can result in injury or equipment damage Note Use this function to detect and guard against smaller current phase imbalances For larger imbalances in excess of 80 of the average current in all 3 phases use the current phase loss motor protection function This function has two adjustable fault time delays e one applies to current imbalances occurring while the motor is in start state and e one applies to current imbalances occurring after startup while
361. on A lt p Undercurrent fault 1 timeout Is2 f Is2 Undercurrent fault threshold 154 1639502 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Overcurrent Description Functional Characteristics The overcurrent function signals e a warning when current in a phase exceeds a set threshold after the motor has reached run state e a fault when current in a phase continuously exceeds a separately set threshold for a set period of time after the motor has reached run state The overcurrent function can be triggered when the equipment is overloaded or a process condition is detected causing current to increase beyond the set threshold This function has a single fault time delay Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled The function applies to both single phase and 3 phase motors The overcurrent function includes the following features e 2 thresholds e Warning Threshold e Fault Threshold e 1 fault time delay e Fault Timeout e 2 function outputs e Overcurrent Warning e Overcurrent Fault e 1 counting statistic e Overcurrent Faults Count 1639502 12 2006 155 Motor Protection Functions Block Diagram Overcurrent warning and fault Run state yp amp pe Overcurrent warning i m Imax gt Is1 12 gt Imax e AND 13 gt
362. on For other protection functions warning detection has a separate warning threshold The LTM R controller clears the warning whenever the measured value no longer exceeds the warning threshold plus or minus a 5 hysteresis band 118 1639502 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Setting Ranges of the Motor Protection Functions A WARNING RISK OF UNINTENDED CONFIGURATION AND OPERATION When modifying parameter settings of the LTM R controller e Be especially careful if you change parameter settings when the motor is running e Disable network control of the LTM R controller to prevent unintended parameter configuration and operation Failure to follow this instruction can result in death serious injury or equipment damage Thermal and The LTM R controller provides the thermal and current protection functions listed CurrentProtection below All the following functions can be enabled or disabled Functions Protection functions Parameters Setting range Factory setting Thermal overload Mode e Inverse thermal Inverse thermal e Definite time Fault reset mode Manual Manual Remote e Automatic Motor auxiliary fan Enable Disable Disable cooled Fault enable Enable Disable Enable Warning enable Enable Disable Enable 1 Thermal Overload Inverse Thermal Fault Reset Timeout is set by the Auto Reset Group 1 Timeout parameter 2 OC1 and OC2 are set via the Motor Full
363. on functions The response of the LTM R controller to a fault include the following e output 0 4 contacts e contact 95 96 is open e contact 97 98 is closed fault LED is On and illuminates a steady red fault status bits are set in a fault parameter a text message is displayed in an HMI screen if an HMI is attached a fault status indicator is displayed in the configuration software The LTM R controller counts and records the number of faults for each protection function After a fault has occurred merely resolving the underlying condition does not clear the fault To clear the fault the LTM R controller must be reset See p 255 1639502 12 2006 117 Motor Protection Functions Warnings A warning is a less serious though still undesirable operating condition A warning indicates corrective action may be required to prevent a problem condition from occurring If left unresolved a warning may lead to a fault condition Warning related parameters can be configured for most protection functions The response of the LTM R controller to a warning include the following output O 3 is closed fault LED flashes red 2 times per second warning status bits are set in a warning parameter a text message is displayed in an HMI screen if attached a warning status indicator is displayed in the configuration software Note For some protection functions warning detection shares the same threshold as fault detecti
364. onfiguring Parameters Overview Required Parameters After the wiring connections are made the next step is to configure parameters There are two steps to successful parameter configuration 1 Enter the operating and protection parameter settings using PowerSuite software running in your PC 2 Transfer the previously saved configuration file with all parameter settings from your PC to the LTM R controller Because this application example accepts the default factory settings of most parameters only a few parameters need to be configured The following operating and protection parameters must be configured Operating parameters Parameter Setting Motor nominal voltage 400 Vac Motor full load current 9A Motor phases 3 phase motor Motor operating mode Independent 3 wire impulse Motor temp sensor type PTC Binary Control local channel setting Terminal strip Load CT primary Load CT secondary Load CT multiple passes Ground CT primary Ground CT secondary 1639502 12 2006 55 Application Example Protection parameters Parameter Parameter setting Thermal overload mode Inverse thermal Thermal overload fault enable Enable Thermal overload warning enable Enable Motor Trip Class 10 Ground current mode External Ground current fault enable Enable Ground current fault timeout
365. or OC2 T Fault timeout Thermal overload warning B Definite time Thermal overload fault Definite time 1639502 12 2006 139 Motor Protection Functions Parameter The definite time thermal overload function has the following configurable parameter settings Settings Parameters Setting range Factory setting Fault threshold 5 100 of FLCmax in 5 FLCmax e Motor full load current ratio OC1 1 increments or Note OC1 and OC2 settings can e Motor high speed full load current be set directly in Amperes in the ratio OC2 Settings menu of an HMI or in the Settings branch of PowerSuite software Thermal overload fault definite timeout 1 300 s in 1 s increments 10s O Time or over current time Thermal overload warning threshold 20 800 of FLC1 in 1 s 80 of FLC1 increments Long start fault timeout 1 200 s in 1 s increments 10s 1 The definite time thermal overload function requires the contemporaneous use of the Long start motor protection function both of which employ the Long start fault timeout setting Function The definite time thermal overload function has the following characteristics Characteristics Characteristics Value Hysteresis 95 of warning and fault thresholds Trip time accuracy 0 1 s Example The following diagram describes a definite time thermal overload fault Start state Run state Fault conditi
366. or fault the LTM R controller continues to attempt to monitor status and communications but does not accept any start commands During a minor fault condition the LTM R controller continues to detect and report major faults but not additional minor faults Minor internal faults include internal network communications failure EEPROM error A D out of range error Reset button stuck internal temperature fault at 85 C 185 F invalid configuration error conflicting configuration improper logic function action for example attempting to write to a read only parameter 1639502 12 2006 95 Metering and Monitoring Functions Controller Internal Temperature Description The LTM R controller monitors its internal temperature and reports warning minor fault and major fault conditions Fault detection cannot be disabled Warning detection can be enabled or disabled The internal temperature is not cleared when factory default settings are restored using the Clear All Command or when statistics are reset using a Clear Statistics Command The controller retains a record of the highest attained internal temperature For information about the Controller Internal Temperature Max parameter see p 110 Characteristics The Controller Internal Temperature measured values have the following characteristics Characteristic Value Unit C Accuracy 4 C 7 2 F Resolution 1
367. or temperature sensor protection function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Unit Q Normal operating range 15 6500 Q Accuracy at 15 Q 10 at 6500 Q 5 Resolution 0 10 Refresh interval 100 ms The fixed threshold settings for the open circuit and short circuit detection functions are Parameters Setting for PTC Binary or PTC NTC Analog Accuracy Short circuit fault threshold 15Q 10 Short circuit fault re closing 20 Q 10 Open circuit fault threshold 6500 Q 5 Open circuit fault re closing 6000 Q 5 102 1639502 12 2006 Metering and Monitoring Functions Voltage Current Phase Reversal Error Both the voltage and current phase reversal function signals a fault when it detects that either the voltage or the current phases of a 3 phase motor are out of sequence indicating a wiring error Use the Motor Phases Sequence parameter to set the phase sequence ABC or ACB and clear the error Note When the LTM R controller is connected to an expansion module phase reversal protection is based on voltage before the motor starts and on current after the motor starts This protection e is active for voltage when e the LTM R controller is connected to an expansion module and e the LTM R controller is in ready state e is active for current when the motor is in start state run state or fault state e app
368. oss Run Directs the LTM R controller to perform a Run command for a 2 step control sequence on the communication loss 0 1 0 2 Off Directs the LTM R controller to turn off both logic outputs O 1 and 0 2 following a communication loss 0 1 0 2 On Directs the LTM R controller to turn on both logic outputs O 1 and 0 2 following a communication loss 0 1 On Directs the LTM R controller to turn on only logic output O 1 following a communication loss 0 2 On Directs the LTM R controller to turn on only logic output O 2 following a communication loss The following table indicates which fallback options are available for each operating mode Port Fallback Setting Operating Mode Overload Independent Reverser 2 step 2 speed Custom Hold 0 1 0 2 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Run No No No Yes No No 0 1 O 2 Off Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 1 0 2 On Yes Yes No No No Yes 0 1 On Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes 0 2 On Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Note When you select a network or HMI fallback setting your selection must identify an active control source 106 1639502 12 2006 Metering and Monitoring Functions 3 5 Motor History Overview Introduction Access What s in this Section The LTM R controller tracks and saves motor operating statistics Motor statistics can be accessed using e aPCwith PowerSuite software ea Magelis XBTN410 HMI e
369. ossings of the voltage and current sinusoidal waveforms Converts this measured time difference to a phase angle in degrees Calculates the absolute value of the cosine of the phase angle The following diagram displays an example of the average rms current sinusoidal curve lagging slightly behind the average rms voltage sinusoidal curve and the phase angle difference between the two curves 360 voltage i EE Ne Bore current 7 Nn 7 N 7 RN Pa Uy i BN P t S i 7 N N Rg 1 PA 1 H Shas RE phase angle 84 1639502 12 2006 Metering and Monitoring Functions After the phase angle is measured the power factor can be calculated as the cosine of the phase angle the ratio of side a Active Power over the hypotenuse h Apparent Power 1 h 1 a 1 1 Characteristics The active power function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Accuracy 3 for cos 0 6 Resolution 0 01 Refresh interval 30 ms typical 1 1 The refresh interval depends on the frequency 1639502 12 2006 85 Metering and Monitoring Functions Active Power Consumption Description The active power consumption function displays the accumulated total of the active electrical power delivered and used or consumed by the load Characteristics The active power consumption function ha
370. otection Functions Functional Characteristics Block Diagram Parameter Settings The external ground current function includes the following features e 1 measure of ground current in amperes e Ground Current 2 thresholds e Warning Threshold e Fault Threshold 1 fault time delay e Fault Timeout e 2 function outputs e External Ground Current Warning e External Ground Current Fault 1 counting statistic e Ground Current Faults Count External ground current warning and fault m 10 gt 10s1 L External ground current warning 10 e 10 gt l0s2 ye T m 0 External ground current fault 10 Ground current from external ground CT 10s1 Warning threshold 10s2 Fault threshold T Fault timeout The external ground current function has the following parameters Parameters Setting range Factory setting External ground current fault timeout 0 1 25 s in 0 5s 0 01 s increments External ground current fault threshold 0 01 20 A in 0 01 A 0 01 A increments External ground current warning threshold 0 01 20 A in 0 01 A 0 01 A increments 1639502 12 2006 163 Motor Protection Functions Function Characteristics Example The external ground current function has the following characteristics Characteristics Value Hysteresis 95 of Fault threshold or Warning threshold Trip time accuracy 0 1 s or
371. p 358 For information on the presentation of faults and warnings see p 392 1639502 12 2006 385 Use HMI Display The HMILCD indicates that the LTM R controller is in local control and Ready state Examples and displays the day month and year L 25 12 Ready 2006 YT The HMI LCD indicates that the LTM R controller is in local control and displays logic inputs and logic outputs status showing that logic outputs O 1 and 0 4 and logic inputs 1 1 1 3 1 4 and 1 6 are active L 1xx4 out 1x34x6 In The HMI LCD indicates that the LTM R controller is in remote control and the LTM E expansion module logic inputs 1 7 1 9 and 1 10 are active R LTME 7x910 386 1639502 12 2006 Use Main Menu Services 1 to 1 Services Menu Menu Structure The Services sub menu is the third selection in Level 2 of the Main menu The Services menu contains the following service commands e Self Test e Go to Sys Config e Clear e HMI Password The Maintenance Clear and HMI Password sub menus contain the following editable parameters and executable commands Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Parameter name reference Maintenance Self Test Self Test Command Go to SysCfg Controller System Config Required Clear All Confirm Clear All Command CntlSettings Confirm Clear Controller Settings
372. port endian setting bit 10 Network port endian setting bits 11 15 Reserved 603 Ulnt HMI port address setting 604 Ulnt HMI port baud rate setting 1639502 12 2006 507 Use Register Variable type Read Write variables Note p 478 605 Reserved 606 Ulnt Motor trip class 607 Reserved 608 Ulnt Thermal overload fault reset threshold 609 Ulnt Thermal overload warning threshold 610 Ulnt Internal ground current fault timeout 611 Ulnt Internal ground current fault threshold 612 Ulnt Internal ground current warning threshold 613 Ulnt Current phase imbalance fault timeout starting 614 Ulnt Current phase imbalance fault timeout running 615 Ulnt Current phase imbalance fault threshold 616 Ulnt Current phase imbalance warning threshold 617 Ulnt Jam fault timeout 618 Ulnt Jam fault threshold 619 Ulnt Jam warning threshold 620 Ulnt Undercurrent fault timeout 621 Ulnt Undercurrent fault threshold 622 Ulnt Undercurrent warning threshold 623 Ulnt Long start fault timeout 624 Ulnt Long start fault threshold 625 Reserved 626 Ulnt HMI display contrast setting 627 Ulnt Contactor rating 628 Ulnt Load CT primary B 629 Ulnt Load CT secondary 630 Ulnt Load CT multiple passes 508 1639502 12 2006 Use Register Variable type Read Write variables Note p 478 631 Word F
373. presents information and commands for the LTM R controller that was selected in either the Starters Currents page or the Starters Status page see p 413 The Motor Starter page is the only page located in level 3 of the menu structure Use the Motor Starter page to e monitor dynamically changing current voltage and power values for a single selected LTM R controller e navigate to editable parameter settings for a LTM R controller e navigate to read only statistics and product information for a LTM R controller e execute the Self Test command for a LTM R controller For information about navigating the 1 to many menu structure see p 404 416 1639502 12 2006 Use Motor Starter The Motor Starter page displays dynamically changing parameter values and contains the command lines as follows Level 3 Parameter name Description Motor Starter 1 8 Page header indicating LTM R controller address 1 8 Avg Current XXxXx FLC_ Average Current Ratio L1 Current XXXX FLC L1 Current Ratio L2 Current XXXX FLC L2 Current Ratio L3 Current XXXX FLC L3 Current Ratio GR Current XXxx X FLCmin Ground Current Ratio Curr Imbalance xxx Current Phase Imbalance Th Capacity XXXxXx Thermal Capacity Level Time To Trip xxxxSec Time To Trip Avg Voltage xXxxx FLCmin Average Voltage L1 L2 Voltage xxxxxV L1 L2 Voltage L2 L3 Volt
374. progress Without modifying the state of the contacts in the least favorable direction 3 NOTICE This product has been designed for use in environment A Use of this product in environment B may cause unwanted electromagnetic disturbance which may require the implementation of adequate mitigation measures 38 1639502 12 2006 Introduction Half sine mechanical According to CEI 60068 2 272 15 gn shock pulse 11 ms Resistance to According to CEI 60068 2 62 Panel mounted 4gn vibration DIN rail mounted 1gn Immunity to According to EN61000 4 2 Through air 8 kV level 3 electrostatic Over surface 6 kV level 3 discharge Immunity to radiated According toEN61000 4 3 10 V m level 3 fields Immunity to fast According to EN61000 4 4 On power lines and relay 4 kV level 4 transient bursts outputs all other circuits 2 kV level 3 Immunity to radioelectric fields According to EN61000 4 62 10 V rms level 3 Surge immunity According to IEC EN 61000 4 5 Common mode Differential mode Power lines and relay outputs AkV 12 Q 9 F 2 kV 2 9 18 F 24 Vdc inputs and power 1 kV 12 Q 9 F 0 5 kV 2 0 18 F 100 240 Vac inputs and power 2 kV 12 Q 9 F 1 kV 2 0 18 F Communication 2 kV 12 9 18 F Temperature sensor IT1 IT2 1 kV 42 Q 0 5 F 0 5 kV 42 Q 0 5 F 1 Some certifications are in progress 2 Without mod
375. quired by the LTM R controller s Motor Temp Sensor motor protection function T TCC trip curve characteristic The type of delay used to trip the flow of current in response to a fault condition As implemented in the LTM R controller all motor protection function trip time delays are definite time except for the Thermal Overload function which also offers inverse thermal trip time delays TVC trip voltage characteristic The type of delay used to trip the flow of voltage in response to a fault condition As implemented by the LTM R controller and the expansion module all TVCs are definite time 580 1639502 12 2006 Index A active power 82 84 93 417 503 consumption 86 n 0 377 426 491 n 1 378 427 492 n 2 379 493 n 3 380 494 n 4 381 495 acyclic accesses DP VO PKW encapsulated 467 altitude derating controller 41 expansion module 44 apparent power 82 84 application example 51 components 53 configuring parameters 55 purpose 52 wiring 54 auto reset attempts group 1 setting 47 262 369 419 511 attempts group 2 setting 47 262 369 419 511 attempts group 3 setting 47 263 369 419 511 count 89 375 group 1 timeout 47 120 262 369 419 511 group 2 timeout 47 262 369 419 511 group 3 timeout 47 263 369 419 511 average current n 0 377 426 496 n 1 378 427 496 n 2 379 496 n 3 380 497 n 4 381 497 ratio 417 average current ratio 93 413 n
376. r factor 510 undercurrent 509 underpower 510 undervoltage 510 voltage phase imbalance 510 voltage phase loss 510 warnings count 89 90 375 490 warning controller internal temperature 502 current phase imbalance 502 current phase loss 502 current phase reversal 502 diagnostic 502 ground current 502 HMI port 502 internal port 502 thermal overload 375 489 F 502 wiring Jan fault 101 motor temperature sensor 502 network port 502 over power factor 502 overcurrent 502 overpower 502 overvoltage 502 register 1 502 register 2 502 thermal overload 502 under power factor 502 undercurrent 502 underpower 502 undervoltage 502 voltage phase imbalance 502 voltage phase loss 502 voltage phase reversal 502 warning code 501 warning counters protection 90 warning enable controller internal temperature 509 current phase balance 509 current phase loss 510 diagnostic 510 ground current 509 HMI port 509 jam 509 motor temperature sensor 510 network port 509 over power factor 510 overcurrent 510 overpower 510 overvoltage 510 register 1 509 fault enable 46 101 373 faults count 376 wiring faults count 91 594 1639502 12 2006 You can download this technical publication and other technical information from our website at http www telemecanique com Visit http Awww schneider electric com for your nearest Schneider Electric affiliate 2006 Schneider Electric All Right
377. r inputs and outputs Each predefined operating mode selection includes a control wiring selection e 2 wire maintained or e 3 wire impulse What s in this This section contains the following topics Section Topic Page Control Principles 223 Predefined Operating Modes 225 Control Wiring and Fault Management 229 Overload Operating Mode 231 Independent Operating Mode 234 Reverser Operating Mode 238 Two Step Operating Mode 242 Two Speed Operating Mode 248 Custom Operating Mode 253 222 1639502 12 2006 Motor Control Functions Control Principles Overview The LTM R controller performs control and monitoring functions for single phase and 3 phase electric motors e These functions are predefined and fit the applications most frequently used They are ready to use and are implemented by simple parameter setting after the LTM R controller has been commissioned e The predefined control and monitoring functions can be adapted for particular needs using the custom logic editor in PowerSuite software to e edit protection functions e change the operation of control and monitoring functions e alter the default LTM R controller I O logic 1639502 12 2006 223 Motor Control Functions Operating The processing of control and monitoring functions has 3 parts Principle e acquisition of input data e the output of protection function processing e external logic d
378. r more information about resetting faults Self test See p 527 Performs a self test if e motor is stopped no faults exist e self test function is enabled Press and hold the button for more than 3 s up to and including 15 s Induce a fault Puts the LTM R controller into internal fault condition Press and hold the button down for more than 15 s 346 1639502 12 2006 Use 8 3 Configuring the Magelis XBTN410 At a Glance Summary What s in this Section The Magelis XBTN410 HMI can be used in a e 1 HMI to 1 LTM R controller 1 to 1 physical configuration or e 1 HMI to up to 8 LTM R controllers 1 to many physical configuration In each configuration the HMI presents a unique user interface including both LCD display and keypad Each configuration requires the use of a distinct e software application file and e keypad label This section shows you how to obtain and install a software application in the Magelis XBTN410 for a 1 to 1 or 1 to many configuration Refer to the Telemecanique Magelis Instruction Sheet that ships with the Magelis XBTN410 HMI for instructions on selecting and installing the keypad label that is appropriate for your configuration This section contains the following topics Topic Page Installing Magelis XBT L1000 Programming Software 348 Download 1 to 1 and 1 to many Software Application Files 350 Transferri
379. rability standards Note The product must be connected through only 1 port 1639502 12 2006 307 Installation SUB D 9 The LTM R controller is connected to the Profibus DP network with a female SUB D Connector 9 pin connector in compliance with the following wiring Pinout Front view The SUB D 9 wiring layout is Pin no Signal Description 1 Shield not used 2 M24 not used 3 RxD TxD P positive data transmission RD TD 4 CNTR P positive repeater monitoring signal direction monitoring 5 DGND data transmission ground 6 VP line termination bias voltage 7 P24 not used 8 RxD TxD N negative data transmission RD TD 9 CNTR N negative repeater monitoring signal direction monitoring not used 308 1639502 12 2006 Installation Open Style The LTM R controller front face shows a 5 position terminal block with terminal Terminal Block positions spaced 5 08 mm apart Terminal Signal Description S Shield shield A RxD TxD N negative data transmission RD TD B RxD TxD P positive data transmission RD TD DGND DGND data transmission ground VP VP 5V line termination bias voltage Connection Profibus DP cable and connector characteristics are described on p 290 Characteristics 1639502 12 2006 309 Installation Connection to Profibus DP Overview Precautions
380. ram features a 2 wire maintained local control with network control selectable wiring diagram Maintained CoE a T Local Control N Network control ao ASA with Network Control Selectable al 2 542 1639502 12 2006 IEC Format Wiring Diagrams Reverser Mode Wiring Diagrams Application The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse local control wiring diagram Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Local Control 3a 1 The N C interlock contacts KM1 and KM2 are not mandatory because the controller electronically interlocks O 1 and O 2 1639502 12 2006 543 IEC Format Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Local Control Application Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Local Control with Network Control selectable Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Local Control with Network Control selectable The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained local control wiring diagram FW Forward O Off RV Reverse The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse local control with network control selectable wiring diagram L Local control O Off N Network control FW Forward RV Reverse The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained local control with network control selectable
381. rature ofe Iron temperature ofe Scaled iron temperature 0s1 Thermal overload warning threshold Omax gt 0s1 Thermal Overload Omax gt 100 a Warning Thermal Overload Fault 136 1639502 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Parameter Settings Function Characteristics Example The thermal overload inverse thermal functions have the following configurable parameter settings Parameters Setting range Factory setting FLC1 FLC2 fault threshold 0 4 8 0 A in increments of 0 08 A for LTMRO8 amp e 1 35 27 0 A in increments of 0 27 A for LTMR27 e 5 100 A in increments of 1 A for LTMR100 e 0 4 A for LTMRO8 amp e 1 35 A for LTMR27 e 5A for LTMR100 Warning threshold 10 100 of thermal capacity 85 of thermal capacity Motor trip class 5 30 in increments of 5 5 Fault reset timeout 50 999 in 1 s increments 120s Fault reset threshold 35 95 of thermal capacity 75 of thermal capacity The thermal overload inverse thermal functions have the following non configurable parameter settings Parameter Fixed setting Thermal overload fault threshold 100 of thermal capacity The thermal overload inverse thermal functions have the following characteristics Characteristics Value Hysteresis 95 of thermal overload warning threshold Trip time accuracy 0 1 s
382. res a 2 wire maintained local control wiring diagram L Low Speed L O H O Off Auli H High Speed L Di A2 l ofo 542 pissis Oj Ozi Oui OO The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse local control with network control selectable wiring diagram H Hand Local Control O Off A Automatic Network Control TO STOP te 210 LOW pe be A1 Oo oO 11 C 12 13 C 14 M3 T HIGH E ee e EAE EEE Oi OOs OO afe 5 fe aes The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained local control with network control selectable wiring diagram H Hand Local Control HIOJA O Off Atl A Automatic Network Control A2 T LOW HIGH HOA i Ts At ojo zj A2 Oo o 574 1639502 12 2006 Glossary A active power analog apparent power Also known as real power active power is the rate of producing transferring or using electrical energy It is measured in watts W and often expressed in kilowatts kW or megawatts MW For single phase motors its calculation is Active Power Apparent Power x Power Factor For 3 phase motors its calculation is Active Power Avg RMS Voltage x Avg RMS Current x 3 x Power Factor Describes inputs e g temperature or outputs e g
383. respective output or outputs Note The LTM R controller does not latch logical output commands unless directed by a PLC master control program or a custom logic program 1639502 12 2006 231 Motor Control Functions Overload The following wiring diagram represents a simplified example of the LTM R Application controller in a 3 wire impulse local control overload application Diagram 30 CTR eres KM1 StartE KM1 For additional examples of overload operating mode IEC diagrams see p 537 For examples of overload operating mode NEMA diagrams see p 557 232 1639502 12 2006 Motor Control Functions VO Assignment Parameters Overload operating mode provides the following logic inputs Logic inputs Assignment 1 1 Free 1 2 Free 1 3 Free 1 4 Free 1 5 Reset 1 6 Local 0 or network 1 Overload operating mode provides the following logic outputs Logic outputs Assignment 0 1 13 and 14 Responds to network control commands O 2 23 and 24 Responds to network control commands 0 3 33 and 34 Warning signal O 4 95 96 97 and 98 Fault signal Overload operating mode uses the following HMI keys HMI keys Assignment Aux 1 Free Aux 2 Free Stop Free Overload operating mode requires no associated parameter settings 1639502 12 2006
384. riables User map variable groups Registers User Map addresses 800 to 899 User Map values 900 to 999 Register Variable type Read Write variables Note p 478 800 898 Word 99 User map addresses setting 899 Reserved Register Variable type Read Write variables Note p 478 900 998 Word 99 User map values 999 Reserved 516 1639502 12 2006 Use Custom Logic Variables Custom Logic Variables Custom logic variables are described below Register Variable type Read only variables Note p 478 1200 Word Custom logic status register bit 0 Custom logic run bit 1 Custom logic stop bit 2 Custom logic reset bit 3 Reserved bit 4 Custom logic transition bit 5 Custom logic phase reverse bit 6 Custom logic network control bit 7 Custom logic FLC selection bit 8 Custom logic external fault bit 9 Custom logic auxiliary 1 LED bit 10 Custom logic auxiliary 2 LED bit 11 Custom logic stop LED bit 12 Custom logic LO1 bit 13 Custom logic LO2 bit 14 Custom logic LO3 bit 15 Custom logic LO4 1201 Word Custom logic version 1202 Word Custom logic memory space 1203 Word Custom logic memory used 1204 Word Custom logic temporary space 1205 Word Custom logic non volatile space 1206 1300 Reserved 1301 1399 General purpose registers for logic f
385. rmation on transferring files from the LTM R controller to your PC see p 437 2 Compare the master list of intended parameters and settings against the same settings located in the Settings branch of PowerSuite software s tree control 3 Change the configuration settings as desired Do this using either e PowerSuite software then download the edited file from your PC to the LTM R controller For information on transferring files from your PC to the LTM R controller see p 438 e Magelis XBTN410 HMI To edit parameters located in the e Main menu navigate to the s main menu settings and make the appropriate edits e Sys Config menu navigate to the Services menu and use the Sys Config command to reopen the SysConfig menu where you can again make and save edits For information about required settings see p 323 1639502 12 2006 339 Commissioning 340 1639502 12 2006 Use At a Glance Overview This chapter describes e the user interface devices and the hardware configurations you can use to operate the LTM R controller e how to set parameters with each user interface e how to perform monitoring fault handling and control functions with each user interface What s in this This chapter contains the following sections Chapter Section Topic Page 8 1 Introduction 342 8 2 Using the LTM R Controller Alone 343 8 3 Configuring the Magelis XBTN410 347 8 4 Using the Magelis XBTN410 H
386. roller can be configured in 1 of 10 predefined operating modes Each operating mode is designed to meet the requirements of a common application configuration When you select an operating mode you specify both the e operating mode type which determines the relationship between logic inputs and logic outputs and e control circuit type which determines logic input behavior based on the control wiring design There are 5 types of operating modes Operating mode type Best used for Overload All motor starter applications in which the user defines assignment of logic inputs 1 1 1 2 1 3 and 1 4 e logic outputs O 1 and O 2 Aux1 Aux2 and Stop commands from the HMI The I O can be defined using a control program managed by the master network controller in remote control by an HMI tool or by using custom logic Independent Direct on line across the line full voltage non reversing motor starting applications Reverser Direct on line across the line full voltage reversing motor starting applications Two Step Reduced voltage starting motor applications including e Wye Delta Open Transition Primary Resistor Open Transition Autotransformer Two Speed Two speed motor applications for motor types including e Dahlander consequent pole Pole Changer 1639502 12 2006 225 Motor Control Functions Logic Input When you select an operating mode you also specify that l
387. rs 92 Fault History 93 1639502 12 2006 87 Metering and Monitoring Functions Introducing Fault and Warning Counters Overview Detecting Faults Detecting Warnings Counters Clearing Counters The LTM R controller records the number of faults and warnings that it detects It also records the number of times an attempted fault auto reset was unsuccessful Before the LTM R controller will detect a fault certain preconditions must exist These conditions can include e the fault detecting function must be enabled e amonitored value for example current voltage or thermal resistance must rise above or fall below a threshold setting e the monitored value must remain above or below the threshold setting for a specified time duration If all preconditions are satisfied the LTM R controller detects a fault or warning If a warning detection function is enabled the LTM R controller detects a warning immediately when the monitored value rises above or falls below a threshold setting When the LTM R controller detects a fault or warning or when a fault is automatically reset the LTM R controller records that fact by incrementing one or more counters A counter contains a value from 0 to 65535 and increments by a value of 1 when a fault warning or reset event occurs A counter stops incrementing when it reaches a value of 65535 When a fault occurs the LTM R controller increments at le
388. ructure press to increase the selected numerical digit by 1 unit Use these keys to scroll through setting selections e the sign precedes a factory setting or a user selected setting e the sign precedes available settings moves up one level in the menu structure e closes the fault display and displays the scrolling variable list Note the ESC key does not save any settings You may need to press ESC several times to return to the upper level of a menu 1639502 12 2006 353 Use Description Comment navigate from e amenu the sub menus e a sub menu the functions e a function the settings Some menus or sub menus contain only functions and their settings Others include functions with many parameters and their settings e confirm and save the displayed setting When a setting is saved e the is replaced by and e the saved setting is displayed for 2 seconds then the display automatically returns to the next highest level Performs motor control commands as configured For example Run Forward and Run Slow Note Enabled when Control Mode is Local terminal strip or HMI Disabled when Control Mode is Network see p 210 Performs motor control commands as configured For example Run Reverse and Run Fast Note Enabled when Control Mode is Local terminal strip or HMI Disabled when Control Mode is Network see p 2
389. ry parameters When Ground Current Mode is set to Internal the external ground current function is disabled A DANGER IMPROPER FAULT DETECTION External ground current function will not protect people from harm caused by ground current Ground fault thresholds must be set to protect the motor and related equipment Ground fault settings must conform to national and local safety regulations and codes Failure to follow this instruction will result in death or serious injury The LTM R controller has 2 terminals Z1 and Z2 that can be connected to an external ground current transformer The external ground current function measures ground current delivered by the secondary of the external current transformer and signals e a warning when the delivered current exceeds a set threshold e a fault when the delivered current continuously exceeds a separately set threshold for a set period of time The external ground current function has a single fault time delay The external ground current function can be enabled when the motor is in ready state start state or run state When the LTM R controller is operating in custom mode this function can be configured so that it is disabled only during start state and enabled during ready state and run state Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled The function applies to both single phase and 3 phase motors 162 1639502 12 2006 Motor Pr
390. s Group 2 faults generally do not include a pre defined cooling time delay before a reset can be executed but can be reset as soon as the fault condition clears Many group 2 faults can result in some motor overheating depending upon the severity and duration of the fault condition which in turn depends upon the protection function configuration You can add a cooling time delay if appropriate by setting the Auto Reset Group 2 Timeout parameter to a value greater than 0 You may also want to limit the number of reset attempts to prevent premature wear or failure of the equipment Auto reset group 2 has the following configurable parameters Parameters Setting range Factory setting Auto Reset Attempts Group 2 0 manual 1 2 3 4 A unlimited 0 Setting number of reset attempts Auto Reset Group 2 Timeout 0 65535 s 1200s 262 1639502 12 2006 Motor Control Functions Auto Reset Group 3 Group 3 faults often apply to equipment monitoring and generally do not require a motor cooling period These faults can be used to detect equipment conditions for example an undercurrent fault that detects the loss of a belt or an overpower fault that detects an increased loading condition in a mixer You may want to configure group 3 faults in a way that differs significantly from gorups 1 or 2 for example by setting the number of resets to 0 thereby requiring a manual reset after the equipm
391. s Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Parameter name reference Motor Nom Voltage Motor Nominal Voltage Nom Power kWatts Motor Nominal Power Horsepower Phase Seq Motor Phases Sequence Dir Transit Control Direct Transition Transit Time Motor Transition Timeout 2 Step Level Motor Step 1 To 2 Threshold 2 Step Time Motor Step 1 To 2 Timeout Aux Fan Motor Aux Fan Cooled Temp Sensor Fault Enable Motor Temp Sensor Fault Enable Sensor Type Motor Temp Sensor Type Fault Level Motor Temp Sensor Fault Threshold Warn Enable Motor Temp Sensor Warning Enable Warn Level Motor Temp Sensor Warning Threshold Local Control Transfer Mode The Local Control Transfer Mode and Reset sub menus contain the following editable parameters and Reset Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Parameter name reference Local Control Control Local Channel Setting TransferMode Bumpless Transfer Mode Reset Mode Fault Reset Mode Auto Group 1 Attempts Auto Reset Attempts Group 1 Setting Reset Time Auto Reset Group 1 Timeout Auto Group 2 Attempts Auto Reset Attempts Group 2 Setting Reset Time Auto Reset Group 2 Timeout Auto Group 3 Attempts Auto Reset Attempts Group 3 Setting Reset Time Auto Reset Group 3 Timeout 1639502 12 2006 369 Use Current The Current sub menu contains the following editable parameters Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Parameter name r
392. s T internal registers refer to the Communication Internal Variables tables Registers 1639502 12 2006 475 Use User Map User Defined Indirect Registers User Map User Map is based on an indirect addressing system It is designed to improve Overview communication performance and flexibility User Map Details User Map allows you to read values of non contiguous registers in a continuous way Information is organized into 2 tables containing addresses and values The first table stores the addresses of registers to be read or written By default all addresses are null which means that the addresses have not been assigned The second table is the read and write access point to assigned register values 476 1639502 12 2006 Use Modbus Register Map Organization of Communication Variables Introduction Communication variables are listed in tables according to the group such as identification statistics or monitoring to which they belong They are associated with an LTMR controller which may or may not have an LTM E Expansion Module attached Communication Communication variables are grouped according to the following criteria Variable Groups Variable groups Registers Identification variables 00 to 99 Statistics variables 100 to 449 Monitoring variables 450 to 539 Configuration variables 540 to 699 Command variables 700 to 799 User Map variables 8
393. s DP Commissioning and Communication Checking 332 Verifying System Wiring c e o css re teas 335 Verify Configuration 2 70 02 pase er oo ee way oud eer eis Mi eS 339 Chapter 8 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 8 6 USC shit meus Tes ake R ee eas Bae ets 341 INthODUCHION 2 ious eevee ha eee eee eae ee Ae eh 342 Hardware Configurations 0 000 tenes 342 Using the LTM R Controller Alone 0 0 0 0 eee eee 343 Stand Alone Configuration 0 0 0 cette 343 Configuring the Magelis XBTN410 0 0 0 eee eee eee 347 Installing Magelis XBT L1000 Programming Software 348 Download 1 to 1 and 1 to many Software Application Files 350 Transferring Application Software Files to Magelis XBTN410 HMI 351 Using the Magelis XBTN410 HMI 1 to 1 0 2 eee ee ee eee 352 Physical Description 1 to 1 0 2 2 eee tee 353 LCD Display 1 to 1 0 tte eee 355 Navigating the Menu Structure 1 to 1 0 0 eee eee 361 Editing Values 1 to 1 rit a tenes 362 Menu Structure 1 t0 1 0 tenes 366 M i Menu 1 101 35300 2 eee eee ns Oa ee ee eet 367 Main Menu Settings 1 to 1 02 kee 368 Main Menu Statistics 1 to 1 2 eee 375 Main Menu Product ID 1 to 1 0 eee 382 Monitoring Using the Scrolling HMI Display 1 to 1 0 383 Main Menu Services 1 t0 1 2 ee tenes 387 Fault Management 1 to 1 0 0 eee 392
394. s O 1 and 0 2 e causes the alarm LED to flash 5 times per second The voltage load shedding function has the following parameters Parameters Setting range Factory setting Load shedding enable Enable Disable Enable Load shedding timeout 1 9999 s in increments of 0 1 s 10s Load shedding threshold 68 115 of Motor nominal 70 voltage Load shedding restart 1 9999 s in increments of 10s timeout 0 1 minutes Load shedding restart 68 115 of Motor nominal 90 threshold voltage The voltage load shedding function has the following characteristics Characteristics Value Trip time accuracy 0 1 s or 5 1639502 12 2006 191 Motor Protection Functions Timing The following diagram is an example of the timing sequence for the voltage load Sequence shedding function for a 2 wire configuration with automatic restart Vavg Load shedding restart threshold Load shedding threshold Load shedding timeout Load shedding restart timeout Load shedding bit Motor On q gt q gt 4 ai L 2 1 Motor running 2 Load shed motor stopped 3 Load shed cleared motor auto restart 2 wire operation 192 1639502 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions 4 4 Power Motor Protection Functions At a Glance Summary This section describes the power motor protection functions provided
395. s Reserved 12 2006
396. s the following characteristics Characteristic Value Unit kWh Accuracy 5 Resolution 0 1 kWh Refresh interval 100 ms Reactive Power Consumption Description The reactive power consumption function displays the accumulated total of the reactive electrical power delivered and used or consumed by the load Characteristics The reactive power consumption function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Unit kvarh Accuracy 5 Resolution 0 1 kvarh Refresh interval 100 ms 86 1639502 12 2006 Metering and Monitoring Functions 3 3 Fault and Warning Counters Overview Introduction Access Data What s in this Section The LTM R controller counts and records the number of faults and warnings that occur In addition it counts the number of auto reset attempts This information can be accessed to assist with system performance and maintenance Fault and warning counters may be accessed via e aPC with PowerSuite software e the Magelis XBTN410 HMI device e a PLC via the remote communication link This section contains the following topics Topic Page Introducing Fault and Warning Counters 88 All Faults Counter 89 All Warnings Counter 89 Auto Reset Counter 89 Protection Faults and Warnings Counters 90 Control Command Errors Counter 91 Wiring Faults Counter 91 Communication Loss Counters 92 Internal Fault Counte
397. se the E9 and buttons to select and edit settings There are 2 ways to edit setting values using the Magelis XBTN410 HMI in a 1 to 1 configuration e selecting an item in a value list e editing a numerical value one digit at a time Note Some settings although expressed as numerical values are selected in the same manner as an item in a value list For example a setting with a value that is expressed in units but can be incremented or decremented only by tens or hundreds of units is edited by scrolling through a value list Editing any value requires familiarity with the Magelis XBTN410 menu structure and general navigation principles For information on menu navigation see p 367 For information on the menu structure see p 366 362 1639502 12 2006 Use Selecting Values The following example describes the selection of a Thermal Overload Trip Class setting in a List Step Description Screen display 1 Navigate to the Thermal Overload Trip Class parameter Th Overload Trip Class 2 R Press the button to step into the Thermal Trip Class Overload Trip Class value list The sign indicates the displayed value is this parameter s saved setting 5 3 Press the button to move to the next value in the Trip Class list and press the O button move to the previous value in the list The indicates the displayed value is 10 not this parameter
398. sentation of the TeSys T Motor Management System Aim of the Product The TeSys T Motor Management System offers increased protection control and monitoring capabilities for single phase and 3 phase AC induction motors The system is flexible and modular and can be configured to meet the need of applications in industry The system is designed to meet the needs for integrated protections systems with open communications and global architecture More accurate sensors and solid state full motor protection ensures better utilization of the motor Complete monitoring functions enable analysis of motor operating conditions and faster reaction to prevent system downtime The system offers diagnostic and statistics functions and configurable warnings and faults allowing better prediction of component maintenance and provides data to continuous improvement of the entire system 16 1639502 12 2006 Introduction Examples of Supported Machine Segments The motor management system supports the following machine segments Machine segment Examples Process and special machine segments Water and waste water treatment e water treatment blowers and agitators Metal Minerals and Mining cement e glass e steel ore extraction Oil and gas e oil and gas processing e petrochemical e refinery offshore platform Microelectronic Pharmaceutical Chemical industry cosmetics e detergents e ferti
399. setting 374 513 comm loss 500 comm loss timeout 374 513 commercial reference 382 communicating 503 compatibility code 487 config faults count 92 376 connected 503 endian setting 507 fallback setting 49 50 104 374 513 fault enable 49 104 374 424 faults count 92 376 firmware version 382 487 ID code 487 internal faults count 92 376 parity setting 513 self detecting 503 self testing 503 status 503 warning enable 49 104 374 nominal power 48 NTC analog 170 O on level current 218 operating modes 222 custom 253 independent 234 introduction 225 overload 231 reverser 238 two speed 248 two step 242 operating states 209 214 chart 215 not ready 214 protection functions 216 ready 214 run 214 start 214 operating time 110 375 489 over power factor 203 fault enable 124 204 373 423 fault threshold 124 204 373 423 507 fault timeout 124 204 373 423 507 faults count 90 376 warning enable 124 204 373 423 warning threshold 124 204 373 423 507 overcurrent 155 fault enable 121 156 421 1639502 12 2006 Index fault threshold 121 156 421 505 fault timeout 121 156 421 505 faults count 90 375 warning enable 121 156 421 warning threshold 121 156 421 505 overpower 197 fault enable 124 198 373 423 fault threshold 124 198 373 423 506 fault timeout 124 198 373 506 fault timeout starting 423 faults count 90 376 w
400. shedding 456 6 Motor high speed 456 7 HMI port comm loss Output Data Cyclic output data Position Description Output 0 0 Instructs the starter to energize the motor in the reverse direction Run Reverse Output 0 1 Instructs the device to go to the OFF state Off 0 ENABLE RUN FORWARD RUN REVERSE 1 OFF Output 0 2 Instructs the starter to energize the motor in the forward direction Run Forward Output 0 3 Control unit command Test Fault Command Instructs the device to initiate an internal test routine within the device 704 5 462 1639502 12 2006 Use Position Description Output 0 4 Clear Thermal Capacity Level Command Reset thermal memory Instructs the starter to override any fault condition and allows starting 704 5 Note This command inhibits thermal protection Continued operation with inhibited thermal protection should be limited to applications where immediate restart is vital By setting this bit to 1 the thermal state of the motor is lost the thermal protection will no longer protect an already warm motor Output 0 5 Instructs the starter not to accept the Run reverse Run Auto Mode Forward and Off commands received from the remote host 0 LOCAL CONTROL 1 AUTO MODE Output 0 6 Trip reset Fault Reset Command Instructs the starter to reset all resettable trips one of the preconditions for READY 704 3 Output 1 4 Reser
401. shold and remains above that threshold for a set period of time This function has a single fault time delay Both the fault and warning thresholds are defined as a percentage of the Motor Nominal Power parameter setting Pnom The overpower function is available only in run state when the LTM R controller is connected to an expansion module Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled The function applies to both single phase and 3 phase motors The overpower function includes the following features e 2 thresholds e Overpower Warning Threshold e Overpower Fault Threshold e 1 fault time delay e Overpower Fault Timeout e 2 function outputs e Overpower Warning e Overpower Fault e 1 counting statistic e Overpower Faults Count 1639502 12 2006 197 Motor Protection Functions Block Diagram Overpower warning and fault Vavg gt lavg Power Factor p Parameter Settings Function Characteristics Run state gt amp Overpower warning P gt Ps1 AND P gt Ps2 T o L Overpower fault t Run state AND Vavg Average rms voltage lavg Average rms current P Power Ps1 Warning threshold Ps2 Fault threshold T Fault timeout The overpower function has the following parameters in 1 increments Parameters Setting range Factory setting Faul
402. start function includes the following features e 1 threshold e Fault Threshold e 1 fault time delay e Fault Timeout e 1 function outputs e Long Start Fault e 1 counting statistic e Long Start Faults Count 1639502 12 2006 149 Motor Protection Functions Block Diagram Parameter Settings Function Characteristics Long start fault 1 12 lavg gt lavg gt Is2 Pig T O Long start fault 3 Start state _ AND 11 Phase 1 current 12 Phase 2 current I3 Phase 3 current Is2 Fault threshold T Fault timeout The long start function has the following parameters Parameters Setting range Factory setting Fault enable Enable Disable Enable Fault timeout 1 200 s in 1 s increments 10s Fault threshold 100 800 of FLC 100 of FLC The long start function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Hysteresis 95 of Fault threshold Trip time accuracy 0 1 s or 5 Example The following describes the occurrence of a single threshold cross long start fault l A f EA cts fo E E E Bee AT EE te eh E REEE p Long start fault timeout Fault condition t Is2 Long start fault threshold 150 1639502 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Jam Description Functional Characteristics Block Diagram The jam function detects a locked rotor during run st
403. state If HMI controller communication is restored while the control mode is set to Local RJ45 control the IMPR exits from the fallback state If the control mode is changed to Local Terminal Strip or Network control the IMPR exits from the fallback state regardless of the state of HMl controller communications The table below defines the available actions that the LTM R controller may take during a communication loss Select one of these actions when configuring the LTM R controller Local RJ45 Communication Loss Actions LTM R controller output control Available LTM R controller actions after HMI mode prior to network loss LTM R controller network loss Local Terminal Strip Fault and Warning control possibilities Signal nothing Activate a warning Activate a fault Activate a fault and warning Local RJ45 Fault and Warning control possibilities Signal nothing Activate a warning Activate a fault Activate a fault and warning Remote Fault and Warning control possibilities Signal nothing Activate a warning Activate a fault Activate a fault and warning The behavior of the LO1 and LO2 relays depends on the motor controller mode and on the fallback strategy chosen Note For information about a communication loss and the fallback strategy to follow see p 104 532 1639502 12 2006 Appendices Wiring Diagrams Overview
404. system Function LTM R controller LTM R controller with expansion module Measurement Line currents Ground current Average current Current phase imbalance Thermal capacity level x x XxX OK XK Xx Motor temperature sensor Frequency Line to line voltage Line voltage imbalance Active power Reactive power Power factor Active power consumption mK mK X X X X X XxX X X KY x Xx Reactive power consumption Statistics Protection fault counts Protection warning counts Diagnostic fault counts Motor control function counts XxX K Xx XxXxX XK Xx Fault history System and Device Monitoring Faults Internal watchdog faults Controller internal temperature Temperature sensor connections x XK Xx Current connections Voltage connections x XxX XxX Xx x Xx Control command diagnostics start check X stop check run check back and stop check back X the functionality is available with the units indicated the functionality is not available with the units indicated 1639502 12 2006 25 Introduction Function LTM R controller LTM R controller with expansion module Control configuration checksum X Communication loss x X Motor Statistics Motor starts O1 starts
405. system is described by a GS file This file will be used by any Profibus configuration tool to get information about the device The file for the Profibus DP LTM R is called SCHNOA27 GS The mark will be replaced for example by E for English F for French G for German and so on D for Default A DANGER UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION Do not modify the GS file in any way Modifying the GS file can cause unpredictable behavior of the devices Failure to follow this instruction will result in death or serious injury Note If the GS file is modified in any way the Schneider Electric guarantee is immediately voided 454 1639502 12 2006 Use Modules as Presented in the GS File Overview The TeSys T system is presented as a modular device on Profibus DP You must select one of the following modules during configuration Modules without Short and long description of modules without PKW PKW Short description as shown in the GSD Long description MMC R Motor Management Controller remote configuration mode MMC R EV40 Motor Management Controller LTM EV40 remote configuration mode MMC L Motor Management Controller local configuration mode MMC L EV40 Motor Management Controller LTM EV40 local configuration mode e Remote R configuration mode enables the configuration of the MMC through the network This type of module is selected wh
406. t dobo 6660 1 fault reset bit not significant 2 LTM R controller number 1 8 3 fault status ON OFF FLT 4 time to reset seconds 414 1639502 12 2006 Use Reset to Defaults Page XBTN Reference Page The Reset to Defaults page provides the Clear Statistics Command and the Clear Controller Settings Command for each LTM R controller as displayed below Level 2 Description RESET TO DEFAULTS Clears statistics left arrows or settings right arrows for the selected LTM R controller 1 8 and restores factory defaults STATS 1 SETTINGS gt STATS 2 SETTINGS gt 4 STATS 3 SETTINGS gt 4 STATS 4 SETTINGS gt STATS 5 SETTINGS gt 4 STATS 6 SETTINGS gt 4 STATS 7 SETTINGS gt 4 STATS 8 SETTINGS gt The XBTN Reference page provides information about the HMI The following is an example of information displayed in this page Level 2 Parameter name description XBTN Reference z MB Speed 19200 HMI Port Baud Rate Setting MB Parity Even HMI Port Parity Setting LTM_1T8_E_ Vx xx DOP file name for the HMI application program XX XX 200X XX xx xx date of the HMI application program file XBT L1000 V 4 42 version of the XBTL1000 software Firmware V3 1 version of the HMI firmware 1639502 12 2006 415 Use Motor Starter Page 1 to many Overview The Motor Starter page
407. t Ratio n 2 Curr Ph Imb Current Phase Imbalance n 2 Th Capacity Thermal Capacity Level n 2 Avg Volts Average Voltage n 2 L3 L1 Volts L3 L1 Voltage n 2 L1 L2 Volts L1 L2 Voltage n 2 L2 L3 Volts L2 L3 Voltage n 2 Volt Ph Imb Voltage Phase Imbalance n 2 Frequency Frequency n 2 Active Power Active Power n 2 Power Factor Power Factor n 2 Temp Sensor Motor Temp Sensor n 2 1639502 12 2006 379 Use Fault n 3 records information in the following parameters Level 3 Level 4 Parameter name reference Fault n 3 Fault Code Fault Code n 3 Date Date And Time n 3 Time FLC Ratio Motor Full Load Current Ratio n 3 FLC Max Motor Full Load Current Max n 3 Avg Current Average Current n 3 L1 Current L1 Current n 3 L2 Current L2 Current n 3 L3 Current L3 Current n 3 Gr Current Ground Current n 3 AvgCurrRatio Average Current Ratio n 3 L1CurrRatio L1 Current Ratio n 3 L2CurrRatio L2 Current Ratio n 3 L3CurrRatio L3 Current Ratio n 3 GrCurrRatio Ground Current Ratio n 3 Curr Ph Imb Current Phase Imbalance n 3 Th Capacity Thermal Capacity Level n 3 Avg Volts Average Voltage n 3 L3 L1 Volts L3 L1 Voltage n 3 L1 L2 Volts L1 L2 Voltage n 3 L2 L3 Volts L2 L3 Voltage n 3 Volt Ph Imb Voltage Phase Imbalance n 3 Frequency Frequency n 3 Active Power Active Power n 3 Power Factor Power Factor n 3 Temp Sensor Motor Temp Sensor n 3 380 163
408. t button on the LTM R controller front face or the local HMI PC Power cycle on the LTM R controller 1 5 Set 1 5 logic input on the LTM R controller NC Network command 1639502 12 2006 267 Motor Control Functions Fault and Warning Codes The Fault Code parameter describes the type of fault or warning that most recently occurred Each fault or warning type is represented by anumber The following table maps Fault Code values to fault and warning types Fault Code Description Fault Warning 0 No fault or warning X X 3 Ground current X X 4 Thermal overload X X 5 Long start X X 6 Jam X X 7 Current phase imbalance X X 8 Undercurrent X X 10 Test X X 11 HMI port error X X 12 HMI port communication loss X X 13 Network port internal error X X 18 Diagnostic X X 19 Connection X X 20 Overcurrent X X 21 Current phase loss x x 22 Current phase reversal X X 23 Motor temperature sensor X X 24 Voltage phase imbalance X X 25 Voltage phase loss X X 26 Voltage phase reversal X X 27 Undervoltage X X 28 Overvoltage X X 29 Underpower X X 30 Overpower X X 31 Under power factor X X 32 Over power factor X x 33 Load shedding X X Fault or Warning reported Fault or Warning not reported 268 1639502 12 2006 Motor Control Functions Fa
409. t enable Enable Disable Disable Fault timeout 1 100 s in 1 s increments 60 s Fault threshold 20 800 of Motor nominal power 150 in 1 increments Warning enable Enable Disable Disable Warning threshold 20 800 of Motor nominal power 150 The overpower function has the following characteristics Characteristics Value Hysteresis 95 of Fault threshold or Warning threshold Accuracy 5 198 1639502 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Example The following diagram describes the occurrence of an overpower fault P A PS ait de aee ale ccm coe e oe arose eave S ccc koh 2b ole eye ot fault timeout q Ps2 Overpower fault threshold 1639502 12 2006 199 Motor Protection Functions Under Power Factor Description Functional Characteristics The under power factor protection function monitors the value of the power factor and signals e a warning when the value of the power factor falls below a set threshold e a fault when the value of the power factor falls below a separately set threshold and remains below that threshold for a set period of time This function has a single fault time delay The under power factor protection function is available only in run state when the LTM R controller is connected to an expansion module Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled The function applies to both si
410. t parameters In the tree control navigate to and select Monitoring Active Faults to display a graphical display of fault LEDs see below The LTM R controller monitors its global status and detects warnings and faults PowerSuite software displays this information using color coded LEDs Information type LED color Description Global status Solid gray Condition not detected Solid green Condition detected Warnings and Faults Solid gray No warning or fault or protection not enabled Solid yellow Warning Solid red Fault 448 1639502 12 2006 Use The fault monitoring screen in PowerSuite software looks like this PowerSuite Default File Edit Services Link Settings Tools View Help PEAS es eSB Telemecanique Active Faults Global Status Warnings and Faults Ready Under Current Thermal Overload e On Over Current External Thermal Sensor Fault Ground Current e Long Start Alarm Current Phase Loss fie Jam Reset Authorized Current Phase Reversal Local Comm Loss Tripped Current Imbalance e MOP Internal Fault Motor Running Voltage Imbalance Cassette Id Fault In Local control Voltage Phase Loss Diagnostic motor Ramping Voltage Phase Reversal e Diagnostic connection Fault Auto Reset Under Voltage Shunt Trip Fault Needs Power Cycle Over Voltage Test Trip Time to restart unknown Under Power Fault Auto Reset Over Power Fault Needs Power Cycle
411. t timeout i gt t Ready state Start state i Run state Is Long start fault threshold Start cycle with 2 threshold crosses 2 step Adjustable transition timer l i A First step i Second step pi gt Is Pete o se thas E ee egal Re Ep i Start time i 10 FLCH i ft Long start fault timeout i i pri t gt lt gt 4 yen Ready Start state i Run state state 1639502 12 2006 219 Motor Control Functions 1 Threshold In this start cycle scenario the start cycle fails Cross e Current rises above but fails to drop below the Long Start Fault Threshold e If Long Start protection is enabled the LTM R controller signals a fault when the Long Start Fault Timeout is reached e f Long Start protection is disabled the LTM R controller does not signal a fault and the run cycle begins after the Long Start Fault Timeout has expired e Other motor protection functions begin their respective duration times after the Long Start Fault Timeout e The LTM R controller reports start cycle time as 9999 indicating that current exceeded and remained above the fault threshold e The LTM R controller reports the maximum current detected during the start cycle Start cycle with 1 threshold cross l 10 FLC Start time Long start fault timeout i gt met q q gt 4 gt Ready state Start state Fault condition 220 1639502 12 2006 Motor Control Functions
412. t to the logic inputs 1 1 or 1 2 e Control logic disables the start commands opening logic outputs O 1 or O 2 In order to restart the motor the fault must be reset and the state of Start Stop operators determines the state of logic inputs 1 1 or 1 2 The control circuits needed to run a motor during a motor protection fault are not shown in the wiring diagrams that follow However the control strategy is to not link the state of logic output O 4 to the state of the input commands In this way fault conditions may be annunciated while control logic continues to manage Start and Stop commands 230 1639502 12 2006 Motor Control Functions Overload Operating Mode Description Use Overload operating mode when motor load monitoring is required and motor load control start stop is performed by a mechanism other than the LTM R controller Functional The Overload operating mode includes the following features Characteristics e Accessible only in Network control mode e Logic output 0 4 opens in response to a diagnostic error e The LTM R controller sets a bit in a status word when it detects an active signal in e logic inputs 1 1 1 2 1 3 or 1 4 or e the Aux 1 Aux 2 or Stop buttons on the HMI keypad Note When a bit is set in the input status word it can be read by a PLC which can write a bit to the LTM R controller s command word When the LTM R controller detects a bit in its command word it can turn on the
413. t transformers and signals e a warning when the summed current exceeds a set threshold e a fault when the summed current continuously exceeds a separately set threshold for a set period of time The internal ground current function has a single fault time delay The internal ground current function can be enabled when the motor is in ready state start state or run state When the LTM R controller is operating in custom mode this function can be configured so that it is disabled during start state and enabled only during ready state and run state Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled The function applies to both single phase and 3 phase motors 1639502 12 2006 159 Motor Protection Functions Functional The internal ground current function includes the following features Characteristics e 1 measure of ground current in amperes e Ground Current e 1 measure of ground current as a of FLC min e Ground Current Ratio e 2 thresholds e Warning Threshold e Fault Threshold e 1 fault time delay e Fault Timeout 2 function outputs e Internal Ground Current Warning e Internal Ground Current Fault e 1 counting statistic e Ground Current Faults Count Block Diagram Internal ground current warning and fault gt I gt l s1 Internal ground current warning 11 12 gt z 13 Ix gt I s2 e T Q gt Internal ground current fa
414. tage phase imbalance 25 Voltage phase loss 26 Voltage phase reversal 27 Undervoltage 28 Overvoltage 29 Underpower 30 Overpower 31 Under power factor 32 Over power factor 33 Load shedding 51 Controller internal temperature error 55 Controller internal error Stack overflow 56 Controller internal error RAM error 57 Controller internal error RAM checksum error 58 Controller internal error Hardware watchdog fault 59 Controller internal error 484 1639502 12 2006 Use Fault code Description 60 L2 current detected in 1 phase mode 64 EEPROM error 65 Expansion module communication error 66 Stuck reset button 67 Logic function error 100 104 Network port internal error 109 Network port comm error 555 Network port configuration error DT_Firmware DT_FirmwareVersion format is an XY000 array that describes a firmware revision Version e X major revision e Y minor revision Example Address 76 Ulnt Controller firmware version DT_Language5 DT_Language5 format is a bit string used for language display Language code Description 1 English default 2 Fran ais 4 Espa ol 8 Deutsch 16 Italiano Example Address 650 Word HMI language 1639502 12 2006 485 Use DT_WarningCode DT_WarningCode format is an enumeration of warning codes
415. tained local control with network control selectable 1639502 12 2006 555 NEMA Format Wiring Diagrams What s in this This chapter contains the following topics Chapter Topic Page Overload Mode Wiring Diagrams 557 Independent Mode Wiring Diagrams 561 Reverser Mode Wiring Diagrams 563 Two Step Wye Delta Mode Wiring Diagrams 565 Two Step Primary Resistor Mode Wiring Diagrams 567 Two Step Autotransformer Mode Wiring Diagrams 569 Two Speed Mode Wiring Diagrams Single Winding Consequent Pole 571 Two Speed Mode Wiring Diagrams Separate Winding 573 556 1639502 12 2006 NEMA Format Wiring Diagrams Overload Mode Wiring Diagrams Application The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse local control wiring diagram Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Local Control 3 i SEEE L1 L2 L3 1639502 12 2006 557 NEMA Format Wiring Diagrams Application The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained local control wiring diagram Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Local Control fei i L1 JL2 L3 M M M 558 1639502 12 2006 NEMA Format Wiring Diagrams Application The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse local control with Diagram with network control selectable wiring diagram 3 Wire Impulse Local Control with Network Control Selecta
416. tarting the request then the response is ready To provide versatility the object address is specified ONLY as a register index see Communication Variables tables The function code must be chosen according to the addressing mode The Periodic registers service function codes are Addressing mode Read Write Data size Function code Bit 6 to 0 Register Address read WORD 16 bits R_MB_16 0x25 Register Number ULONG 32 bits R_MB_32 0x26 write WORD 16 bits W_MB_16 0x2A ULONG 32 bits W_MB_32 0x2B 1639502 12 2006 469 Use PKW IN Data Response IN Data LTM R controller gt Profibus DP Master Byte 0 Byte 1 Object address Function code Same as request Same as request ERROR code for any non MB request Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Byte 7 Function code Toggle bit Function Read data or error code if function code 0x4E bit 7 bit 6 0 Same as ERROR b7 b0 b15 b8 request 0x4E R_MB_16 b7 b0 b15 b8 R_MB_32 b7 b0 b15 b8 b23 b16 b31 b24 W_MB_16 W_MB_32 If the initiator tries to write a TeSys T object or register to an unauthorized value or tries to access an inaccessible register an error code is answered Function code toggle bit Ox4E The exact error code can be found in bytes 4 and 5 The request is not accepted and the object or re
417. ted the LTM R controller applies a predefined logic file that permanently resides in the LTM R controller When custom operating mode is selected the LTM R controller uses a customized logic file created in the custom logic editor and downloaded to the LTM R controller from the configuration software Use the following commands to separately download from the configuration software to the LTM R controller your application s configuration file and customized logic file To download this file Use this command Configuration file with parameter settings PC to Device command in either the icon bar or that is open and displayed in the the Link gt File Transfer sub menu configuration software Logic file with logic commands that is open Download Program to Device command in and displayed in the custom logic editor either the icon bar or the Logic Functions menu 1639502 12 2006 253 Motor Control Functions 5 3 Fault Management At a Glance Summary This section describes how the LTM R controller manages the fault handling process and explains e how to select a fault reset mode and e controller behavior for each fault reset mode selection What s in this This section contains the following topics ion Section Topic Page Fault Management Introduction 255 Manual Reset 258 Automatic Reset 260 Remote Reset 266 Fault and Warning Codes 268 254
418. ted to the LTM R controller s network port The following parameters identify the configuration control source Parameter Enables use of this tool Factory setting Config Via HMI Keypad Enable Magelis XBTN410 device keypad Enabled Config Via HMI Engineering Tool Enable PC running PowerSuite software Enabled Config Via Network Port Enable the network port PLC Enabled Note The Magelis XBTN410 HMI can commission the LTM R controller only if a 1 to 1 software application is installed If a 1 to many software application is installed the Magelis XBTN410 HMI can operate up to 8 LTM R controllers after commissioning but cannot perform commissioning for any LTM R controller For information on the use of software application files see p 347 This chapter describes commissioning performed using either the Magelis XBTN410 HMI in a 1 to 1 configuration or PowerSuite software 1639502 12 2006 317 Commissioning Commissioning The commissioning process remains the same regardless which configuration tool Process you select This process includes the following stages Stage Description First power up The LTM R controller initializes and is ready for parameter configuration Configuring required settings Configure these parameters to move the LTM R controller out of its initialization state The LTM R controller is ready for operations Configuring optional settings Config
419. the motor is in run state Both timers begin if the imbalance is detected in start state The function identifies the phase causing a current imbalance If the maximum deviation from the 3 phase current average is the same for two phases the function identifies both phases Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled The function applies only to 3 phase motors 1639502 12 2006 141 Motor Protection Functions Functional The current phase imbalance function includes the following features Characteristics e 2 thresholds e Warning Threshold e Fault Threshold 2 fault time delays e Fault Timeout Starting e Fault Timeout Running 2 function outputs e Current Phase Imbalance Warning e Current Phase Imbalance Fault e 1 counting statistic e Current Phase Imbalance Faults Count e 3 indicators identifying the phase or phases with the highest current imbalance e L1 Current Highest Imbalance e L2 Current Highest Imbalance e L3 Current Highest Imbalance 142 1639502 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Block Diagram Current phase imbalance warning 14 lavg x 100 lavg gt Is1 J gt I2 lavg x 100 lavg gt Is1 7 p gt Current phase imbalance warning 13 lavg x 100 lavg gt Ist OR p Almax Ln current highest imbalance Current phase imbalance fault
420. tics Characteristic Value Unit s Accuracy 1 Resolution 1s Refresh interval 1s 1639502 12 2006 113 Metering and Monitoring Functions 114 1639502 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions At a Glance Overview What s in this Chapter This chapter describes the motor protection functions provided by the LTM R controller This chapter contains the following sections Section Topic Page 4 1 Motor Protection Functions Introduction 116 4 2 Thermal and Current Motor Protection Functions 129 4 3 Voltage Motor Protection Functions 175 4 4 Power Motor Protection Functions 193 1639502 12 2006 115 Motor Protection Functions 4 1 Motor Protection Functions Introduction At a Glance Summary This section introduces you to the motor protection functions provided by the LTM R controller including protection parameters and characteristics What s in this This section contains the following topics Section Topic Page Motor Protection Functions 117 Setting Ranges of the Motor Protection Functions 119 Motor Protection Characteristics 125 116 1639502 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Motor Protection Functions Predefined Functions and Data Customized Functions and Data Faults The LTM R controller monitors current ground current and motor temperature sensor parameters When
421. tics Characteristic Value Unit s Accuracy 1 Resolution 1s Refresh interval 1s 1639502 12 2006 109 Metering and Monitoring Functions Motor Operating Time Description Characteristics The LTM R controller tracks motor operating time and records the value in the Operating Time parameter Use this information to help schedule motor maintenance such as lubrication inspection and replacement The motor operating time function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Unit HHHHHHH MM SS Accuracy 30 minutes over 1 year of operation Resolution 1s Refresh interval 1s Where e H Hours e M Minutes S Seconds Maximum Internal Controller Temperature Description Characteristics The Controller Internal Temperature Max parameter contains the highest internal temperature expressed in C detected by the LTM R controller s internal temperature sensor The LTM R controller updates this value whenever it detects an internal temperature greater than the current value For information about internal temperature measurement including the detection of internal temperature faults and warnings see p 96 The Controller Internal Temperature Max parameter has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Unit C Accuracy 4 C 7 2 F Resolution 1 C 1 8 F Refresh interval 100 ms
422. ting statistic Wiring Faults Count The current phase reversal function has the following configurable parameters Parameters Setting range Factory setting Fault enable Enable Disable Disable Phase sequence e A B C A B C e A C B The current phase reversal function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Trip time at motor startup within 0 2 s of motor startup Trip time accuracy 0 1 s or 5 148 1639502 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Long Start Description Start Cycle Functional Characteristics The long start function detects a locked or stalled rotor in start state and signals a fault when current continuously exceeds a separately set threshold for the same period of time Each predefined operating mode has its own current profile representing a successful start cycle for the motor The LTM R controller detects a long start fault condition whenever the actual current profile occurring after a start command varies from the expected profile Fault monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled This function e applies to both single phase and 3 phase motors e has no warning The configurable parameters for the Long Start protection function Long Start Fault Threshold and Long Start Fault Timeout are used by the LTM R controller in defining and detecting the motor s start cycle see p 278 The long
423. ting the value is being edited Dewey 9 rs Press the button to complete the first entry of Confirm Pswd the new password The LCD displays the screen for confirming the new password 0000 10 Repeat steps 3 through 9 When the new password is confirmed the LCD returns to the previous higher level screen HMI Password Change Pswd 1639502 12 2006 391 Use Fault Management 1 to 1 Overview Fault and Warning Codes When a warning or fault occurs the HMI LCD display e suspends the scrolling parameter list and displays a description of the fault or warning e displays a fault if both a fault and warning are active e shows the most recent fault or warning if multiple faults or multiple warnings are active When a fault or warning occurs display of the scrolling parameter list is suspended until e the fault or warning is resolved or e the ESC key is pressed Note At any time you can use the e ENTER key to suspend the scrolling parameter list and open the Main menu e ESC key to close the Main menu and return to the scrolling parameter list When the HMI displays a fault or warning it includes both the name and numeric code for the fault or warning For a description of fault and warning codes see p 268 392 1639502 12 2006 Use Warning Example The following is an example of the sequence of screens displayed in response to a
424. tion Overview Software Installation Cable Connection PowerSuite software is a Microsoft Windows based program that can be installed on any PC running the Microsoft Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows NT V4 0 or Windows XP operating system To install PowerSuite software follow the instructions that come with your version of this software Your LTM R controller ships with its own configuration software application LTM CONF The LTM CONF configuration software is the same software incorporated within PowerSuite software version 2 5 Follow these steps to install PowerSuite software on your PC Step Action 1 Place the installation disk into your PC s CD DVD drive 2 Navigate to and click on the file Setup exe The setup wizard begins Follow the self explanatory instructions in the set up wizard Use the RS 232 to RS 485 converter with PC and LTM R communication cable to connect the LTM R controller or expansion module to the PC 1639502 12 2006 433 Use User Interface Overview PowerSuite software is a Microsoft Windows based program that provides an intuitive graphical user interface for the LTM R controller This software can be used e in standalone mode to edit configuration files for the LTM R controller and save the edited files to your choice of media including your PC s hard drive or a CD e connected to the Local HMI port of the LTM R control
425. tion and alarm indicators HMI communication LED indicator test and reset function LTMRO8PBD 24 Vdc 0 4 8 A FLC LTMR27PBD 24 Vdc 1 35 27 A FLC LTMR100PBD 24 Vdc 5 100 A FLC current protection metering and monitoring functions LTMRO8PFM 100 240 Vac 0 4 8 A FLC LTMR27PFM 100 240 Vac 1 35 27 A FLC LTMR100PFM 100 240 Vac 5 100 A FLC LTM E The range includes two models of the expansion module that provide voltage Expansion monitoring functionality and 4 additional logic inputs The expansion module is Module powered by the LTM R controller via a connector cable LTM E Functional description Reference number expansion module Voltage sensing 110 690 Vac 3 phase voltage inputs 4 additional discrete logic inputs power LED indicator logic input status LED indicators Additional components required for an optional expansion module e LTM R controller to LTM E connection cable additional voltage protection metering and monitoring functions LTMEV40BD 24 Vdc LTMEV40FM 100 240 Vac 1639502 12 2006 19 Introduction PowerSuite Software PowerSuite software is a Microsoft Windows based application that enables you to configure and commission the LTM R controller from a PC You can also use PowerSuite software to modify default logic or create new logic using pre made function blocks and el
426. tline Outline of levels and pages Level Pages Description 1 Home page The starting page navigation to all other pages begins here Opens by default on start up when no faults exist 2 Starters currents page e Displays average current as a percent of FLC for every LTM R controller e Provides a link to each LTM R controller s menu structure Starters status page e Displays operating status On Off Fault for every LTM R controller e Provides a link to each LTM R controller s menu structure Fault display pages Displays a series of pages each page describing an active fault Opens automatically when a fault exists Remote reset page Executable commands for the remote reset of each LTM R controller Reset to defaults page Executable commands to reset statistics or settings for each LTM R controller XBTN reference page Describes communication settings application program file programming software version and HMI firmware version 3 Motor starter page For a selected LTM R controller e Displays dynamically changing parameter values Self Test command Links to its settings statistics and Product ID information 4 5 6 Settings page and sub pages Contains configurable settings for a selected LTM R controller Statistics page and sub pages Presents statistics for a selected LTM R controller including fault n 0 and fault n 1 history Product ID page LTM R controller and expansion module part and firmw
427. tor fault PF PS2 fc sashes es Ate BE awh E Ge Abas ect fault timeout gt P PFs2 over power factor fault threshold 1639502 12 2006 205 Motor Protection Functions 206 1639502 12 2006 Motor Control Functions At a Glance Overview Your selection of motor operating mode serves as the primary control function for the LTM R controller Select the combination of operating mode and control wiring option required to start stop or monitor the state of the motor that the LTM R controller protects The topics in this chapter describe the LTM R controller s operating states listed below which determine the objectives of the motor control function energized or de energized configured or not configured ready to start a motor starting a motor running or not running a motor warning response fault response operating modes select from 1 of 10 predefined control programs the selected control program monitors inputs executes commands and directs outputs to transition between states according to the specific needs of common motor starter applications and control sources control mode selection which directs the LTM R controller to respond to commands that originate from local terminal strip inputs via hard wired input devices local HMI commands via the HMI port remote commands from the network via the network port This chapter also introduces custom operating mode which you
428. toring for single phase and 3 phase AC induction motors Phase Current The LTM R controller includes internal current transformers for measuring the motor Inputs load phase current directly from the motor load power cables or from secondaries of external current transformers LW 1 f N 1 Windows for phase current measurement 1639502 12 2006 31 Introduction Features of the Front Face Test Reset Button HMI Device Expansion Module PC Port Network Port The LTM R controller front face includes the following features Ys OOOO OO0O0000000 A2 13 C 14 15 C 16 97 98 95 96 Al 1 1 2 NG ic A Eeee LTMR100PBD PROFIBUS gt i Ep E Es amp a sete A Z o S55 E Test Reset NO NO NO 13 14 23 24 33 34 Z1 Z2 T41 T2 S A BDGND VP OJOJOO OJOGO Test Reset button HMI port with RJ45 connector connecting the LTM R controller to an HMI PC or expansion module Network port with 9 pin sub D connector connecting the LTM R controller to a Profibus PLC Status indicating LEDs Plug in terminal control power logic Input and common Plug in terminal double pole single throw DPST relay output Plug in terminal relay output Plug in terminal ground fault input a
429. troller only 32 LTM R controller with expansion module 11 Profibus DP device status State of the Profibus fieldbus handler 11 0 Local remote 0 Profibus DP parameters have priority 1 Locally set parameters have priority 11 1 11 6 Reserved 11 7 1 Profibus DP application profile 1 motor management starter 12 Profibus DP error byte 13 Profibus DP information and error byte Report errors with internal communication 13 0 1 an attempt to write setting registers from a Profibus parameter frame was received when the motor was running 13 1 1 writing values from a Profibus parameter frame failed even when the motor was not running 13 2 1 an internal error occurred during the generation of the Profibus diagnostic frame 13 3 1 the internal cyclic data exchange callback failed 13 4 1 system falldown was detected 13 5 1 node address has changed 1639502 12 2006 465 Use Byte 14 35 DP V0 DP V1 Byte Byte Name Description 14 Register 455 455 8 455 15 Monitoring of status 15 Register 455 455 0 455 7 16 Register 456 456 8 456 15 17 Register 456 456 0 456 7 18 Register 457 457 8 457 15 19 Register 457 457 0 457 7 20 Register 460 460 8 460 15 Monitoring of warnings 21 Register 460 460 0 460
430. ts exist e the Self Test Enable parameter is set Note Performing a self test when the motor is on triggers a Thermal Overload fault The LTM R controller performs the following checks during a self test e watchdog check e RAM check e recalibration of the thermal memory time constant which keeps track of time while the LTM R controller is not powered If any of the above tests fails a major internal fault occurs If not the self test continues and the LTM R controller performs e expansion module test if it is connected to an expansion module If this test fails e the LTM R controller experiences a minor internal fault e the expansion module experiences an internal fault e internal communication communication brick test If this test fails the LTM R controller experiences a minor internal fault e LED test turns all LEDs off then turns each LED on in sequence then turns all LEDs on then returns LEDs to their initial state e output relay test opens all relays and restores them to their original state only after e areset command executes or e power is cycled During a self test the LTM R controller sets the Self Test Command parameter to 1 When the self test finishes this parameter is reset to 0 1639502 12 2006 527 Maintenance Internal Clock To ensure an accurate record of faults be sure to maintain the LTM R controller s internal clock The LTM R controller time stamps all faults usi
431. ture for a selected LTM R controller at address 1 4 move to the adjacent left character within a numerical setting value execute remote reset commands for a selected LTM R controller at address 1 4 reset statistics to factory defaults for a selected LTM R controller display the description of another fault when the LCD displays fault messages V enter the menu structure for a selected LTM R controller at address 5 8 move to a lower level ina LTM R controller menu structure move to the adjacent right character within a numerical setting value toggle between alternate values for Boolean settings execute remote reset commands for a selected LTM R controller at address 5 8 reset settings to factory defaults for a selected LTM R controller display the description of another fault when the LCD displays fault messages scroll down through a page decrement by 1 the value of the selected digit or setting scroll up through a page increment by 1 the value of the selected digit or setting ODS select a numeric setting for editing Note after a setting is selected you can increment or decrement either e the entire value or e a selected digit within the setting exits the present level in the HMI menu structure and moves up to the next level exits the selected setting without saving changes saves changes and exits the selected setting OO deletes the value of the selected setting Note after deleting
432. type Read only variables Note p 478 467 UInt L1 current ratio FLC 468 Ulnt L2 current ratio FLC 469 Ulnt L3 current ratio FLC 470 Ulnt Ground current ratio x 0 1 FLC min 471 Ulnt Current phase imbalance 472 Int Controller internal temperature C 473 Ulnt Controller config checksum 474 Ulnt Frequency x 0 01 Hz 475 Ulnt Motor temperature sensor 476 Ulnt Average voltage V 1 477 Ulnt L3 L1 voltage V 1 478 Ulnt L1 L2 voltage V 1 479 Ulnt L2 L3 voltage V 1 480 Ulnt Voltage phase imbalance 1 481 Ulnt Power factor x 0 01 1 482 Ulnt Active power consumption 1 483 Ulnt Reactive power consumption kVAR 1 484 489 Word Not significant 490 Word Network port status bit 0 Network port communicating bit 1 Network port connected bit 2 Network port self testing bit 3 Network port self detecting bit 4 Network port bad config bits 5 15 Not significant 491 499 Word Not significant 500 501 UDint Average current x 0 01 A 502 503 UDint L1 current x 0 01 A 504 505 UDint L2 current x 0 01 A 506 507 UDint L3 current x 0 01 A 508 509 UDint Ground current x 0 01 A 510 Ulnt Controller port ID 511 Ulnt Time to trip x 1 s 512 Ulnt Motor last start current ratio FLC 1639502 12 2006 503 Use Register Variable type Read only variables Note p 478 513 Ulnt Motor last start duration s 514 Ulnt Motor starts per hour count 515 Wor
433. u structure see p 404 430 1639502 12 2006 Use Service Commands 1 to many Overview The Magelis XBTN410 in 1 to many configuration provides the following service commands Command Description Location reference Self Test Performs an internal check of the Level 3 Motor Starter page see p 417 and LTM R controller and expansion p 527 module Reset to Defaults Statistics Executes the Clear Statistics Level 2 Reset to Defaults page see p 415 Command for a selected LTM R controller Reset to Defaults Settings Executes the Clear Controller Level 2 Reset to Defaults page see p 415 Settings Command for a selected LTM R controller Remote Reset Performs remote fault reset fora Level 2 Remote Reset page see p 414 selected LTM R controller 1639502 12 2006 431 Use 8 6 Using PowerSuite Software At a Glance Summary The following topics show you how to use the LTM R controller when it is connected to a PC running PowerSuite software What s in this This section contains the following topics Section Topic Page Software Installation 433 User Interface 434 File Management 436 Navigation 440 Configuring Parameters 442 Configuration Functions Using PowerSuite 444 Metering and Monitoring 445 Fault Management 448 Control Commands 450 432 1639502 12 2006 Use Software Installa
434. uccessive inrush currents resulting from too little time between starts The rapid cycle lockout function provides a configurable timer which begins its count when the LTM R controller detects On Level Current defined as 10 of FLC At the same time the Rapid Cycle Lockout bit is set If the LTM R controller detects a Run command before the rapid cycle lockout has elapsed the Rapid Cycle Lockout bit remains set LTM R controller ignores the Run command HMI if attached displays WAIT LTM R controller Alarm LED flashes red 5 times per second indicating the LTM R controller has disabled motor outputs thereby preventing an undesirable condition caused by starting the motor e LTM R controller monitors the wait time if more than 1 timer is active the LTM R controller reports the minimum wait time before the longest timer elapses On power loss the LTM R controller saves the state of the lockout timer in non volatile memory When the LTM R controller next powers up the timer restarts its count and again ignores Run commands until the timer completes the timeout Setting the Rapid Cycle Lockout Timeout parameter to 0 disables this function The Rapid Cycle Lockout Timeout setting can be edited when the LTM R controller is in its normal operating state If an edit is made while the timer is counting the edit is effective when the timer finishes counting This function has no warning and no fault The rapid cycle lockout funct
435. uction Technical Specifications of the Expansion Module Technical Specifications The expansion module meets the following specifications Certifications UL CSA CE CTIC K CCC NOM GOST IACS E10 BV LROS DNV GL RINA ABS RMRos ATEX Conformity to Standards IEC EN 60947 4 1 UL 508 CSA C22 2 IACSE10 European community directives CE marking Satisfies the essential requirements of the low voltage LV machinery and electromagnetic compatibility EMC directives Rated insulation voltage Ui According to IEC EN 60947 1 overvoltage category III degree of pollution 3 690 V UI on voltage inputs According to UL508 CSA C22 2 no 14 690 V UI on voltage inputs Rated impulse withstand voltage According to IEC60947 1 8 3 3 4 1 Paragraph 2 220 V inputs circuits 4 8 kV spacing 24 V inputs circuits 0 91 kV Uimp TE i eee communication circuits 0 91 kV voltage input circuits 7 3 kV Degree of protection According to 60947 1 protection against direct contact IP20 Protective treatment IEC EN 60068 TH IEC EN 60068 2 30 Cycle Humidity 12 Cycles IEC EN 60068 2 11 Salt spray 48 hr Ambient air Storage 40 80 C 40 176 F temperaturearound Io eration gt 40 mm 1 57 inches 20 60 C 4 140 F the device lt 40mm 1 57 inches but gt 9 mm 0 35 inches spacing 20 55 C 4 131 F
436. ue for the phase is compared to the FLC parameter setting where FLC is FLC1 or FLC2 whichever is active at that time Calculated measurement Formula Line current ratio FLC 100 x Ln FLC Where e FLC FLC1 or FLC2 parameter setting whichever is active at the time e Ln L1 L2 or L3 current value in amperes 68 1639502 12 2006 Metering and Monitoring Functions Line Current Ratio Characteristics The line current ratio function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Unit of FLC Accuracy See p 68 Resolution 1 FLC Refresh interval 100 ms 1639502 12 2006 69 Metering and Monitoring Functions Ground Current Description Ground Current Configurable Parameters External Ground Current Formula The LTM R controller measures ground currents and provides values in amperes and as a percentage of FLCmin The internal ground current is a measured value and reports 0 when the current falls below 10 of FLCmin The external ground current depends on the parameter settings and reports the calculated value at any current level The ground current function returns the value of the ground current The ground current is either calculated by the LTM R controller from the 3 line currents measured by the load current transformers 10 or measured by the external ground current transformer I0 The control mode configuration
437. ult 11 Phase 1 current I2 Phase 2 current I3 Phase 3 current I Summed current I s1 Warning threshold IXs2 Fault threshold T Fault timeout 160 1639502 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Parameter Settings Function Characteristics Example The internal ground current function has the following parameters Parameters Setting range Factory setting Internal ground current fault timeout 0 5 25 s in 1s 0 1 s increments Internal ground current fault threshold 20 500 of FLCmin in 30 of FLCmin 1 increments Internal ground current warning threshold 20 500 of FLCmin in 30 of FLCmin 1 increments The internal ground current function has the following characteristics Characteristics Value Hysteresis 95 of Fault threshold or Warning threshold Trip time accuracy 0 1 s or 5 The following diagram describes the occurrence of an internal ground current fault occurring during run state Ir Start state Run state Fault condition a gt p IXs2 internal ground current fault threshold 1639502 12 2006 161 Motor Protection Functions External Ground Current Description The external ground current function is enabled when e the Ground Current Mode parameter is set to External and e acurrent transformation ratio is set by configuring the Ground CT Primary and the Ground CT Seconda
438. ult Date and time Year e 2006 2099 2006 Month January February March April May June July August September October November December January Day e 1 31 Hour e 00 23 00 Minute e 00 59 00 Second e 00 59 00 Contactor rating 1 10000 A 810 A 1639502 12 2006 45 Introduction Parameter Setting Range Factory Default Control local channel setting Terminal strip HMI Terminal strip Config via HMI keypad enable Enable Disable Enable Config via HMI engineering tool enable Enable Disable Enable Config via HMI network port enable Enable Disable Enable Language English Frangais Espa ol Deutsch Italiano English Motor auxiliary fan cooled Yes No No Fault reset mode Manual Remote Automatic Manual Bumpless transfer mode Bump Bumpless Bump Diagnostic Diagnostic configurable parameters for the LTM R controller and the expansion Parameter module include checks of start and stop commands and wiring Settings Parameter Setting Range Factory Default Diagnostic fault enable see p 98 e Yes No e No Diagnostic warning enable e Yes No e No Wiring fault enable see p 107 e Yes No e No 46 1639502 12 2006 Introduction Fault Auto Reset Fault auto reset configurable parameters for t
439. ult Code Description Fault Warning 51 Controller internal temperature error x 55 Controller internal error stack overflow x 56 Controller internal error RAM error x 57 Controller internal error ROM checksum error X 58 Controller internal error Hardware watchdog fault X 59 Controller internal error X 60 L2 current detected in 1 phase mode x 64 EEROM error X 65 Expansion module communication error x 66 Stuck reset button X 67 Logic function error x 100 Network port internal error x 101 Network port internal error x 102 Network port internal error x 104 Network port internal error x 109 Network port communication error x 555 Network port configuration error X X Fault or Warning reported Fault or Warning not reported 1639502 12 2006 269 Motor Control Functions 270 1639502 12 2006 Installation Introduction Overview This chapter describes the physical installation and assembly of the LTM R controller and the LTM E expansion module It also explains how to connect and wire the controller terminal block including communication port wiring A DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH e Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on it e Apply appropriate personal protective equipment PPE and follow safe electrical work practices Failure to follow this instruction will result in death or serious injury A W
440. unction has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Unit A Accuracy 1 for 8 A and 27 A units 2 for 100 A units Resolution 0 01A Refresh interval 100 ms The Average Current Ratio parameter provides the average current value as a percentage of FLC The average current value for the phase is compared to the FLC parameter setting where FLC is FLC1 or FLC2 whichever is active at that time Calculated measurement Formula Line current ratio FLC 100 x lavg FLC Where e FLC FLC1 or FLC2 parameter setting whichever is active at the time lavg average current value in amperes 1639502 12 2006 73 Metering and Monitoring Functions Average Current Ratio Characteristics The average current ratio function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Unit of FLC Accuracy See average current above Resolution 1 FLC Refresh interval 100 ms 74 1639502 12 2006 Metering and Monitoring Functions Current Phase Imbalance Description The current phase imbalance function measures the maximum percentage of deviation between the average current and the individual phase currents Formulas The current phase imbalance measurement is based on imbalance ratio calculated from the following formulas Calculated measurement Formula Imbalance r
441. unction warning e Fault timeout A time delay that must expire before the protection function fault is triggered The behavior of a timeout depends on its trip current characteristic profile e Trip curve characteristic TCC The LTM R controller includes a definite trip characteristic for all protection functions except the Thermal Overload Inverse Thermal protection function which has both an inverse trip and definite trip curve characteristic as described below Definite TCC The duration of the fault timeout remains a constant regardless of changes in the value of the measured quantity current as described in the following diagram i a_ gt ___ _ No operation Delayed operation 126 1639502 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Inverse TCC The duration of the time delay varies inversely with the value of the measured quantity here thermal capacity As the measured quantity increases the potential for harm also increases thereby causing the duration of the time delay to decrease as described in the following diagram At No operation Delayed operation 1639502 12 2006 127 Motor Protection Functions Hysteresis To improve stability motor protection functions apply a hysteresis value that is added to or subtracted from limit threshold settings before a fault or warning response is reset The hysteresis value is calculated as a percentage typically 5 o
442. unctions 1639502 12 2006 517 Use Identification and Maintenance Functions IMF IM Index Space In order to avoid conflicts with any Profibus DP devices already installed in the field and Partitions and to save address space for operational parameters the I amp M proposal follows the CALL_REQ service defined within IEC 61158 6 This service part of the Load Domain Upload Download services can be used within any module independent from any directory in a representative module e g slot 0 of a device It uses index 255 within any slot and opens a separate addressable sub index space For I amp M functions the sub index range from 65000 to 65199 is reserved Sub index blocks are called IM_Index Index 255 Index 0 Slot x lt _ CALL I amp M gt ca 65000 65004 65005 Basic I amp M mandatory Basic I amp M reserved Profile specific I amp M Manufacturer specific I amp M IM_INDEX The CALL_REQ service needs several header bytes reducing the possible net data length to 236 bytes 518 1639502 12 2006 Use For I amp M functions the following block of sub indices IM_INDEX will be used IM_INDEX Usage 65000 1 amp MO 65001 1 amp M1 65002 1 amp M2 65003 1 amp M3 65004 1 amp M4 65005 65015 Reserved for additional general I amp M functions 65016 65099 Profile speci
443. undercurrent function includes the following features e 2 thresholds e Warning Threshold e Fault Threshold e 1 fault time delay e Fault Timeout e 2 function outputs e Undercurrent Warning e Undercurrent Fault e 1 counting statistic e Undercurrent Faults Count Undercurrent warning and fault 11 r 12 13 lavg Run state p amp m lavg lt Is gt p Undercurrent warning lavg lt Is2 T 0 yp Undercurrent fault Run state p AND lavg Average current Is1 Warning threshold Is2 Fault threshold T Fault timer delay 1639502 12 2006 153 Motor Protection Functions Parameter The undercurrent function has the following parameters Settings Parameters Setting range Factory setting Fault enable Enable Disable Disable Fault timeout 1 200 s in 1 s increments 1s Fault threshold 30 100 of FLC in 1 50 of FLC increments Warning enable Enable Disable Disable Warning threshold 30 100 of FLC in 1 50 of FLC increments Function The undercurrent function has the following characteristics Characteristics Characteristics Value Hysteresis 105 of Fault threshold or Warning threshold Trip time accuracy 0 1 s or 5 Example The following diagram describes the occurrence of an undercurrent fault Start state Run state Fault conditi
444. ure these parameters to support the LTM R controller functions required by the application Verifying hardware Check hardware wiring Verifying the configuration Confirm accurate parameter settings 318 1639502 12 2006 Commissioning Required Information Required Information The following information is required to commission the LTM R controller and expansion module The selection column shows the specific values or the range supported by the LTM R controller and expansion module Commissioning information Specific information or parameter Selections LTM R controller type used in application Control Voltage 100 240 Vac 24 Vdc Current Range 8A 27A 100A Network Protocol Modbus DeviceNet CANopen Profibus Expansion module type used in application Control Voltage None 100 240 Vac 24 Vdc HMI Type used in application Magelis 1 to 1 PowerSuite software Network Is a network used in application No Yes Motor settings Full Load Current Max FLCmax 0 4 100 A without external CTs or 0 4 810 A with external CTs Motor Trip Class 5 30 in increments of 5 Motor Phases Single phase motor 3 phase motor Motor Nominal Voltage 110 690 V Controller operating mode Motor Operating Mode Overload Independent Reverser Two Step Two Speed Control wiring type Motor Op
445. ured current and the input motor trip class setting the LTM R controller considers only the highest thermal state iron or copper when calculating thermal capacity utilized by the motor as described below 0 A Heating Cooling Trip thermal value ofe iron tripping threshold Ocu copper tripping threshold t Time 1639502 12 2006 133 Motor Protection Functions When inverse thermal fault mode is selected the Thermal Capacity Level parameter indicating utilized thermal capacity due to load current is incremented during both start and run states When the LTM R controller detects that the thermal capacity level q exceeds the fault threshold qs it triggers a thermal overload fault as described below A Starting Running Fault state cooling Starting Running Fault state cooling Trip Trip Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled The LTM R controller will clear a thermal overload fault or warning when the utilized thermal capacity falls below 95 of the threshold 134 1639502 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Functional The Thermal Overload inverse thermal functions include the following features Characteristics e 1 motor trip class setting e Motor Trip Class e 4 configurable thresholds e Motor Full Load Current Ratio FLC1 e Motor High Speed Full Load Current Ratio FLC2 e Thermal Overload Warni
446. urrent phase loss function includes the following features Characteristics 1 fixed fault and warning threshold equal to 80 of the 3 phase average current e fault time delay e Current Phase Loss Timeout e 2 function outputs e Current Phase Loss Warning e Current Phase Loss Fault e 1 counting statistic e Current Phase Loss Faults Count e 3 indicators identifying the phase or phases experiencing the current loss e L1 Current loss e L2 Current loss e L3 Current loss 1639502 12 2006 145 Motor Protection Functions Block Diagram Current phase loss fault and warning 11 gt 14 lavg x 100 lavg gt 80 Start state 12 pe 12 lavg x 100 lavg gt 80 13 w 13 lavg x 100 lavg gt 80 Parameter Settings Function Characteristics 41 Phase 1 current I2 Phase 2 current I3 Phase 3 current gt gt Run state gt OR amp 21 ___ AND OR o l p gt Almax al Current phase loss fault Current phase loss warning p gt Ln current phase loss Ln Line current number or numbers with the greatest deviation from lavg lavg 3 phase current average T Fault timeout The current phase loss function has the following configurable parameters Parameters Setting range Factory setting Fault enable Enable Disable Enable Timeout 0 1 30 s in 0 1 s increments
447. variables Note p 478 696 Ulnt Network port address setting 697 699 Not significant 514 1639502 12 2006 Use Command Variables Command Variables Command variables are described below Register Variable type Read Write variables Note p 478 700 Word Logic outputs command register bit O Logic output 1 command bit 1 Logic output 2 command bit 2 Logic output 3 command bit 3 Logic output 4 command bit 4 Logic output 5 command bit 5 Logic output 6 command bit 6 Logic output 7 command bit 7 Logic output 8 command 4a 4 a bits 8 15 Reserved 701 703 Reserved 704 Word Control register 1 bit 0 Motor run forward command bit 1 Motor run reverse command bit 2 Reserved bit 3 Fault reset command bit 4 Reserved bit 5 Self test command bit 6 Motor low speed command bits 7 15 Reserved 705 Word Control register 2 bit O Clear all command bit 1 Clear statistics command bit 2 Clear thermal capacity level command bit 3 Clear controller settings command bit 4 Clear network port settings command bits 5 15 Reserved 706 709 Reserved 710 799 Forbidden 1639502 12 2006 515 Use User Map Variables User Map User Map variables are described below Va
448. ve been saved if no fault or warning is active e contains optional configuration settings for the LTM R controller expansion module and equipment e closes if no key is pressed within 10 seconds e re opens by pressing the ENTER key If the motor is running when the LCD displays the Main menu some parameters cannot be re configured and some commands cannot be executed including Load CT Ratio Motor Operating Mode Fault Reset Mode during a fault condition e e e e Clear All Command Only configurable parameter settings the Sys Config menu parameters and the Main menu s Settings sub menu parameters can be saved to a file and subsequently downloaded to a replacement LTM R controller Use PowerSuite software to save and download settings The Main menu s Statistics Services and Product ID sub menus are not saved and therefore cannot be downloaded to a replacement LTM R controller 366 1639502 12 2006 Use Main Menu 1 to 1 Overview In a 1 to 1 configuration the HMI displays a Main menu that consists of 4 second level sub menus each with up to 3 additional levels of sub menus The 4 second level sub menus are displayed below Level 1 Level 2 Contains Main Menu Settings Configurable settings for all parameters plus HMI display selections For a list of Settings sub menu parameters see the following topic Statistics A read only history of all measured statistics
449. ved Manufacturer Specific 1 Output 1 5 Low speed 704 6 Motor Low Speed Command Output 1 6 Reserved Manufacturer Specific 3 Output 1 7 Reserved Manufacturer Specific 4 Output 2 Analog output Additional Output 706 8 15 Output 3 Analog output Additional Output 706 0 7 Output 4 Communication module command register 1 Additional Output high byte 700 8 15 Output 5 Communication module command register 1 Additional Output low byte 700 0 4 700 0 5 7 Reserved 463 Use Diagnostic Telegram for Profibus DP Overview A Diagnostic Telegram is sent by the LTM R controller when e there is a change of node address e a system falldown situation is detected e an error or a warning occurs Byte 0 9 DP VO Byte DP V1 Byte Byte Name Description 0 5 0 5 Profibus DP standard diagnostic data 6 6 Header byte Device related diagnostic with length including header 7 Profibus DP firmware Profibus DP firmware version high byte 8 Profibus DP firmware Profibus DP firmware version low byte 9 Profibus DP firmware Profibus DP firmware version test version 7 DP V1 0x81 Status Type Diagnostic Alarm 8 DP V1 slot number e g 0x01 9 DP V1 0x81 Status Type Diagnostic Alarm 464 1639502 12 2006 Use Byte 10 13 DP VO DP V1 Byte Byte Name Description 10 Manufacturer Specific ID Module identifier 31 LTM R con
450. wiring diagram L Local control O Off N Network control T LON FW Forward Io eae RV Reverse i 544 1639502 12 2006 IEC Format Wiring Diagrams Two Step Wye Delta Mode Wiring Diagrams Application The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse local control wiring diagram Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Local Control Start Stop E E 1 The N C interlock contacts KM1 and KM3 are not mandatory because the controller electronically interlocks O 1 and O 2 1639502 12 2006 545 IEC Format Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Local Control Application Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Local Control with Network Control Selectable Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Local Control with Network Control Selectable The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained local control wiring diagram Start Stop The following application diagram features 3 wire impulse local contro with network control selectable wiring diagram L Local control O Off N Network control LON The following application diagram features 2 wire maintained local control with network control selectable wiring diagram L Local control O Off N Network control
451. word helps prevent unauthorized configuration of controller parameters Password protection is disabled by default Your password must be an integer between 0000 and 9999 The controller saves the password in the HMI Keypad Password parameter 444 1639502 12 2006 Use Metering and Monitoring Overview Use the PowerSuite software to monitor dynamically changing parameter values To locate dynamically changing parameter values use the tree control to navigate to and select sub branches of either of the following main branches e Monitoring e Parameters Before you can monitor parameter values an active communications link must be established between the configuration software and the LTM R controller The configuration software periodically updates parameter values accessed through the Monitoring and Parameters branches The refresh rates for updating Monitoring branch and Parameters branch values are separately editable Communications To monitor dynamically changing parameters a communications link must be active Link between the configuration software in your PC and the LTM R controller To find out if a link exists check the taskbar at the bottom of the configuration software If the taskbar indicates e Connected a communications link between the PC and LTM R controller exists and you can monitor dynamically changing parameter values e Disconnected select Connect in either the icon bar or the Link menu
452. y L1 L2 voltage enable bit 1 HMI display L2 L3 voltage enable bit 2 HMI display L3 L1 voltage enable bit 3 HMI display average voltage enable bit 4 HMI display active power enable bit 5 HMI display power consumption enable bit 6 HMI display power factor enable bit 7 HMI display average current ratio enable bit 8 HMI display L1 current ratio enable bit 9 HMI display L2 current ratio enable bit 10 HMI display L3 current ratio enable bit 11 HMI display thermal capacity remaining enable bit 12 HMI display time to trip enable bit 13 HMI display voltage phase imbalance enable bit 14 HMI display date enable bit 15 HMI display time enable 655 658 Word 4 Date and time setting See DT_DateTime p 482 659 681 Reserved 682 Ulnt Network port fallback setting 683 Ulnt Control setting register bits 0 7 Reserved bit 8 Control local channel setting 0 local HMI 1 terminal strip bit 9 Control direct transition bit 10 Bumpless transfer mode 0 bump 1 bumpless bits 11 15 Not significant 684 692 Forbidden 693 Ulnt Network port comm loss timeout Modbus only 694 Ulnt Network port parity setting Modbus only 695 Ulnt Network port baud rate setting 1639502 12 2006 513 Use Register Variable type Read Write
453. y depends on wiring choices The behavior of the Aux1 and Aux2 keypad buttons varies according to the operating mode and wiring configuration as follows Key Can be used to Aux1 e control the closing of the NO O 1 contacts 13 14 to energize the operating of a coil or motor seta bit in LTM R controller memory but control no logic output Aux2 e control the closing of the NO O 2 contacts 23 24 to energize either e another operating coil on the same motor e an operating coil on another motor seta bit in LTM R controller memory but control no logic output 396 1639502 12 2006 Use 8 5 Using the Magelis XBTN410 HMI 1 to many At a Glance Summary This section describes how to use the Magelis XBTN410 HMI to operate up to 8 LTM R controllers in a 1 HMI to many LTM R controllers 1 to many physical configuration The 1 to 1 and the 1 to many physical configurations each presents a unique e user interface LCD display and keypad e menu structure See p 352 for instructions on how to use the Magelis XBTN410 HMI to operate a single LTM R controller in a 1 to 1 configuration Note In a 1 to many physical configuration the Magelis XBTN410 HMI can operate up to 8 LTM R controllers that have previously been commissioned To commission an individual LTM R controller use either e the Magelis XBTN410 HMI programmed for 1 to 1 operations or e PowerSuite software 1639502 12 2006

TeSys T LTM R Profibus Motor Management Controller User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents